Project Manual01 Final

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.
doc 10/27/11
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 1 -
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division DIVISION 00
Section
Heading BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
Page Number
00020 00025 00100 00300 00430 00450 00500 00700
Invitation to Bid.. Affidavit of Site Inspection Instruction to Bidders Bidders Proposal Form Sub-contractor Listing.. Bid Bond Form.. Construction Contract.. General Conditions..
00020-1 to 2 00025-1 00100-1 to 6 00300-1 to 3 00430-1 00450-1 00500-1 to 7 0700-1 to 43
DIVISION 01 01000 01010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Explanation to Specifications. Summary of Work 01000-1 to 2 01010-1 to 3
Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11
01020 01100 01200 01300 01400 01500 01750
Summary of Materials and Finishes. Items for Submission by the Contractor . Shop Drawings. Field Engineering. Construction. Materials and Equipment Warranties and Bonds.
01020-1 to 30 01100-1 to 4 01200-1 to 3 01300-1 01400-1 to 4 01500-1 to 5 01750-1 to 2
DIVISION 02 02050 02100 02160 02200 02280 02400 02500 02520
SITEWORK Demolition. Site Preparation Excavation Support System Earthwork.. Termite and Bukbok Proofing. Site Drainage. Roads and Parking Concrete Curbs, Gutter and Paved Walks 02050-1 to 2 02100-1 to 2 02160-1 to 2 02200-1 to 9 02280-1 to 4 02400-1 02500-1 to 3 02520-1 to 7
DIVISION 02 03100 03200 03300
CONCRETE Concrete Formwork.. Concrete Reinforcement.. Cash in Place Concrete 03100-1 to 3 03200-1 to 3 03300-1 to 6
DIVISION 04
MASONRY 04100 Mortar 04200 Unit Masonry 04100-1 to 2 04200-1 to 2
DIVISION 05
METALS 05100 Structural Metal Framing... 05200 Miscellaneous Metals 05100-1 to 5 05200-1 to 2
DIVISION 06
WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry. 06200 Finish Carpentry.. 06100-1 to 2 06200-1 to 2
DIVISION 07
THERMAL AND MOISTURE 07100 Waterproofing.. 07400 Preformed Roofing.. 07900 Joint Sealants.. 07100-1 to 2 07200-1 to 2 07300-1 to 2
DIVISON 08
DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Metal Doors and Windows. 08200 Wood Doors.. 08520 Aluminum Jalousie Windows. 08700 Hardware.. 08800 Glazing.. 08100-1 to 8 08200-1 08520-1 to 2 08700-1 to 2 08800-1 to 2
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
09200 Plaster 09300 Tile.. 09510 Suspended Ceiling Systems.. 09900 Painting..
09200-1 09300-1 to 2 09510-1 to 4 09900-1 to 5
DIVISION 10
SPECIAL TIES 10400 Identifying Devices 10800 Toilet Accessories. 10400-1 10800-1
DIVISION 14
CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14310 Elevators. 14310-1 to 2
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL 15100 Air-conditioning and Ventilating System 15100-1 to 5
15300 Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems.. 15400 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
15300-1 to 8 15400-1 to 13
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL 16050 General Requirements 16100 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods... 16420 Electrical Distribution System 16700 Fire Alarm and Emergency Management System. 16800 Pathways for Communications Systems. 16850 Structured Cabling.. 16870 Video Surveillance 16050-1 to 9 16100-1 to 2 16420-1 to 2 16700-1 to 4 16800-1 to 5 16850-1 to 12 16870-1 to 23
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID
PROJECT LOCATION
: :
PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT 85 OSMENA BLVD., CEBU CITY
TO :
________________________________
DATE: ________
You are invited to participate in bidding for the above project:
The details of the bid are as follows:
1.0 QUALIFIED BIDDERS
Those invited to bid.
2.00 SECUREMENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
For invited bidders, complete Bid Documents, may be secured from:
NATZ ARCHITECTURE SERVICES

85 Osmena Blvd., Cebu City Mobile: 0921- 3600-023 Tel.No.: 253-1901 (Loc. 409)
3.00 PRE-BID DOCUMENTS
For further clarifications and instructions regarding the project, a Pre-bid Conference among the bidders, Owner and Architect shall be held at:
Place:
Date:
Time:
Attendance at the Pre-bid conference is compulsory for the bidders or their authorized representatives.
4.00 SUBMITTAL AND PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS
Sealed proposals for the above project shall be received by the Owner or his representatives at: Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Place:
Date:
Time:
The Bids shall then be publicly opened and read.
5.00 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS
The owner and the Architect reserve the right to reject any or all Proposals, waive any defects or informality therein, or to accept such bid which may be considered most advantageous.
6.00 OFFICIAL NOTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT
Invited Bidder must notify in writing or telegram the Architect of their intent to participate or not in the bidding. The notification should reach the Architec ts office not later than three (3) days after receipt of invitation.
Received by:
_____________________________________
Date:
_____________________________________
Note:
Please sign in and return two (2) copies of this invitation to the office of the Architect.
END OF SECTION 00020
SECTION 00025
AFFIDAVIT OF SITE INSPECTION
This is to certify that the following person/s:
representing our company:
_____________________________________________________________________________
Name of Bidder
has/have visited the site for the project: PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT located at ________________________________________________ on the following date/s:
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
for the purpose of investigating the nature of the site and acquainting ourselves with the circumstances found therein affecting the proposed works and our own responsibilities over the circumstances found therein of making a bid entering into a construction agreement with _______________________. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
BIDDERS AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY:
__________________________________________________________ Name
__________________________________________________________
Signature
ATTESTED BY:
Owners representative
Date
SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PROJECT
LOCATION :
TO :
______________________________ DATE: _________________
1.0
SCOPE OF THE CONTRACT
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the complete project construction, ready for use, as shown on the drawings and/or described in the Specifications. These shall include final connections of all utilities to existing mains. The Owner, however, reserves the right to assign other Contracts in connection with this work.
2.0
SECURING AND COMPLIANCE WITH BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Drawings, Specifications, and other supporting Bid Documents may be obtained at the time and place indicated in the invitation to bid (Section 00020) or as informed by the office of Architect Nathaniel J. Hernando. Bidders shall comply with all conditions stipulated in these bidding documents.
3.0
REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING PROPOSALS
The site and all structures located thereon shall be thoroughly examined in relation to all conditions which directly affect the Contract work. The proposal sum shall reflect all such affecting conditions.
4.0
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
Bidders are advised to carefully scrutinize the Bidding and Contract Requirements (Division 00), and particularly the Summary of Materials and Finishes (Section 01020). If any Bidder, in preparing his bid, has doubt as to the true meaning and intent of any part of the Bid Documents or find errors, discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions in them, he shall at once request interpretation or correction from the Architect.
Request of such clarification must be in the office of the Architect at least seven (7) days before the bid opening date. If the matter in question is deemed to have possible effects on the bid amount, the architect shall then promptly issue his/her response on the matter in the form of a Bid Bulletin. Verbal instruction will have no validity regardless of source.
Bidders shall be notified by telephone or telegram of the issuance of all Bid Bulletins, to be secured from the office of the Architect. For bidders who are distantly based, or who may be difficult to contact, it is advised that they communicate with the Architect prior to Bid Opening to inquire if ay Bid Bulletins have been issued to the Contractors.
5.0
PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BID PROPOSALS
The following shall be followed to the letter, otherwise, proposals may be declared unacceptable.
A. Bid/Tender (Section 00300) shall be submitted in triplicate; one (1) original as attached herewith, plus two (2) photocopies. B. Contractors Sub-Contractor Listing (Section 00430) including major suppliers listing shall likewise be submitted in triplicate ; one (1) original as attached herewith, plus two (2) photocopies. Bidders are required to the Specifications for guidance. C. The Bidders legal name and business address shall be stated in f ull. D. Erasures, changes or interlineations on the Proposals and Cost Estimate sheets shall bear the signature or initial of the Bidder. E. The Bid Price shall include all work contemplated in the Plans and Specifications (except as specifically excluded therein) plus additions, deletions or modifications required by any addenda or Bid Bulletins issued prior to the Bid Opening. Therefore the amount quoted in the Contractors Proposal will be deemed to have included all items contained in these documents, and Bidders may not choose to exclude any item or work called for or mentioned in the Bid Documents. F. No Verbal telephone or telegraphic proposals, modifications or cancellations will be considered. G. The Bidder guarantees his Bid to be good for a period of sixty (60) days after the Bid Opening. H. Signatures shall be longhand and executed by a principal duly authorized to enter into contracts. I. Bid envelopes shall contain nothing but the following: 1. Bid/ Tender (Proposal), in triplicate. 2. Sub-Contractor Listing and major suppliers listing, in triplicate. 3. Cost estimate Sheets and Cost Estimate Guide, in triplicate. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
4. Cash bond, in managers check, of not less than five (5%)(5) of the Bid Price.
J.
Bid envelopes shall be legal size brown envelopes bearing the Bidders name, sealed and addressed as follows:
BID FOR
PROJECT
LOCATION :
K. It is the Bidders responsibility to see to it that his proposal is received at the proper time. Any proposal received after the scheduled Bid Opening time will be returned to the Bidders unopened. L. All taxes, licenses, fees adand permits imposed by the local and/or national government shall be included in the Bid price. M. No claims for extra compensation shall be entertained by the Owner and the Architect for negligence or inadvertence on the Contractors part in obtaining all necessary data and clarifications. N. The Bid amount in the Proposal shall be quoted in words as well as in figures. In case of discrepancy between prices quoted in words and those in figures, the words shall prevail. O. In case of discrepancy between the prices on the Contractors proposal shall prevail. However, accuracy of cost estimate will have a great bearing on the evaluation of the Contractors Proposal.
6.0
BID WITHDRAWALS
Prior to Bid opening, Bidders may withdraw bid by written request or by reclaiming bid envelopes before the opening of bids.
7.0
SUB-CONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
The Bidders proposed sub- Contractors and suppliers shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and the Architect.
8.0
FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OF CONTRACT
The Bidders proposed sub-contractors and major suppliers adherence to Specifications, compliance with the Instructions to Bidders, together with the amount of the Bid, shall be vital elements considered in the award of the Contract.
9.0
OPENING OF BIDS
See Item 4.00 of the Invitation to Bid. Bidders are encouraged to come early since late comers will be automatically disqualified.
10.00
AWARD OR REJECTION OF BIDS
The Owner reserves the right to accept any proposal and to reject any or all bids and to waive informality or irregularity therein.
11.00 ACCEPTANCE OF PROPOSAL
The acceptance of proposal shall be a written approval of award within sixty (60) days after the Opening of Bids. No Bidder shall consider himself under the Contract until such notice has been issued and/or the Contract has been signed.
12.00 CHANGE ORDER
All proposed changes in construction shall be made on the Standard Change Order Form, a sample copy of which is attached herewith. No changes in the Contract shall be allowed unless authorized on this form.
13.00 REQUEST FOR PAYMENT
As provided for in the General Conditions (Section 00700) of the Contract, the Contractors payment request shall be subject to the review and approval of the Owner and the Architect.
14.00 CASH BOND AND BID BOND
Each proposal shall be accompanied by a Cash Bond in the form of Managers Check issued by a reputable banking institution , made payable to _______________________, in the amount of not less than five percent (5 %) of the Bid Price. Proposal shall become NULL and VOID if Cash Bond is addressed or dat5eddated incorrectly and if the amount is less than the required percentage.
The Cash Bond will be returned to unsuccessful Bidders within three (3) days after the proposals are opened, except those that the Owner elects to hold until the successful bidder is determined. The conditionally accepted bidder may replace his Cash Bond with a bond during the sixty (60) days guarantee period. Bid Bond shall be equal to the amount of the Cash Bond and issued by a bonding company approved of the Owner.
15.00 EXECUTION OF PROPOSAL AMDAND DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO EXECUTE
The successful Bidder shall, within ten (10) days after the Owners written approval of award, enter into Contract with the Owner and shall commence work within ten (10) days after execution of the Contract. Failure to do so shall constitute a breach of the agreement and the Bidder/Contractor shall be liable to liquidate damages. The damages for such breach will include loss from interference with the Owners Construction Program and other items whose accurate amount will be difficult or impossible to compute. The Bid Bond shall be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages.
In the event that the Bidder, whose Proposal has been accepted, fails or refuses to execute the Contract as required, the Owner may, at his option, determine that such Bidder has abandoned the Contact,Contract, and thereupon, his Proposal and the acceptance thereof shall become NULL and VOID, ant and the Owner shall be entitled to liquidate damages, for this purpose, the Bid Bond shall be forfeited in favor of the Owner.
16.00 CONTRACTS, PAYMENTS AND PERFORMANCE BONDS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The right and obligations provided in the Contract shall become effective and bonding upon the parties only upon its execution. The Contract shall be executed in six (6) copies and shall be accompanied by a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond. Both the form of the Bond and the company issuing them shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. Bonds issued by companies not approved by the Owner will not be accepted. The costs of such Bonds shall be the obligation of the Contractor.
The performance Bond shall be in sum equal to thirty (30) percent of the Contract Price, conditioned for the faithful performance of the Contractor to its tenure and shall be enforced for a period of extending at least sixty calendar days beyond the contract period.
The Payment Bond shall be in a sum equal to thirty (30) percent of the Contract Price, conditioned for the satisfaction of obligations for the materials and labor employed upon the work.
17.00 ADDITIONAL SECURITY
Should any Surety Bond for the performance of the Contract become unacceptable to the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly furnish such additional securities as may be required from time to protect the interest of the Owner and persons supplying labor and/or materials in the prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contract.
18.00 RELEASE OF THE PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS
The Contractors Payment Bond shall be released by the Owner upon submission of a complete release of liens arising out of this Contract, all receipts, and an affidavit that the release and receipt include labor and materials. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The Performance Bond shall be released by the Owner within five (5) days after Acceptance of the work and after the Contractor shall have furnished the Owner with a Guarantee Bond equal to twenty percent (20 %) of the contract Price. The Guarantee Bond shall be for the purpose of guaranteeing the material and workmanship supplied by the contractor for a period of one (1) year. The Guarantee Bond shall be issued by a bonding company approved by the Owner.
Formatted: Font color: Red
(Try to check where would the all risk insurance be inserted)
SECTION 00300 BIDDERS PROPOSAL FORM
PROJECT
LOCATION :
COMPANY/CONTRACTOR/FIRM: ________________________________________
BUSINESS ADDRESS: _________________________________________________
GENTLEMEN:
1.0 In accordance with your Invitation to Bid, for the complete construction of the above project and subject to the Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents as prepared by the office of Architect Nathaniel J. Hernando, which in so far as they relate to this TENDER, are made part hereof, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation, services, licenses, fees, permits, and other items required to complete the project in the Total Bid Amount (Total Amount as shown below of ________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________(P __________________________)
Broken down as follows:
Bid Item 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. SITEWORK 3. CONCRETE WORKS & REINFORCEMENT Read and accepted as part of the Contract: P P P
Amount
________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
4. MASONRY WORKS 5. METALS 6. WOOD & PLASTICS 7. THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 8. DOORS & WINDOWS 9. FINISHES 10. SPECIALTIES 11. MECHANICAL 12.ELECTRICAL
P P P P P P P P P P Total Bid Amount
2.0 ( I) have available, and will use the following equipment on this project at any time they are
needed.
_____________________________ ___________________________ ________________________
_____________________________ ___________________________ ________________________
_____________________________ ___________________________ ________________________
3.0 For additional work not included in the Bid, we (I) agree to furnish all additional labor, materials and services required at cost, plus a fee of fifteen percent (15%) to cover overhead, Contractors tax and profit.
4.0 We (I) propose to start work within ten (10) calendar days from the date we (I) receive your letter of authority to commence work and will complete the same within a period of _______________________________________________________________________________ (________________________) days including Sundays and holidays.
5.00 Cost of all export, national and local taxes, licenses and fees, building, sanitary, electrical, fencing permit, and final certificates required by the authorities, are included in the above proposal.
6.00 The undersigned agrees to furnish Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.
7.00 Invitation to Bid dated _____________________________________________________________ And Bid Bulletin Nos. _____________________________________________________________ have been received.
8.00 We (I) have visited the site and are (am) aware and acquainted with the conditions as they exist and the facilities, difficulties, and restrictions affecting the performance of the work and that we (I) have completely examined the Plans and Specifications of the Owner and the Architect. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
9.00 The complete proposal, all items required by Article 5, Section J of the Instructions to Bidders are attached herewith.
In Testimony hereof, the Bidder has hereunto set his hand this _______________day of _____________ , 20___.
Respectfully submitted:
(If Bidder is an individual or Partnership) Name of Bidder / Partner : __________________________________________________
Signature of Bidder / Partner: __________________________________________________ Firm name: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ___________________________________________________________________ PTR No.: __________________issued at _______________________on ______________Contactors License No. ______________________________ Res. Cert. No. _______________________issued at ____________________________ on ______________________Tax Identification No.:____________
Names and Addresses of Partners:
Name
Address
Name
Address
(If Bidder is a Corporation)
Name of Authorized Representative:
____________________________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative: __________________________________________________ Firm Name : ________________________________________________________________________ Address : ________________________________________________________________________
PTR No.: __________________issued at _______________________on ______________Contactors License No. ______________________________ Res. Cert. No. _______________________issued at ____________________________ on ______________________Tax Identification No.:____________
Names of Officers of the Corporation:
Name
Address
Name
Address
SECTION 00430 SUB-CONTRACTOR LISTING

PROJECT
LOCATION :
CONTRACTOR : __________________________________________ Bid Opening Date: __________
Division of Work
Sub-Contractor Proposed
Labor Amount
Materials Amount
Total Amount
NOTE: Provide additional Sheet of same format if necessary.
SECTION 00450 BID BOND FORM
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we _____________________________________________________________________________
of _______________________________________________________________________________, as
principal, and the _____________________________________________________________________
Corporation / Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the Philippines as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the in the sum of ___________________________
(Php __________________________________), for the payment of which sum to be truly made, we bind Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
ourselves, jointly and severally, by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above-bound Principal will submit a Bid on _____________ which, subject to all conditions of Contract, required of the Bidder a bond for the said Bid.
NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are such that if the above-bound Principal in case becomes the successful Bidder, and shall within 10 (Ten) days after receiving written Notice of Award, enter into a Contract with ______________________________________ or its duly designated representative(s) for the construction of the PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise, it shall remain force and effect.
Designed at Cebu City Philippines this _______________ day of ___________, 20___.
_________________________________________________________________ Corporation / Company
_________________________________________________________________ Principal By: _________________________________________________________________ Surety
In the Presence of:
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
SECTION 00500 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
This Agreement made and entered into this ________ day of _______________, 20___, by and between:
WITNESSETH:
That the parties hereto, for the consideration hereinafter named, hereby covenant and agree as follows:
ARTICLE I
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
That the instruction to Bidders, Contractors Proposal, General Conditions of the Contract, Technical Specifications, Plans, Bidders Bond Bulletins and/ or Addenda, as well as Drawings relating thereto on file in the office of the Architect, form the Contract and are hereby made hereto and acknowledged to be n integral part of this Contract Documents are signed by both parties.
ARTICLE II
SCOPE OF WORKS
That the CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the payment to be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR of the sum of money hereinafter named, shall construct/ perform and erect.
PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT- 85 OSMENA BLVD., CEBU CITY
Upon the site, in the manner and form shown on the Plans thereof and described in the Technical Specifications prepared by NATZ ARCHITECTURE SERVICES, hereinafter referred to as the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
ARCHITECT, and to satisfaction of the said Architect, Plans and Technical Specifications, as hereto attached and made a part thereof.
In the said construction, The CONTRACTOR, shall fully and faithfully perform all labor, furnish all tools, plants, equipment and all materials; and will do all things necessary for the proper construction and completion of all work shown and described by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE III
TIME OF COMPLETION AND SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION
A. The work to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under this contract shall commence not later than _________________________________________________ and completion shall not be later than
_________________________________________________ unless an extension of time has been authorized and approved by the OWNER and the ARCHITECT in writing.
B. It is understood that time is an essential feature of this Contract and that upon failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete the work stipulated in this Contract within the time provided, the th CONTRACTOR shall pay the Owner the sum of 1/10 of ONE (1) PERCENT of the Contract Price or PESOS: ____________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________ (P________________) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Philippine Currency, (per diem) for each day of delay in the completion of the Contract, said payment to be made as liquefied damages, and not by way of penalty; and the OWNER may deduct form any sum due or to become due to the CONTRACTOR any accrued sum from liquidated damages as hereinafter stated, without need of any court action.
C. A preliminary punch list of any deficiencies shall be prepared by the Project Supervisor and submitted to the CONTRACTOR Ten (10) days before the date set for the completion of the work as stated in Article III A ( taking into consideration any time extension approved in writing by the OWNER and the ARCHITECT). All items in the preliminary punch list shall be completed prior to final walk-through and final punch listing.
D. The Contractors Ten Percent (10%) retention shall be retained by the OWNER until all items on the final Punch list are satisfactorily completed. If the CONTRACTOR shall refuse or fail to complete the final punch list within the time fixed by a written notice, the OWNER shall then have the right to use the Contractors ten percent (10%) retention amount to complete the same, and the balance, if any, shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR.
ARTICLE IV
SCOPE OF WORKS
The OWNER, for and in consideration of the fulfillment of this Contract by the CONTRACTOR, in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and subject to the additions and deductions provided therein, shall pay to the CONTRACTOR, to wit:
LUMP SUM: PESOS: __________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________ (P_____________________) Where the quantities originally contemplated are so changed during the progress of the construction, that application of agreed current unit prices to the quantity of the work performed is shown to create a hardship to the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR, there shall be equitable adjustment of the Contract to prevent such a hardship. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
ARTICLE V
PAYMENTS
The OWNER shall make payment on account of this Contract (not more than once a month ) based on the value of work accomplished less ten percent (10%) retention (regardless of the percentage of completion of the contract) and Expanded Withholding Tax (One Percent of the amount due), for the duration of the Contract.
As required by Philippine law, the Contractors Expanded Withholding Tax withheld from each payment to the CONTRACTOR shall be transmitted by the OWNER to the Bureau of Internal Revenue in favor of the CONTRACTORS Tax Account NO. ____________________________.
No payment shall be made unless Payment requests are on the prescribed form and bear the approval of the Architect.
The full and final payment, together with the Ten percent (10%) retention shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR as provided for and upon compliance of all requisites under Article 22, 11 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE VI
LABOR AND MATERIALS COST INCREASE
Increase in the cost of labor and/or materials due to government action or to any other factor shall be for the sole account of, and charged to the CONTRACTOR.
On the other hand, any decrease in the cost of labor and/or materials shall not affect the Contract Sum herein.
ARTICLE VII
GUARANTEE
Unless otherwise specified under the individual specification headings, the CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees the work stipulated in this Contract, and shall make good any defect in materials and workmanship which makes itself evident within ONE (1) year after Final Acceptance of the work without prejudice to the provisions of Article 1723 of the Civil Code. The CONTRACTOR shall leave the work in perfect order upon completion and present the Final Certificates to the ARCHIOTECTARCHITECT promptly.
If in the opinion of the OWNER and the ARCHITECT, the CONTRACTOR has failed to act promptly in rectifying any defect in the work that appear within the period mentioned above, the OWNER and the ARCHITECT may, at their own discretion, using the Guarantee Bond amount for corrections, have the work done by another Contractor at the expense of the CONTRACTOR or his Bondsmen. However, nothing in this section shall in any way affect or relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to the OWNER.
ARTICLE VII
PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT, AND GUARANTEE BONDS
The CONTRACTOR shall, in accordance with section 16 of the Instruction to Bidders of the Contract Documents for this Project, furnish a Performance Bond in the form of a Surety Bond issued by any Insurance Company approved by the OWNER, in the amount of THIRTY Percent (30%) of the Contract Price or PESOS: ____________________________________________________________________________________
(__________________________) conditioned for the faithful performance and compliance with all the terms and conditions of this agreement as well as the Plans, Technical Specifications, General Conditions and other Contract Documents relating thereto, including payment of liquidated damages stipulated in paragraph B of Article III of this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish Payment Bond in the form of a Surety Bond acceptable to the OWNER in the amount of THIRTY percent (30%) approved of the Contract price of PESOS: ____________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________ ( P __________________________ ) to guarantee the payment of the wages of the laborers as required by the Labor Code and its implementing laws and regulations, and the settlement of all outstanding indebtedness for materials used, taxes, and all unpaid accounts in connection with this Contract.
Upon completion and sign-off of the final punch list work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with the Certificate of Final Completion issued by the ARCHITECT and shall simultaneously furnish a Guarantee Bond executed by the OWNERS approved Surety Company, in the amount of TWENTY percent (20%) or PESOS: ____________________________________________________________________________________ Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
(P_____________________) conditioned upon the faithful compliance by the CONTRACTOR of the Guarantee stipulated under Article VII of this agreement.
Upon OWNERS receipt of the Guarantee Bond, the OWNER shall notify the respective bonding companies of the project completion and request cancellation of the Performance and Payment Bonds for this Project.
Should any Surety bonds for the performance of the Contract become unacceptable become unacceptable to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly furnish such additional securities as may be required from time to time to protect the interest of the OWNER and of persons supplying labor and/or materials in the prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contract.
ARTICLE IX
INSURANCE OF THE WORK
The CONTRACTOR shall have the project insured for the full insurable value thereof against loss by fire, tornado, earthquake, tidal wave, typhoons, and like occurrences. (All risk insurance). The insurance policy shall be issued by an insurance company approved by the OWNER and shall be on file at the OWNERS office within TEN (10) days after signing the Contract. The insurance policy shall be made payable to the OWNER.
ARTICLE X
VALIDITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The validity, interpretation and construction of this Contract, with the exception of the Plans, Specifications, and General Conditions, shall be governed by the laws of the Republic of the Philippines. The decision of the ARCHITECT ofand the OWNER, NATZ ARCHITECTURE SERVICES, upon all matters affecting the works, and his interpretation of the Plans and Specifications, shall be binding upon both parties.
ARTICLE XI
ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
In addition to the foregoing terms and conditions, it is further agreed that:
A. The OWNER, ARCHITECT, and any persons authorized by them shall at all reasonable time have access to the building site, workshops of the CONTRACTOR, or other places where work is being prepared for the building for the purpose of checking the materials and equipment used on the project.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ARCHITECT all submittals for the latters approval. Said submittals, once approved, shall become the standard selection for building.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ARCHITECT three (3) copies of his proposed Construction Schedule in Network Analysis System (PERT-CPM) within ten (10) days after signing of the Contract. The OWNER and the ARCHITECT shall have the right to evaluate the schedule and make necessary corrections or changes as needed.
D. If at any time, the CONTRACTOR exceeds the percentage weight of items in his Bid Proposal, the OWNER reserves the right, without need of court action, to cancel this Contract and complete this work on a Negotiable Contract basis with a Contractor of his choice.
E. UAP Documents 301 (General Conditions) is acknowledged to be part of this Contract. All the Conditions therein, in so far as they are not in conflict with any provisions mentioned in any of the foregoing or elsewhere in the Contract Documents as judged by the ARCHITECT, shall be complied with.
ARTICLE XII
FINAL PAYMENT
Following the successful completion and Acceptance of the Contract Work by the OWNER, a final progress payment statement covering the balance of the amount due under the Contract shall be sent to the ARCHITECT for signature who shall in turn forward the certified final progress payment of the OWNER. The OWNROWNER shall then verify the statement and make any corrections or adjustments necessary to reflect liquidated damages or uncompleted work, if there be any, on the project. Final payment shall then be made by the OWNER on the above statements or amendments.
ARTICLE XIII CONTRACT COPIES
This contract shall be made and executed in six (6) copies.
IN WITNESS THEREOF the parties to this Contract have on this day in the first above given, hereunto set
their hands and seals at the bottom of this page and on the left hand margin of all other pages of this agreement.
OWNER
CONTRACTOR
By: ___________________________________
By: ________________________________
Signed in the presence of:
______________________________________
___________________________________
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
PROVINCE OF _______________
CITY OF ____________________
Personally appeared before me:
Name
________________________________________________________________
Res. Cert. No. :
________________________________________________________________
Issued on
________________________________________________________________
And
Name
________________________________________________________________
Res. Cert. No. :
________________________________________________________________
Issued on
________________________________________________________________
Known to me to be the same persons who executed the foregoing Construction Contract, consisting of SEVEN (7) pages including this page, wherein this acknowledgment is written, signed by the parties and their instrumental witnesses on each and every page thereof and they acknowledge to me that the same is their free and voluntary act and deed.
WITNESS MY HAND AND SEAL at ____________________, Philippines, this _________day of ___________________________, 20___.
END OF SECTION 00500 Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Countercheck stipulations for Site demolitions and relocation
SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITONS
1.0
DEFINITIONS
1.0
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract consists of the following documents, including all additions, deletions, and modifications, incorporated therein before the execution of the Contract. A. B. C. D. Agreement General Conditions Specifications Drawings Section 00500 in its final/signed form Section 00700 including all referrals Division 00 to 16 of Project Manual Including all revisions
1.02 OWNER Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
____________________________, the company ordering the project execution, including duly appointed successors, or authorized representatives.
1.03 ARCHITECT
Natz Architecture Services, a firm commissioned by the Owner acting personally or through assistants duly authorized in writing by the Architect to act on his behalf.
1.04 ENGINEER
The person so named in the Contract Documents or his representative duly authorized in writing to act for an Engineer.
1.05 PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE
The Full-time Construction Inspector if one should be so hired by the Owner duly authorized in writing to assist the Architect and Engineer in the supervision of the work.
1.06 CONTRACTOR
The person or firm whose proposal has been accepted and to whom the Contract was awarded.
1.07 SUB-CONTRACTOR
Anyone having a direct contract with the contractor who acts for or on behalf of the Contractor in executing any part of the Contract, not including one who merely furnishes materials without labor.
1.08 SURETY
The person, firm or corporation who provides the guarantee for the Contractors Bonds.
1.10 PROPOSAL BOND
The Cashiers check or Surety Bond accompanying the Proposal submitted by the Bidder, as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner for the Construction of the work, if the Contract is awarded to him.
1.11 PERFORMANCE BOND
The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and His Surety as a guarantee of good faith on the part of the Contractor to execute the work in accordance with the terms of the Contract.
1.12 PAYMENT BOND
The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his Surety as a guarantee of good faith on the part of the Contractor to pay all obligations arising from the Contract. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.13 GUARANTEE BOND
The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his surety as a guarantee to the quality of the materials and equipment installed and the workmanship performed by the Contractor.
1.14 AGREEMENT
The contract between the Owner and the Contractor undertaking the project described in the Contract Documents including all supplemental agreements thereto and all special provisions pertaining to the work or materials therefore.
1.15 ADVERTISEMENT or INVITATION TO BID
The notice published by the Owner or the invitations issued to prospective Bidders, giving information as to the nature of the Proposed Project, conditions for the issuance of contract documents, date of bidding, and estimated cost or information that would give the Contractor a general idea of the magnitude and extent of the project.
1.16 BID BULLETIN
The additional information on Contract Documents issued to bidders before date of bidding.
1.17 INTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The list of instructions stipulating the manner on how bids are to be prepared and conditions for the award of contract.
1.18 DRAWINGS
The graphical presentations of the work involved in the project. They include all supplementary details and shop drawings.
1.19 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The printed documents stipulating the procedural and administrative aspects of the contract.
1.20 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The instructions which may be issued prior to the bidding to supplementary and/or modify Drawings, Specifications, and/or General Conditions of the Contract.
1.21 SPECIFICATIONS
The written or printed descriptions of work to be done describing qualities of materials and mode of construction.
1.22 SUPPLEMNENTARYSUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS
The additional information which may be issued as an addition or amendment to the provisions of the Specifications.
1.23 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES
An outline specification enumerating the type or trade names of materials to be used.
1.24 BREAKDOWN OF WORK AND CORRESPONDING VALUE
A listing of the different parts of the work indicating in each part the corresponding value in materials and labor, including an allowance for profit and overhead.
1.25 WRITTEN NOTICE
Written Notice means information, advice, or notification pertinent to the project delivered in person or sent by registered mail to the individual, form or corporation at the last known business address of such individual, firm or corporation.
1.26 ACT OF GOD or FORCE MAJEURE
Includes an earthquake, flood, typhoon, cyclone and other cataclysmic phenomena of nature and all misfortune and accidents which human prudence can not foresee or prevent. Rain, wind, flood or other natural phenomena or inconsequential degree for the locality shall not be construed as an Act Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
of God or Force Majeure and no reparation shall be made to the Contractor for the damages to work resulting there form.from.
1.27 TIME LIMITS
The duration of time allowed by the Contractor for the completion of the Project in any stipulated portions thereof.
1.28 LOCAL LAWS
Pertains to all laws, ordinances and other government regulations applicable to the project and its undertaking. 1.29 WORK
Includes labor or material, or both, as well as equipment, transportation, or other facilities of the Contractor or Sub-contractor necessary to commence and complete the construction called for in the Contract.
1.30 FURNISH
The word furnish shall be understood to mean Purchase and/or fabricate and deliver to the jobsite or other location when so designated.
1.31 INSTALL
The word install shall mean to build in, mount in positions, connect or apply any object specified ready for the intended use.
1.32 PROVIDE
The words provide shall be understood to mean furnish and install.
1.33 REQUIRED OR NECESSARY
The word require and/or necessary shall mean as required or necessary for the complete execution of that portion of the work.
1.34 APPROVED, DIRECTED AND ACCEPTABLE
The words approved, directed, and acceptable, or words of like import shall mean approved, directed by or acceptable to the Architect unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract.
1.35 SINGULAR or PLURAL
In all cases where a device, item or part of equipment is referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many devices, items, or parts as are required to complete the work.
2.0
EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS
2.01 SIGNATURE ON DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents shall be signed in quintuplicate by the Owner and the Contractor duly witnessed.
2.02 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intent of the Drawings and the Specifications is to prescribe a complete work that the Contract is to undertake to comply with the Contract. The intention of the Documents is to include all labor and materials, equipment and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work.
2.03 CONFORMITY TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work shall conform to the Contract Documents.
a. If there would be a variance between the Drawings and the Specifications, the provisions of the Specifications shall control. In case of conflict between the General Conditions of the Contract or any modifications thereof and the detailed Specifications requirements, the detailed Specifications requirements shall control.
b. Any discrepancies found between the Drawings and Specifications and the site conditions or any errors or omissions in the Drawings or Specifications shall be immediately reported to the Architect or Engineer, who shall promptly correct such discrepancies, errors, or omissions after his discovery. Any work involving such discrepancies shall be done at the Contractors Account.
c.
Responsibility for adequacy of the design and for sufficiency of the Drawings and Specifications Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
shall be borne by the Owner. The complete requirements of the work to be performed under the Contract shall be set forth in the Drawings and Specifications to be supplied by the Owner through the Architect or Engineer or by Architect or Engineer as representative of the Owner. Drawings and Specifications furnished shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be the true accurate development thereof.
d. The Architect or Engineer shall furnish from time to time all additional detail drawings and instructions essential to the proper execution of the work. The Architect or Engineer shall furnish with reasonable promptness such additional detail drawings and instructions. All the additional drawings and instructions shall be consistent with Contract Documents, true development thereof, and reasonably inferable there from. All such additional drawings and instructions are to be considered of equal force as those which originally accompany the Specifications.
e. The Contractor and the Architect or the Engineer, if either one so requests, shall jointly prepare a schedule, subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the work, fixing dates at which the various detail drawings will be required and the Architect or Engineer shall furnish them in accordance with that schedule. Under like conditions, a schedule shall be prepared, fixing the dates for the submission of shop drawings, for the beginning of manufacture and installation of material, and for the completion of the various parts of the work.
2.04 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AT SITE OF WORK
The Contractor shall keep at the site of the work, in good order, one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Breakdown of Work, Schedule of Construction of Work and including all instructions and graphs to be available to the Architect and his representative.
2.05 OWNERSHIP OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Drawings, Specifications, and Models, including all additional instructions and copies thereof, furnished for this work by the Architect are the property of the Architect. They are not to be used on any other work, and, with the exception of the signed contract set, are to be returned to the Architect at the completion of the work, before the Final Payment to the Contractor is made.
3.0
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
3.01 COPIES OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The Architect shall furnish the contractor free of change, five sets of drawings and Specifications necessary for the securance of building permits as required by the building official.
In addition, 2 sets of drawings labeled For Construction and 1 Set labeled For Modification shall likewise be furnished to the Contractor. One of the two (2) sets designated For Construction and the one designated For Modification shall be kept at the site at all times, preserved and protected from handling, damage and other hazards which may disfigure the documents. The set designated For Modification shall generally act as notations sheets for the immediate re cording of any deviation in the plan or detail as they may necessarily occur in the course of the work. This set shall be the basis for the As-built plans and shall be returned to the Architect after the completion d the Work. All other copies of Drawings and Specifications as required by the Contractor will be furnished to him by the Architect at cost.
3.02 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
All drawings are intended to be coordinated with the Specifications to from a part thereof and also to form a part of the Contract Documents. Where figures are given, they are to be followed in preference to measurements by scale. Anything shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications, or vice-versa, or anything not expressly set forth shall be understood as though specially shown in both, without any extra charge. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.03 CLARIFICATION OF MEANING OF DRAWING AND SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall carefully examine, compare and verify the data furnished by the Drawings and Specifications. Any doubt as to the meaning of the Drawings (including notes thereon) or of the Specifications, will be explained, and all directions and explanations necessary and proper to make more definite and certain any requirements of the Drawings (including notes thereon) or of the provisions of the Specifications and give them due effect, will be given by the Architect.
a. Should a conflict occur in or between Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall be deemed to have estimated the more expensive way of doing work unless he shall ask for and obtain a decision in writing from the Architect, before submission of proposals, as to which method or materials will be required. If, afterward, the less expensive work is done, the Contractor shall credit the Owner an amount equivalent to the difference between the more expensive and the less expensive work.
b. If, in the Contractors opinion, any work indicate in the Drawings is specified in such manner as will make it impossible to produce a first class work, he shall refer the same to the Architect for interpretation before proceeding with the work. If the Contractor fails to make such reference, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out the most satisfactory manner.
3.04 DISCREPANCIES IN DRAWINGS
In case of discrepancy in the figures or drawings, the matter shall be submitted immediately to the Architect before any adjustment shall be made by the Contractor save only at the latters own risk and expense. The decision of the Architect on the adjustment of discrepancies so as to conform to the real intent of the Drawings and Specifications shall govern and shall be followed by the Contractor.
4.0
DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
See Section 01200: Detail and Shop drawings.
5.0
SHOP DRAWINGS
See Section 01200: Detail and Shop Drawings.
6.0
LAWS, REGULATIONS AND SITE CONDITIONS
6.01 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
In general, the Contractor shall comply with all the laws, city or municipal ordinances, and all Building Codes, rules and regulations, in so far as they are binding upon or affect the parties hereto, the work, or those engaged thereon. He shall also, comply with regulations of firms furnishing utilities such as water, gas, telephone, and electricity for the project.
If the Contractor performs any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules regulations, and without such notice to the Architect, he shall bear arising there from.
6.02 SITE CONDITIONS
Before the bidding and the awarding of the Contract, the Contractor is expected to have visited the locality of the work and made his own estimates of the facilities and difficulties attending to the execution of the proposed contract, including local conditions and all other contingencies. Short of sub-surface exploration, the Contractor shall be responsible for identifying, verifying and measuring actual site dimensions, contour, natural grade, areas for demolition and clearing, and all other matters in so far as they may affect the scope of the work, and to consider such when he prepares his proposal. No extra compensation and extension of time will be given due to negligence or inadvertence of the Contractor. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
7.0
PERMITS, TAXES AND SURVEYS
7.01 PERMITS AND LICENSES
All construction permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the work or of any temporary work and easements in relation thereto should be secured, and the corresponding required fees paid for, by Contractor if specifically stipulated in the prior instructions of the Owner or the Architect.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the actions taken by him should be the construction is started before acquiring the necessary permits and licenses.
The Contractor shall also secure the final occupancy permit but he shall not be responsible for the non-issuance or the delay in the issuance thereof through no fault of the Contractor.
7.02 TAXES
Whenever the law of the place of building requires sales, consumer, use, or other similar tax related or pertinent only to the construction of the project, the Contractor shall pay such tax.
7.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKES AND REFERENCE MARK
The Owner shall be responsible for the establishment of lot lines, boundary lines, easements, and benchmarks by a certified surveyor. The Owner may relegate this responsibility to the Contractor provided the Owner pay for the cost of said services. All other grade, lines, levels, and benchmarks necessary for the prosecution of the work shall be established and maintained by the Contractor.
a. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. He shall report any error or inconsistency to the Architect before commencing work.
b. The Contractor shall provide and maintain well-built batter boards at all corners. He shall establish benchmarks in not less than two widely separated places. As work progresses, he shall establish benchmarks at each floor giving exact levels of various floors.
c.
As work progresses, the Contractor shall lay out exact location of all partitions as a guide to all trades.
7.04 SERVICES OF LICENSED SURVEYOR
See Section 01300: Field Engineering
7.05 FINAL CERTIFICATION
Final certification shall be submitted upon completion of work, or upon completion of any section of work, if required by the Architect, and before final payment is made. Any exception or deviations from the Drawings shall be noted on final certificate, and there shall be included maps, plots, notes, and the like necessary in the opinion of the Architect to constitute a full and complete report.
8.0
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
8.01 GENERAL
All materials and equipment must conform to all laws, ordinances, regulations and building codes now or hereafter may be in force and applicable during the period of construction and the Contractor shall obtain the necessary permits and pay the required fees therefore to the proper authorities. The Contractor shall bear all damages by reason of any delay in the work arising from his failure to comply with the provisions of this clause.
9.0
EQUIPMENT
9.01 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT
In order to establish the standards of quality, the Architect and the Engineer may have, in the detailed specifications, referred to certain equipment by name and catalog number. This procedure is not to be construed as eliminating from competition other products of equal or better quality by other manufacturers with fully suitable design. a. The Contractor shall furnish the complete list of proposed substitutions prior to the signing of the contract, together with such engineering and catalog data as the Architect and Engineer may require.
b. The Contractor shall abide by the Architects and Engineers judgments when proposed substitute items of equipment are judged to be acceptable and shall furnish the specified item of equipment in such case. All proposals for substitutions shall be furnished in writing by the General Contractor and not by individual trades or materials suppliers. The Architects and Engineer will approve or disapprove proposed substitutions in writing within a reasonable time. No substitute equipment shall be used unless approved in writing.
10.0 MATERIALS, FIXTURES, APPLIANCES Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
10.01 MANUFACTURERS AND DEALERS
Names of proposed ,manufacturers, material men, and dealers who are to furnish materials, fixtures, appliances or other fittings, if not mentioned in the specifications shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as early as possible, to afford proper investigation and checking.
10.02 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall promptly furnish for approval, samples as specified or specified or required. Work shall be in accordance with approved samples.
a. Unless otherwise specified, three samples shall be submitted, and of adequate sizes as to show quality, type, color, range, finish and texture of the material.
b. Each sample shall be labeled, bearing the material name, date, project name, and other pertinent data.
c.
A letter of transmittal in triplicate, from the Contractor requesting approval shall accompany all sets of samples.
d. Materials shall not be ordered until approval is received from the Architect.
10.03 TRADE NAME MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTE Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
a. Whenever items or class of materials is specified exclusively by trade name, by manufacturers name or by catalog reference, only such items shall be used.
b. No substitution shall be made for any material, article or process required under the contract unless approved in writing by the Architect.
c.
Material and articles installed or used without such approval shall be at the risk of subsequent rejections.
d. Samples of materials for use in reinforced concrete work such as steel bars, cement and aggregates and their certificates of origin are to be approved by the Architect.
10.04 TESTING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect as many samples as may be needed for purpose of testing. Testing of all samples shall comply with Specifications and government standards shall be performed by a competent entity or testing laboratory approved by the Architect. All costs for shipment, delivery, handling and tagging of samples are to be paid by the Contractor.
10.05 QUALITY OF MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new. The quality shall be of the best grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. The work shall be performed in the best and most acceptable manner in strict accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
The decision of the Architect as to quality and quantity of work and materials shall be final and precedent to the Contractors right to receive any payment hereunder.
10.06 STORAGE AND STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS
All materials not conforming to the requirements of these specifications shall be considered as defective. Defective materials shall be removed from the field of work and from the site promptly. No defective materials, the defects of which have been subsequently corrected, shall be used until approval has been granted. Upon failure of the Contractor to remove the condemned material form site promptly, the Architect shall have the authority to cause their removal and replacement and to deduct the costs of such removal and replacement from any money due to the Contractor.
a. The apparent silence of the Specifications, Drawings, Special Provisions and Supplementary Specifications, as to any detailed description of quality shall be taken to mean that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only materials and workmanship of the best quality are to be used.
b. Failure or neglect on the part of the Architect to reject bad or inferior materials shall not be construed to imply acceptance of such materials if are discovered at any time prior to final acceptance of such materials are discovered at any time prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner.
10.08 MATERIALS REQUIRING LEAD TIME
The Contractor shall take cognizance of the time element of the Contract. He shall make early arrangements for the purchase and delivery of all materials that require lead time in order to avoid delay of the work. No extension of time or substitution of materials shall be allowed due to negligence or inadvertence of the Contractor to allow for lead time in the procurement of materials.
11.0 OWNER SUPPLIED MATERIALS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
12.0 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
The Contractor shall pay for all royalties and license fees on all patented materials and processes. He shall defend the Owner against all suits or claims for infringement of any patent and trademark rights and shall save the Owner from losses on account thereof.
13.0 MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS
All manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the manufacturers printed directions, unless herein specified to the contrary. Where reference is made to the manufacturers directions, the Contractor shall submit a copy of such directions to the Architect.
14.0 USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, storage of materials, and the operations of his workmen to the limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits or directions of the Architect and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials.
The Contractor shall not use permanent driveway for the transportation of construction material nor allow heavy equipment and trucks to pass over imbedded or underground pipes and utilities. Curbs and gutters, side permanent pavements and all permanent structures, shall be protected from damage.
The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The Contractor shall not allow workmen or any other person not involved in the construction operations to stay, loiter or sleep on site.
15.0 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES AND FACILITIES
15.01 TEMPORARY OFFICES
The Contractor shall at all times provide and maintain adequate watertight temporary offices with water, light, telephone, and toilet facilities for the use of the Architect, resident engineers, inspectors, contractor and sub-contractors. These offices shall be provide with a wooden floor raised above the ground, windows, doors, and locks, tables, blackboard, tack board, benches and racks for drawings. 2 One room of approximately 12m shall be provided with adequate air-conditioning for the Architects use.
15.02 TEMPORARY WORKERS HOUSING
The temporary buildings for housing men or other forms of protection will be permitted only at such places as the Owner or Architect shall designate, and the sanitary condition of the premises and the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained. Cooking, sleeping or smoking within the building line shall be strictly prohibited.
15.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide, construct and maintain for the duration of the Contract, ample sanitary toilets including adequate water connections for the use of the personnel and laborers. These facilities shall be provided with adequate devices for privacy and located at such points on site as to be convenient for use but out of the way of the work. The use of these sanitary at all times and, together with its connections, is removed prior to the completion of the project. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
15.04 TEMPORARY BARRICADES AND GUARD LIGHTS
The Contractor shall furnish and put up all temporary barricades and guard lights necessary for the safety and protection of workers on site. Guard lights at the top of false work towers, barricades, railings and other such safety devices shall be maintained by the Contractor throughout the duration of construction.
15.05 TEMPORARY WATER, POWER AND TELEPHONE FACILITIES
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the local utility companies in order that temporary facilities for water, power, and telephone are sufficiently provided till the completion of work. All expenses in connection therewith and all expenses for consumption be paid by the Contractor.
15.06 TEMPORARY SIGNS
No signs or advertisements will be put up on site without the A rchitects approval. The Contractor shall erect a billboard giving names and addresses of the Architect and his Design Engineers, the Contractors, and the various sub-contractors, the text, design, size, colors, lettering and location of which shall be approved by the Architect.
15.07 TEMPORARY STAIRS, LADDERS, RAMPS, AND RUNWAYS
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, runways, derricks, chutes and the like, as required for the proper execution of the works by Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
all trades. All such apparatus shall meet the safety standards and all requirements of the Labor Law and all other Laws applicable thereto.
15.08 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
The Contractor shall provide temporary weather tight enclosures for all exterior openings as soon as walls and roof are built so as to protect all work from weather.
15.09 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall remove all temporary work from the premises, and shall clean the premises as a condition for completing the work before acceptance by the Owner.
16.0 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
16.01 PROTECTION OF WORK AND OWNERS PROPERTY
The Contractor shall put up and continuously maintain adequate protection for all his work from damage and shall protect the Owners property, as well as all materials furnished and delivered to him by the Owner from damage or loss. He shall make good any such damage or loss except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Owner due or those that may be considered as Acts of God.
a. The Contractor shall provide competent and reliable watchmen to guard the site and premises for the duration of the Construction until turn over. The Contractor shall provide locking devices on doors and openings as soon as the structure is ready to accept such devices and shall keep these under his control. In the event that the Architect deems the security arrangements inadequate or incompetent, the Contractor shall immediately address such inadequacy to the Architects satisfaction.
b. Smoking and open fires on site shall be strictly prohibited except in clearly designated areas, and signs to these effects shall be posted conspicuously.
c.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain barrels of water and fire buckets on site for fire protection, which shall not be used for any other purpose.
d. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good working condition an adequate number of the extinguishers.
16.01 OLD MATERIALS
All old materials of value found by the Contractor on site, including old salvageable material from the demolition of existing structures on site shall be carefully stock piled by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for these materials until they shall have been removed from the site by the Owner or until final acceptance of the Work.
16.02 TREES AND OTHER PLANTS
Existing trees, plants, shrubs, etc. which are to remain shall be boxed and otherwise protected from damage. No trees within the site or located outside the building lines shall be cut or removed without specific approval from the Architect.
a. All trees and other plants that need to be transplanted elsewhere within fifty (50) meters from the building lines shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense in accordance with instructions from the Architect.
b. Damage to trees, plants, shrubs, streets, sidewalks, etc. resulting from construction work shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Architect.
17.01 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY AND EXISTING UTILITIES
17.01 ADJACENT PROPERTY
The Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Contract Documents. The construction building or work in addition to any neighboring property or building which may be jeopardized in any manner, shall be thoroughly and substantially braced against winds, floods, settling, falling, or like damage and when necessary, covered and protected from whether at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall be liable and shall pay for all such damages caused by his work and by the acts or neglect of his agents, employees or workmen.
17.02 EXISTING UTILITIES
Existing utilities if manageddamaged in the course of the work shall be restored by the Contractor at his own expense.
18.01 PROTECTION OF LIFE, WORK AND PROPERT DURING CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall employ all means and devices to protect life and property during construction. For this purpose, he shall provide his workmen adequate safety equipment and shall institute a safety program to inform and instruct his workmen regarding standard safety procedures and practices and the use of safety equipment.
In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect or Owner is hereby permitted to act at his best discretion, to prevent such loss injury or damage, and he shall so act without appeal, if so instructed or authorized. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement or arbitration.
19.0 LABOR
19.01 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor shall employ only competent and efficient engineers, superintendents, foremen, mechanics, laborers, or artisans. Whenever, in the opinion of the Architect or the Owner, any employee is careless or incompetent, or obstructs the progress of the work or acts contrary to instructions or conducts himself improperly, the Contractor shall, upon written request of the Architect, discharge or otherwise remove him from and not employ him in the work again.
Should the Contractor fail to remove unsatisfactory workmen or fail to furnish suitable and sufficient equipment or personnel for the proper prosecution of the work, the Architect may withhold payment which are or may become due, or may suspend the work until such orders are complied with.
19.02 SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION
The Contractor, if he supervises the work personally, must be a licensed Engineer or Architect otherwise he must have in his employ a licensed Engineer or Architect, acceptable to the Architect who will supervise the work personally and inspect at least once a week.
The Contractor shall keep in the project site, at all times during the works progress, a competent Project Engineer or Superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Architect. The Project Engineer or Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. He shall have full authority to execute the orders or directions of the Architect without delay and to prompt supply such materials, tools, plant, equipment, and labor as may be required.
20.0 WORK
20.01 METHODS AND APPLIANCES
The Contractor shall use such methods and appliances for the performance of all the operations connected with the work embedded under this Contract as will produce satisfactory quality of work and rate of progress which in the opinion of the Architect, will ensure the completion of the work within the contract time.
a. If, at any time before commencement or during the progress of the work such methods or appliances appear to the Architect to be inefficient or inappropriate for producing the quality of Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
work required, or insuring the required rate of progress, the Architect may order the Contractor to increase the rate orof their efficiency or improvement or character of methods and rate of progress as are called for in this Contract.
b. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish to the Architect for approval full information and satisfactory evidence as to name of the manufacturer or machinery, mechanical or other pertinent information.
20.0 LAYING OUT THE WORK
The Contractor shall lay out the lines and grades of the work as per conditions set forth under Article 7.03 (Construction Stakes and Reference Mark) of the General Conditions.
All stakes, bench marks, etc. placed by the Contractor inlaying out the work, approved by the Architect, shall be carefully guarded and preserved by the Contractor. In case such stakes or marks are displaced or rendered useless through the carelessness or neglect of the Contractor or of his agents, employees, or workmen, they shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
20.03 INSPECTION OF WORK
The Owner, Architect and their representatives shall at all times have access to the work whenever it is in preparation or progress and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection.
a. If the Technical Specifications, the Architects instructions, laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be specifically tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect and other parties required to make the inspection, timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and the date fixed for such inspection. Inspections by Architect shall be promptly made and where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
approval or consent of the Architect, it must, if required by the Architect, be uncovered for examination at the Contractors expense.
b. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Architect and if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the cost of removal, repair and corrective reconstruction.
c.
The Contractor shall furnish promptly without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary for the safe and convenient inspection and tests that may be required by the inspectors. All inspections and tests shall be performed in such manner as not to unnecessarily delay the work.
d. If there are indications that the work done are not in accordance with Plans and Specifications, the Architect may at any time before final acceptance of the entire work make an examination of the work already completed. By removing or tearing out same, the Contractor shall on request, promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and materials. If such work is found to be defective in any material respect due to fault of the Contractor or his sub-contractors, the Contractor shall defray all the expense of such examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the actual cost of labor and materials necessarily involved in the examination and replacement plus 15 percent shall be allowed the Contractor and he shall, in addition, if completion of the work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time on account of the additional work involved.
20.04 DEFECTIVE WORK
Defective work may be condemned by the Architect at any time before the final acceptance o the work, and when such work has been condemned, it shall be taken out immediately by the Contractor and rebuilt in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Failure or neglect on the part of the Architect or any of his agents to condemn or reject bad or inferior work, shall not be construed to imply acceptance of the work of the same if such bad or inferior work is discovered at any time prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the release of the Contractor.
20.05 WORKS DURING AN EMERGENCY
The Contractor shall perform any work and shall furnish and install all materials and equipment necessary during an emergency endangering life or property. In all cases he shall notify the Architect and the Engineer of the emergency as soon as practicable, but he shall not wait instructions before proceeding to properly protect both life and property.
20.06 INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES OF WORK
Adjustments of drawings to suit field conditions which cannot be foreseen at the time of calling for bids may be necessary during construction. It is the essence of the contract to recognize such changes in drawings as constituting a normal and expected margin of adjustment, and not involving nor permitting change or modification of Contract prices; provided only, that the resulting overruns or under runs from the quantities in the proposal do not exceed five percent. In case of discrepancy, the matter shall be submitted immediately to the Architect, before any adjustment shall be made by the Contractor, otherwise it shall be at his own risk and expense.
20.07 CHANGES IN THE WORK
a. CHANGES ORDERED BY OWNER: The Owner or Architect matmay at any time, without invalidating the Contract and without notice to sureties, order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to or deducting from the work, as covered by the Drawings and Specifications of this Contract and within the general scope thero0f.therof. Such changes shall be ordered by the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Owner or Architect in writing, and no change or omission from the Drawings and Specifications shall be considered to have been authorized without written instructions signed by the Owner.
b. CHANGE OF SUB-SURFACE CIONDITIONS:CONDITIONS: If during the progress of work, subsurface conditions at the site are materially different from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications are discovered or encountered, the attention of the Architect shall be called immediately to such conditions, before they are disturbed. The Architect shall thereupon promptly investigate the conditions, and if he finds that they materially differ from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications , he shall at once, at the approval of the Owner , make such changes in the Drawings and Specifications as he may find necessary.
c.
ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT: All such changes shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract. If such changes cause an increase or decrease in the amount due under the Contract, or in the time required for its performance, an equitable adjustment shall be made and the Contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. The express consent of the sureties shall be obtained in writing. In the event that the work involved was increased by such changes, the Contractor shall furnish proportionate additional bond.
d. VALUE OF EXTRA WORK: The value of extra work or change shall be determined in any one or more of the following ways:
1. 2.
By estimate and acceptance in a lump sum. By unit prices stipulated in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon, provided the extra or credit does not exceed 25 % of original Contract of the particular work involved.
By actual direct cost plus fifteen percent (15%) for Contractors profit, overhead and Contractors tax. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: 3. ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Under case 3, he shall keep and present in such form as the Architect may direct, a correct account of the cost, together with vouchers. In any case, the Architect shall certify to the amount, including the fifteen percent (15%) allowance of overhead and profit, due the Contractor.
e. PERIOD FOR WHICH CLAIM FOR ADJUSTMENT HAS TO BE ASSERTED: Any claimed for adjustment involving questions of fact must be asserted within fifteen days from the date the change is ordered unless the Architect shall for proper cause extend such time. Except as otherwise specially provided in this Contract, all disputes concerning questions of fact arising under this Contract shall be decided by the Architect or his duly authorized representative. Noting, however, as provided for in Article 20.07, shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the prosecution of the work so changed.
f.
CHANGES ORDERED BY THE ARCHITECT: In giving instructions the Architect shall have the authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving extra cost, and not inconsistent with the design concept of the building.
g. AWARD OF EXTRA WORK TO OTHER CONTRACTOR: IN case any extra work shall be required in the proper performance of the work contemplated under this Contract, it is understood that if the Contractor and the Owner fail to arrive at any agreement as to any other person, firm, or corporation than said Contractor.
20.08 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST
If the Contractor claims that any instructions by Drawings or otherwise involve extra cost under this Contract, he shall give the Architect written notice thereof within fifteen days after the receipt of such instruction and in any event, before proceeding to execute the work, except in emergency endangering life or property, and the procedure shall then be as provided for in Article 20.05 (Work During an Emergency) of the General Conditions. No such claim shall be valid unless so made.
In like manner, if the Contractor incurs a delay in the mobilization and /or in the progress of his work for reasons attributable to the Owner, e.g., Owner-supplied materials not arriving on time, movements or work executed by the Owner which interfere with the progress of the Contractors work, delayed decisions and other matters related thereto, he shall give the Architect written notice thereof within fifteen days after recognition of such delay and proceed to claim for extra cost that may arise from such delays. No claim shall be valid unless such written notice has been executed.
20.09 CLEANING UP AT COMPLETION WORK
The Contractor shall at all times, keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or his works. At the completion of the work, he shall remove all such rubbish from and about the building, and all his tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and turn over the work for occupancy with.
a. All dirt, stains, and the like on all finishing of floors, walls, and ceiling, decorative work, finishing hardware and fixtures, removed;
b. All woodwork, finishing hardware and all metal works, cleaned and polished;
c.
All glazing, marble and tile work, washed and polished.
d. All toilet fixtures washed and cleaned.
The Contractor shall also clean the building site and all areas which the Contractor shall have used in the construction of the project. At no time shall any rubbish by thrown from windows or other parts of the building without the use of rubbish chutes.
20.10 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS OF WORK
The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Neither shall it be deemed a waiver by the Owner of the rights to claim for damages due to delays in the completion of the work. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the completion of uncompleted work or causes refinishing of completed work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation, or extension of time or both, as agreed upon prior to the occupancy.
20.11 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF WORK
Upon due notice from the Contractor that he has substantially completed the work, the Architect shall make an inspection of the project. If the contract covers the furnishing and/or installation of equipment, fixtures, and utilities, said equipment, fixtures and utilities shall be fully tested and test-run in order that the work can be considered as substantially completed. However, should the Contractor, through no fault of his, be unable to test-run the equipment at the time of substantial completion, he Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
shall be given the necessary time extension for that portion of the work. As soon as, in the opinion of the Architect, the work shall have been substantially completed and shall have satisfactorily passed any final test of materials that may be prescribed in the Contract, the Architect shall issue a Certificate of Completion for the work. Even before the completion of the whole work; upon written application of the Contractor, the Architect may likewise issue such a Certificate of satisfaction of the Architect sndand occupied or used by the Owner.
In all cases, prior to the issue of the said Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall execute a written undertaking to finish any outstanding work during the Period of Making Good of Known Defects of Faults are defined in Article 20.12 hereof.
20.12 PERIOD OF MAKING GOOD OF KNOWN DEFECTS OF FAULTS
The expression Period of Making Good of Known Defects or Faults shall mean period of not more than sixty (60) calendar days, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract, calculated from the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion of the whole or any apart thereof, in accordance with Article 20.11.
20.13 MAKING GOOD OF KNOWN DEFECTS OR FAULTS
The Contractor shall execute at his expense all works necessary for making good of known defects, imperfections or faults within the period of sixty (60) days after the issuance of the Certificate of Completion or within fifteen (15) days after expiration, as a result of an inspection made by or on behalf of the Architect prior to its expiration.
If, in the opinion of the Architect, the defect or fault is due to the Owner or Owners representative in their occupancy of the structure or parts of it, the value of such work shall be ascertained and paid for as if it were additional work.
If the Contractor shall fail to do any such work aforesaid, the Owner shall upon written notice to the Contractor be entitled to carry out such by his own workmen or by other contractors, and if such work which the Contract should have carried out is at the Contractors cost, the Owner shall be entitled to recover from the Contractor the cost thereof, or may deduct the same from any monies due or may become due to the Contractor.
20.14 SEARCH FOR CAUSES OF DEFECTS OF FAULTS
The Contractor shall if required by the Architect in writing, search for the cause of any defect, imperfection or fault under the directions of the Architect. Unless such defect, imperfection or fault shall be one for which the Contractor is liable under the Contract, the cost of the work carried out by the Contractor in searching for said defect shall be borne by the Owner. But if such defect, imperfection or fault shall be one for which the Contractor and he shall, in such case, repair, rectify and make good such effect, imperfection or fault at his own expense, in accordance with the provisions of Article 20.13 hereof. 20.15 HOLIDAY WORK, WORK BEYOND ONE SHIFT
Should holiday work, or work beyond normal shift, be required as a result of the Contractors deficiencies in implementing the schedule required from him, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor, all expenses which the Owner may incur in conducting necessary inspection and supervision of work within such period and time. It is likewise the Contractors sole responsibility to secure whatever Contractors permits and permissions for such from concerned governmental entities or affected neighbors.
21.0 TIME OF COMPLETION OF WORK
21.01 NOTICE TO PROCEED
Following the execution of the Contract Agreement by the Owner, written Notice to proceed with the work shall be given to the Contractor. The Contractor shall begin and shall prosecute the work Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
regularly and uninterruptedly thereafter (unless otherwise directed in writing by the Owner) with such force as to secure the completion of the work within the time stated in the Contract. If the Contractor undertakes actual construction on the proposed work including the delivery of equipment or materials (in the case of contract for furnishing materials) or the performance of any other kind of work whatsoever, before he receives a copy of the duly executed Contract or Notice to proceed, he does so at his own risk.
21.02 CONTRACT TIME
The Contractor shall complete, in an acceptable manner, all of the work contracted for in the time th stated in the Contract. Computation of Contract time shall commence on the Seventh (7 ) day from receipt of the Notice to proceed, unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract, and every calendar day following, shall be counted as a working day.
21.03 SCHEDULE OF COMPLETION
The Contractor shall submit, for approval, a Schedule of Construction Work in Critical path Method form or any other form acceptable to the Architect indicating the approximate date each item will be started and completed, the equipment to be used and number of men to be employed to complete it, in accordance with his schedule. The progress of the work shall be at a rate sufficient to complete the Contract in an acceptable manner with the period of time specified. If it appears that the rate of progress is such that the Contract will not be completed within the time, the Architect may order the Contractor to take such steps as he considers necessary to complete the Contract within the period provided.
21.04 EXTENSION TIME
The Contractor will be allowed an extension of time based on the following conditions:
a. Should the Contractor be obstructed or delayed in the prosecution or completion of the work by the act, neglect, delay, or default of the Owner or any other contractor employed by the Owner on the work; by strikes or lockouts; by an Act of God or Force Majeure as defined in Article 1.26, or by delay authorized by the Architect pending arbitration, then the Contractor shall within fifteen (15) days from the occurrence of such delay file the necessary request for extension. The Architect may grant the request for extensions for such period of time as he considers reasonable. However, no such extension of time shall be granted for any alleged failure of the Owner to furnish materials or information unless the Contractor shall have made written request for them at least ten (10) days before they are actually needed.
b. The WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE BONDSMEN must be attached to any request of the Contractor for an extension of time and submitted to the Owner for consideration.
c.
If the satisfactory fulfillment of the Contract shall require the performance of work in greater quantities than those set forth in the Contract, the time allowed for performance shall be increased in the same ratio as that of the total cost of work actually performed against the total cost in the Contract. However, if in the opinion of the Architect, the nature of the increased work is such that the new Contract Time as computed above is unreasonably short, the time allowance for any extension and increases shall be agreed upon in writing.
d. If no schedule or agreement stating the dates upon which drawings shall be furnished is made, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish drawings until two weeks after demand for such drawings and unless such claim be reasonable.
e. If the work is interrupted for any reason, it must be promptly resumed on the removal or cessation of the cause of delay.
f.
The Contractor shall give written notice to the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to beginning, suspending (except in case of accident), or resuming the work to the end that the Architect may make necessary preparations for inspection without delaying the work. All delays or losses resulting from failure of the Contractor to give such notice will be at the Contractors risk; and all extra costs to the Owner for such delay (said cost to be determined by the Architect ) shall be deducted from the Final Payment. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
21.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is understood that time is an essential feature of the Contract, and upon failure to complete the said Contract within the contract time, the Contractor shall be required to pay the Owner the liquidated damages in the amount stipulated in the Contract Agreement, the said payment to be made as liquidated damages and not by way of penalty. The Owner may deduct from any sum due or to become due the Contractor any sums accruing for liquidated damages as herein stated. For purposes of calculating, the actual completion date shall be the date certified by the Architect under Article 20.11 hereof.
22.0 PAYMENTS
22.01 DETAILED BREAKDOWN OF CONTRACT AMOUNT
Except in cases where unit prices from the basis for payment under the Contract, the Contractor shall, within fifteen (15) days from the receipt of Notice to proceed, submit a complete Breakdown of Work and Corresponding Value of the Contract Amount showing the value assigned to each part of the work, including the allowance for profit and overhead. Upon approval of the Breakdown of Work and Corresponding Value by the Architect, it shall be used as the basis for all Requests for Payment,
22.02 REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The Contractor may submit periodically, but not more than once each month, a Request for Payment for work done. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect all reasonable facilities required for obtaining the necessary information relative to the work completed on all items listed in the Breakdown of Work and Corresponding Value, less the ten percent (10%) retention, unless otherwise agreed upon, and less previous payments.
In general, no payment shall be made for materials or items not incorporated in the work. However, exception to this condition may be made in the case of materials or items which may be require immediate acquisition and compensation due to shortages or import or transportation difficulties. In the event of such exceptions, payment shall be conditioned upon the submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures as will establish the Owners title to such material or item or otherwise adequately protect the Owners interest.
22.03 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS TO ACCOMPANY REQUEST FOR PAYMENT
The Contractor, at his expense, shall furnish the Architect progress photographs whish shall be taken monthly, starting when the work begins and continuing so long as the work is in progress, on the outside of the building from station points designated by the Architect, and other interior and yard shots necessary to support the claim in the building.
a. The photographs shall be 6x 8. At each period, a minimum of four exposures shall be taken, one on each side of the building. Eight (8) points, dull finish, (2 copies for each exposure) shall be delivered to the Architect and all negatives shall bear the date of exposures and name of the work.
b. No partial payment shall be considered for approval without the above mentioned points accompanying the Request for Payment.
22.04 ARCHITECTS ACTION REQUEST FOR PAYMENT Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Within fifteen (15) days after receipt of any request for Payment by the Contractor, the Architect shall either issue a Certificate of Payment or withhold the Request for Payment. When the Architect decides to withhold the request for Payment, he shall inform the Contractor in writing the reason/s for withholding it.
The Certificate of Payment shall include the value of work accomplished by the Contractor during the period covered by the certificate and recommendation to the Owner for payment in an amount the Architects decides to be properly due.
22.05 APPROVAL WITHHELD
The Architect may recommend withholding of payment in whole or in part on any approved Request for Payment on account of any of the following reasons:
a. Defective work not remedied. b. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. c. Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to sub-contractors, or for material supply or for labor.
d. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid. e. Damage to another Contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld.
22.06 CONDITIONS RELATIVE TO CERTIFICATES OF PAYMENTS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The Architect shall estimate the value of work accomplished work by the Contractor using as a basis the schedule stipulated in the Breakdown of Work and Corresponding Value. Such estimates of the Architect shall be final and conclusive evidence of the amount of work performed, and shall be taken as the basis for the full measure of compensation to be received at the time by the Contractor. Such preliminary estimates of amount and quantity shall not be required to be made by strict measurement or with or with exactness, but they may, at the option of the Architect, be approximate only.
22.07 OWNERS ACTION ON AN APPROVED REQUEST FOR PAYMENT OR CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT
Within fifteen (15) days from the date of approval of a Request for Payment or of issuance of a Certificate of Payment by the Architect, the Owner shall pay the amount as certified by the Architect or pay such other amount as he shall decide is due the Contractor, informing the Contractor and the Architect in writing of his reasons for paying the amended amount.
Owners failure to pay the amount involved would be subject to payment of interest based on banking loan rates prevailing at the time of the signing of the Contract.
22.08 PAYMENT OF CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS
The Contractor shall pay punctually all workmen employed by him on the project at such rates as are provided by existing laws. He shall also pay promptly all materials and equipment used by him on the project, and all taxes due from him. He shall remit as required by law all amounts withheld from the salaries or wages of his employees or workmen.
If required, he shall furnish the Owner with a statement sworn to before an officer duly authorized to administer oath, that all persons who have done work of furnished materials under his Contract have been duly paid. If such written evidence is not furnished before the final payment under the Contract falls due, Owner may, after due notice to and clearance by the Contractor, pay such lawful claims in Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
whole or in part to any person, firm, or corporation claiming the same, and charge the amount thus paid said Contractor, who will accept the same as payment from the amount due on the Contract.
22.09 OTHER REQUIREMENTS BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT
The Contractor shall submit (aside from those provided in the Contract Documents) the following before the final payment is made.
a. Certificate of Final Building Occupancy unless such certificate cannot be obtained through the fault of the Contractor.
b. Certificate of Final Inspection of electrical, telephone, sanitary, mechanical, water, gas, safety, and other utilities unless such certificate can not be obtained through nothe fault of the Contractor.
c.
Original and three (3) sets of prints of As-built Drawings of Electrical, Sanitary, Gas, Telephone and Mechanical works, if such works are within the scope of the Contract. As -built Drawings are the working drawings showing the system and actual locations of outlets, fixtures, services and equipment that were installed.
d. Three (3) copies of Directory of Panel Boards and list of circuits.
e. Three (3) copies of Instructions and Manuals for operating and maintaining of fixtures and equipment.
f.
Three (3) copies of Keying Schedule.
g. Guarantee Bond equivalent to twenty percent (20 %) of the Contract Price a period of one (1) year after the Final Acceptance of the work which guarantee the quality of the Contract work and materials installed. The Guarantee Bond will be required only if the Owner, upon acceptance of the building, releases to the Contractor the Performance Bond and Payment Bond.
h. Set of prints labeled For Modification duly corrected for all plan details which may have been revised, modifies, substituted, or corrected during construction.
22.12 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
Whenever this Contract, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be completely performed on the part of the Contractor, the Architect shall proceed to verify the work, shall make the final estimates, shall certify as to the completion of the work, and accept the same.
a. The owner then, excepting for causes herein specified, pay to the Contractor promptly, after the execution of said certificate, the remainder which shall be found due, excepting there from such sum or sums as may be lawfully retained under any of the provisions of this Contract; PROVIDED THAT FINAL PAYMENT ON THE CONTRACT SHALL NOT BE MADE UNTIL THE CONTRACTOR HAS SUBMITTED A STATEMENT SWORN TO BEFORE AN OFFICER DULY AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATH< SHOWING THAT ALL TAXES DUE FROM HIM, AND ALL OBLIGATIONS FOR MATERIALS USED AND LABOR EMPLOYED IN CONNECTION WITH THIS CONTRACT HAVE BEEN DULY PAID; AND PROVIDED, FURTHER that nothing herein contained shall be construed to waive the right of the Architect hereby reserved to reject the whole or any portion of the aforesaid work, should the same be found to have been construed in violations of the Drawings and Specifications or of any of the conditions or covenants of this Contract within the guarantee period.
b. The making and acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
22.13 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
a. Neither the final certificate nor payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting there from, which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of acceptance of work by the Owner.
b. Neither the foregoing nor any provision in the Contract Documents, nor any special-guarantee limit, shall be held to limit the Contractors liability for defects and damages and the right of the Owner under the provisions of the New Civil Code, and all laws, regulations and ordinances applicable to the plans and construction of the building.
c.
The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. All questions arising under this article shall be decided by the Architect whose decision shall be subject to arbitration.
22.14 RELEASE RETENTION
The amount retained by the Owner under the provision of the Contract shall be released within three (3) months after the date of final payment.
23.0 SEPARATE CONTRACTS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS
23.1 OWNERS RIGHT TO LET OTHER CONTRACTS
The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work.
24.0 CONTRACTOR-SEPARATE CONTRACTORS RELATIONS
24.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND WORK CO-ORDINATION
The Contractor under this Contract shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and co-ordinate his work with theirs. The Contractor shall, as far as possible arrange his work and dispose of his materials so as not to interfere with the work or storage of materials of other Contractors engaged upon the work. He shall also join his work to that of others in a proper manner, in accordance with the spirit of the Drawings and Specifications, and perform his work in the proper sequence in relation to that of other Contractors, and as may be directed by the Architect.
24.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DIGGING
The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of other contractors shown upon, or reasonably implied, by the Drawings and Specifications for the completed structure, and he shall make good after them as the Architect may direct.
Any cost caused by the defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefore.
The Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, digging, or otherwise, and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor save with the consent of the Architect.
24.03 DEFECTIVE WORK BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
If any part of the Contractors work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Architect any defect in such work that renders it unsuitable for such proper execution result. His failure to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractors work as fit and proper for the execution of his work.
To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work the Contractor shall verify work already in place and shall once report to the Architect any discrepancy between the executed work and the drawings.
24.04 DAMAGE CAUSED BY CONTRACTORS TO SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
Should the Contractor cause damage to any separate contractor on the work, the Contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration and to relieve the Owner of any liability which may rise there from.
25.0 SUB-CONTRACTS
25.01 GENERAL
It is understood and agreed that the entire work called for by this Contract shall not be sublet or subcontracted. However, any part thereof or any specialty work therein, may be sublet or sub-contracted, subject to the provisions of Article 25.02. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any sub-contractor ant the Owner. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
25.02 COMPETENCY OF SUB-CONTRACTOR
All sub-contractors specified or otherwise, shall be listed down, in standard form when required, and submitted at bid opening time. The Owner or the Architect reserves the right to reject sub-contractors who are deemed inappropriate for the project. Specified sub-contractors shall be expected tom comply with the requirements of the Contract, the same as required for other sub-contractors.
25.03 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his sub-contractors and the person directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.
26.0 CONTRACTOR SUB-CONTRACTORS RELATIONS
26.01 THE CONTRACTOR AGREES:
a. To be bound to the Sub-contractor by all obligations that the Owner assumes to the Contractor under the Agreement, General Conditions, the Drawings and Specifications, and by all provisions thereof affording remedies and redress to the Contractor from the Owner.
b. To pay the Sub-contractor, upon the payment of certificates, if issued under the schedule of values described in Article 22 (Payments) of the General Conditions, the amount allowed to the Contractor on account of the Sub-contractors work to the extent to the Sub-contractors interest therein.
c.
To pay the Sub-contractor, to such extent as may be provided by Contract Documents or the subcontract.
d. To pay the Sub-contractor on demand for his work or materials as far as executed and fixed in place less the retained percentage, at the time the certificate should be issued, even though the Architect fails to issue it for any cause not the fault of the Sub-contractor.
e. To pay the Sub-contractor a just share of any fire insurance money received by him the Contractor, under Article 31 (Contractors Insurance and Bonds) of the General Conditions.
f.
To make o demand to the Sub-contractor for the liquidated damages or penalty for delay in any sum in excess of such amount as may be specifically named in the sub-contract.
g. To give the Sub-contractor an opportunity to be present and to submit evidence in any arbitration involving hid rights.
26.02 THE SUB-CONTRACTOR AGREES:
a. To be bound to the Contractor by the Terms of Agreement, General Conditions of the Contract, the Drawings and Specifications, and to assume toward him all the obligations and responsibility that he, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner.
b. To submit to the Contractor applications for payment in such reasonable time as to enable the Contractor to apply for payment under Article 22 (Payments) of the General Conditions.
c.
To make all claims for extras, for extensions of time and for damages, for delays or otherwise, to the Contractor in the manner provided in the General Conditions of the Contract for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner, except that the time for making claims for extra cost is one week.
26.03 THE CONTRACTOR AND THE SUB-CONTRACTOR AGREE THAT
In the matter of arbitration, their rights and obligations and all procedure shall be analogous to those set forth in the Contract; provided, however, that decision by the Architect shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration.
27.0 CONTRACTORS RIIGHT TO SUSPEND WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT
The Contractor may suspend or terminate Contract upon fifteen (15) days written notice to the Owner and the Architect for any of the following reasons:
a. If an order of any court or other public authority caused the work to be stopped or suspended for a period of ninety (90) days through no act or fault of the Contractor or his employees.
b. If the Architect should fail to act upon any Request for Payment within fifteen (15) days after it is presented in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
c.
If the Owner should fail to act upon the Request of Payment or Certificate of Payment within fifteen (15) days after its certification by the Architect.
d. If the Owner should fail to pay the Contractor any sum within thirty (30) days after its award by arbitration.
28.0 OWNERS RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT
The Owner may, upon the certificate of the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify his action, may without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety I any, fifteen (15) days written notice, terminate the Contract with the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. Sufficient cause to justify termination of the Contract shall be deemed to exist whenever the Contractor does any of the following:
a. Declare bankruptcy, become insolvent or assign his assets for the benefit of his creditors.
b. Disregard or violate provisions of the Contract Documents or Architects Instructions, or fail to prosecute the work according to the agreed Schedule of completion, including extensions thereof.
c.
Fail to provide a qualified superintendent, competent workmen or sub-contractors, or proper materials.
d. Fail to make prompt payment to sub-contractors, workmen or material dealers.
29.0 OWNERS RIGHT TO CONTINUE WORK AFTER TAKEOVER FROM CONTRACTORS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
29.01 USE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT AT SITE
The Contractor, upon receiving notice of termination of contract, shall vacate possession and deliver the said work, or the parts thereof specified said notice, peaceably to the Owner. All materials, plant, appliances and other essential equipment as may be needed by the construction of the project, shall, at the option of the Architect, remain part of the work until completed, at such rental as may be considered reasonable.
In case such materials and/or equipment do not belong to the Contractor, then the Architect shall have the option to retain them for use in the project at the cost of the failing Contract, or pay rent for the use, chargeable against the Contractor.
29.02 OWNER TO COMPLETE WORK
The Owner shall then take over and proceed to complete the same by administration or otherwise, and use such tools, appliances and materials of every description as may be found upon the line of said work, or at points where materials are built or framed for the work and also procure such other tools and materials for the completion of the work as may be required.
29.03 EVALUATION OF COST OF WORK
It is agreed and understood that upon such termination of this contract, the Architect will ascertain and fix the value of the work completed by the Contractor and not paid for by the Owner, and of all usable materials on the line of the work taken over by the Owner at the time of said termination.
a. In the event that the total expenditures of the Owner on completion of the work, including all charges against the project prior to termination of the Contract and compensation for additional architectural, managerial and administrative services, are not in excess of the Contract Price, then the difference between the said total expenditures of the Owner and the Contract Prize, may be applied to settle claims filed, and the balance, if any, may be paid to the Contractor.
b. No amount in excess of the combined value of the unpaid completed work, retained percentage and usable materials taken over by the Owner at the time of the termination of the Contract shall be paid, nor shall any claim for prospective profits on the work done after termination of the Contract be considered or allowed.
c.
In case of suspension of work, all unpaid work executed including expenses incurred during suspension shall be evaluated by the Architect and charged to the Owner.
29.04 OWNERS RIGHT TO RECOVER LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Neither the taking over by the Owner of the work for completion by administration nor the re-letting of the same to another Contractor shall be construed as a waiver of the Owners right to recover damages against the original Contractor and/or his sureties for the failure to complete the work as stipulated. In such case, the full extent of the damages for which the Contract and/or his sureties shall be liable shall be:
a. The total daily liquidated damages up to and including the day immediately before the date the Owner effectively takes over the work.
b. The excess cost incurred by the Owner in the completion of the project over the Contract Price. This excess includes cost of architectural, managerial and administrative services, supervision and inspection from the time the Owner effectively took over the work by administration or by letting same.
30.0 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS AND DAMAGES
30.01 SAFEGUARDS TO BE UNDERTAKEN BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall take all precautions for the safety of employees and workmen on the work, and comply with all applicable provisions in the city/municipal and national safety on, about or adjacent to the premises where work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, such barriers, shoring, supports, braces, lights, danger signs and necessary safeguards, as will protect workmen and the public, and as will effectively prevent any accident and damage to property in consequence of his work.
The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents and damage to the owners property and adjoining property. The name ans position of the person so designated shall be reported to the Architect and the Owners technical representative by the Contractor.
30.02 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
The Owner shall not be responsible for the death of, disease contracted or injury received by the Contractor or any employee or laborers of the Contractor, for the Contractors plant or materials, for any damage done by or to them from any source or cause; and damages caused by the Contractor or his employees to any property of the Owner and adjoining property. All damages shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
30.03 INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall identify and save harmless the Owner from and against losses and all claims, demands, payments, suits, actions, recoveries, and judgment of every nature and description brought or recovered against him, by reason of any act or omission of said Contractor, his agents or employees, in the execution of the work or the guarding of it.
Claims for payments and repairs or damages shall be settled by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the Architect and the parties concerned. In the event of failure of the Contractor to repair at once such damages and pay other claims, and deduct the entire cost of such repairs and claims from the payments due the Contractor.
31.0 CONTRACTORS INSURANCE BONDS
See Section 01750: Warranties and Bonds.
32.0 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITIES AND LIABILITIES
32.01 PROTECTION OF EMPLOYEES AND PROFESSIONALS PERFORMING SERVICES FOR THE OWNER
The Owner shall be responsible for and shall maintain such Insurance as will protect him from personal injury including disease and death of persons under his employ or services, temporary or permanent in status, that are assigned for the project.
Prior to the start of the construction, the Owner and the Architect shall give a list of personnel assigned to the project who need to be covered by insurance and with the corresponding amount of coverage.
32.02 OWNERS OPTIONAL INSURANCE
The Owner at his option may maintain such Insurance as will protect him from his contingent liability for damages, for personal injury, including death, which may arise from the operations under this Contract, and any other liability for damages which the Contractor is required to insure under any provision of this Contract.
33.0 LIENS. DISPUTES AND ARBITRATION
33.01 LIENS
Neither the final part nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor, if required, shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contact, or receipts in full in lieu thereof and, if required in either case of affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information, the releases and receipts include all the labor and materials for which a lien could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any sub-contractor refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner, to indemnify him against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all cost and a reasonable attorneys fee.
33.02 ASSIGNMENT
a. This Contract shall not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor nor shall any part of the work to be sublet by the contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner and such consent shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility and liability for the work hereunder and for the due performance of all the terms and conditions of the Contract.
b. The Owners consent to any subletting of work hereunder shall not be granted in any event until the Contract has furnished the Owner with satisfactory evidence that the sub-contractor is carrying ample insurance to the same extent and in the same manner as is herein provided to be furnished by the Contractor.
c.
If the Contractor is assigned or any part thereof is sublet, the Contractor shall exonerate, indemnify and save harmless the Owner from and against any loss or expense caused thereby.
d. In case of any such transfer without the previous written consent of the Owner, the Owner may refuse to carry out the Contract shall be reserved to and remain within said Owner.
33.03 DAMAGES
Should either party to this Contract suffer damages because of any wrongful act or neglect of the other party or of anyone employed by him, claim shall be writing the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and not later that the final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
33.04 DISPUTES
a. The Architect shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Owner or Contractor and on all matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents.
b. Except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, all disputes concerning questions of fact arising under the Contract shall be decided by the Architect, whose decision shall be final and conclusive upon the parties thereto as to questions of fact.
c.
The Architects decisions shall be final if within the terms of the Contract Documents.
d. If, however, the Architect fails to render a decision within fifteen (15) days after the parties have presented their evidence, either party may then demand arbitration. If the Architect renders decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but shall not disturb or interrupt such proceedings except where decision is acceptable to the parties concerned.
33.05 ARBITRATION
All disputes, claims or questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be settled in accordance with the provisions of this article. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
a. Notice of the demand for arbitration of a dispute shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract, and a copy filed with the Architect. The demand for arbitration shall be made within a reasonable time after the dispute has arisen; in no case, however, shall the demand be made later than the time of final payment except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the Contract.
b. When formal arbitration is requested, a Board of Arbitration shall be formed in the following manner. The Owner and the Contractor shall each appoint one member of this board and these members shall appoint a third member who shall act as chairman. No one with a financial interest in the subject under arbitration will be permitted to serve on this board. This board may engage experts to act in an advisory capacity. Minutes shall be kept of all meetings and signed by all members of the board. Decisions of the board shall require only a simple majority and all interested parties shall be informed thereof. Expense of the board shall be paid in accordance with the agreement set forth before the proceedings of the board.
c.
It is mutually agreed that the decision of the arbitrators shall e a condition precedent to any right of legal action that either party may have against the other. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Owner.
34.0 ARCHITECTS STATUS
a. The Architects shall be the Owners representative during the construction period and he shall observe the work in progress on behalf of the Owner. He shall have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent expressly provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise in writing, which shall be shown to the Contractor. He shall have the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary in his reasonable opinion to insure the proper execution of the Contract. The Architects failure of not ordering the stoppage of work, does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of complying with the Contract Documents and the sole responsibility of protecting persons, on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed against injury and death, and for protecting the Owners property and adjoining property against damage. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
b. The Architect shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of mater4ials furnished and work performed and as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of work, and shall decide all questions which may arise as to the interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications, and all questions as to the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract.
c.
As the Architect is, in the first instance, the interpreter of the conditions of the Contract and the judge of its performance, he shall side either with the Owner or with the Contractor, but shall use his powers under the Contract to enforce its faithful performance by both.
d. In case of the termination of the employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint a capable and reputable Architect against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract shall be that of the former Architect; any dispute in connection with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration.
35.0 AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEERS
a. The Engineers shall be solely responsible for their respective designs, computations and other professional services they rendered in connection with the preparation of Drawings and Specifications. They shall assist the Architect in the general inspection and direction of that particular portion of the work where their professional services are concerned.
b. The Engineers shall inspect the work for conformance with approval Drawings and Specifications and shall report to the Architect any discrepancy between such work and said Drawings and Specifications. They shall make recommendations when necessary and as required, consistent with the ethics of their profession. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
c.
The Engineers shall perform any professional services necessary for the accomplishment of the work subject to the terms and conditions of the inter-professional agreement between the Architect and the Engineers or any existing contract affecting or relative to the project.
36.0 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVES, RESIDENT ARCHITECTS, RESIDENT ENGINEERS OR CONSTRUCTION INSPECTORS.
36.01 EMPLOYED BY THE OWNER
Technically qualified men referred to as Project Representatives, Resident Architects, Resident Engineers or Construction Inspectors recommended by the Architect and employed by the Owner may be stationed on the Project to assist the Architect and the Engineers in the general inspection and direction of the Work.
36.02 DUTIES
The duties of the Project Representatives, Resident Architects, Resident Engineers and Construction Inspectors are stipulated in the Special Provisions of the Contract.
36.03 DISPUTES
In case of any disputes arising between the Project Representative, Resident Architect, Resident Engineer, Construction Inspector, and the Contractor, they shall have authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Architect.
Nothing in the provisions of this Article will relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of performing the work in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents.
37.0 SCHEDULE OF TIME LIMITS
The Contractor performs his work subject to certain Time Limits. This indexed section, as based on the entire General Conditions, is provided for in order to facilitate the execution of his work.
NO.
TITLE
TIME LIMIT
REFERENCE ARTICLE NO.
1.
CONTRACT TIME 1.1 Contract Time Reckoning To commence on the 7 day from receipt of Notice to Proceed
th
21.02
1.2 Request for Time Extension
To be filed within 15 days from occurrence of delay (Item a. par.1).
21.04
1.3 Beginning, Suspending or Resuming of Work
Written notice to be given to the Architect at least 10 days prior to Beginning, suspending (except in case
21.04
of accident), or resuming the work. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
(Item f).
1.4 Other Related Matters A. Request for Supply of Owner-furnished Written request to be made 10 days before they are actually needed (Item a. par. 2). 21.04
B. Request for drawings
No claim for delay shall be allowed on Account of failure to furnish drawings until two weeks after demand for such drawings (Item d).
21.04
2. CONTRACT SUM 2.1 Contract Sum Breakdown To be submitted within 15 days from the receipt of Notice to Proceed 22.01
2.2 Claim for Extra Cost
Notice to be given to Architect within 15 days 1) After receipt of instruction involving extra cost, or 2) After recognition of delay due to Owners fault.
20.08
3. PROGRESS PAYMENT 3.1 Architects Action on Payment Request To be made within 15 days after receipt of request for payment 22.04
3.2 Owners Action on Payment Request
To act within 15 days from date of Architects approval of payment request.
22.07
3.3 Release of Retention
To be released within 3 months after date of final payment.
22.14
4. CORRECTION OF WORK 4.1 Correction before Final Payment Contractor to promptly remove from premise all work condemned by Architect as failing to conform to the Contract, whether incorporated or not, And promptly replace and re-execute Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor 22.10
His own work in accordance with the Contract without expense to the Owner. If the Contractor fails to remove condemned work with a reasonable time from notice, Owner may remove and store the same at Contractors expense. Contractor must pay expenses within 10 days from removal by the Owner; in default thereof, Owner may sell the materials after 10 days, from written notice of intent to sell.
4.2 Correction after Final Payment
Contractor should remedy defects due to faulty materials or workmanship, which may appear within a period of one year from date of acceptance of work by Owner (Item a).
22.13
Repairs and corrective work at the expense and cost of Contractor should be done within 5 days after written notice by Owner (Item d). Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
31.05
5. CONTRACTORS CLAIM FOR EXTRA COST
Sub-contractor may make all claims for extras, for extension of time and for Damages, for delays or otherwise to the Contractor in the manner provided in The General Conditions of the Contract for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner, except that the time for making claims for extra cost is one week (Item c).
26.02
6. CONTRACTORS RIGHT TO SUSPEND OR TERMINATE CONTRACT
Contractor may suspend or terminate Contract within 15 days written notice to the Owner and Architect, for any of the following reasons:
27.00
1) If any court or other public authority orders work to be stopped or suspended for 90 days through no fault of the Contractor or his employees;
2) If Architect fails to act upon request Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
for payment within 15 days after presentation;
3) If Owner fails to act upon request for payment within 15 days after Architects certification;
4) If Owner fails to pay Contractor the agreed sum within 30 days after its Award by arbitrators.
7. OWNERS RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT
May be done after giving 15 days written notice to Contractor or his Surety if Contractor should:
28.00
1) Declare bankruptcy, become insolvent or assign his assets for the benefit of his creditors;
2) Disregard or violate provisions of the Contract Documents or Architects Instructions;
3) Fail to provide superintendent workmen or sub-contractors or proper materials;
4) Fail to make prompt payment to sub-contractors, workmen or material dealers.
8. DISPUTES
If Architect fails to render decision within 15 days after parties have presented their evidence, either party may demand arbitration (Item d).
33.04
9. BONDS AND INSURANCES 9.1 Contractors liability Insurance Insurance policy shall not be cancelled 31.01 by insurance company without 15 days written notice to Owner of intention to cancel.
9.2
Contractors Performance Insurance
Such bonds shall remain in effect until replaced by the Contractors Guarantee
31.03
Bond.
9.3
Contractors Guarantee Bond
To be furnished the Owner after expiration of Performance and Payment Bonds and shall be effective for a period of one year commencing
31.04
from the date of acceptance as a guarantee that all materials and workmanship installed are of good quality.
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS _______________________________________
SECTION 01000 EXPALANATION TO THE SPECIFICATIONS
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary to each other. Drawings are graphic means of showing work to be done. They are particularly suited to showing materials are located. Thus, drawings exist essentially to show dimension, location and placement. Not all works however can be presented in the drawings. Generally works are usually statement from and hence, the contractor is required to read the specifications carefully.
Specifications, on the other hand, are used to describe the materials, construction techniques, samples, shop drawings, guarantees and other contract requirements. Together, the drawings and the specifications are used to inform the contractor. In cases where the specified brand carries with it the manufacturers specifications, the manufacturers specifications shall hold precedence over these specifications.
The Specifications are of the abbreviated type and include incomplete sentences. The selection of the sentence depends on the underlying principles of Specifications.
A. That the Technical Specifications are only one part of the contract Documents.
B. That the contract is between the Owner and the General Contractor and
C. That the General Contractor is the only part responsible for completing the work on accordance with the Contract Documents.
Therefore:
A. Only the General Contractor is referred to in the Specifications so as not to violate the intent of the contract and so as not to undermine the proper chain of command.
B. Any reference to Specialty Trade Contractors in the technical Specifications is made only in so far as selection of Specialty Trade Contractors is made through bidding. Once the Specialty Trade Contractors are selected and assigned and assigned to the General Contractor, the General Contractor assumes all the responsibilities for the execution of the whole project in accordance with the Contract Docum`ents. Therefore, in the contract between the Owner and the General Contractor, the Specialty Trade Contractor is not referred to. In all contract Documents, the word Contractor means the General Contractor.
C. The brand names specified are intended to assure the level of quality needed for the project. This does not mean however that the brands specified are exclusive. The Contractor shall prove by laboratory tests and certificates that substitute materials are of the equivalent quality and the Contractor shall secure the Architects approval prior to use such substitute.
D. The omission of the phrase The Contractor shall is intentional because the whole Specifications is directed to the Contractor. Omitted words or phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are when a note occurs on the drawings.
E. Where as shown, as indicated or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference to the drawings accompanying the Specifications is made unless otherwise stated.
F. Where as directed, as required, as permitted ,as authorized, as approved, accepted or words of similar import as used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirements, permission, authorization, approval or acceptance of the Architect is intended unless otherwise stated.
G. As used herein, provided shall be understood to mean provided complete in place, that is, furnished and installed.
H. Most sentences are in the imperative mood. This style is specially suited for instructions covering installation of products and equipment.
Example: Spreading adhesive using notched trowel Use a notched trowel Install flooring with textured side-up
The verb is the first word of the sentence clearly defining the action to be performed. This style is readily understandable and concise.
SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0
GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT
Furnish all materials, equipment, plant, tools, and other facilities and perform labor to complete all works in the CONSTRUCTION of PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT in accordance with the plans, specifications and related contract documents.
1.02 PERMITS, LICENSES AND TAXES
A. Secure and pay all permits, fees, licenses, taxes, etc. necessary for the execution of the general construction works.
B. Construct temporary fence and other structures to secure all existing equipment, materials and facilities which shall eventually be re-used.
C. Take all necessary measures to protect all existing facilities, site development, and equipment from damages, loss and dirt.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT WORK
A. Limited demolition to prepare for new construction.
B. New site development, including civil works.
C. New building construction including tapping of new utilities to existing local utility lines.
2.0
SCOPE OF WORK
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
Section
02050: DEMOLITION 02100: SITE PREPARATION 02160: EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM 02200: EARTHWORK 02280: TERMITE PROOFING/ BUKBOK PROOFING 02400: SITE DRAINAGE 02500: ROADS AND PARKING 02520: CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND PAVED WALKS
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
Section
03100: CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200: CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300: CAST IN PALCE CONCRETE
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
Section
04100: MORTAR 04200: UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 5 METALS
Section
05100: STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05200: MISCELLANEUOS METALS
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section
06100: ROUGH CARPENTRY
06200: FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL
Section
07100: WATER PROOFING AND DAMPROOFING 07213: ROOFING INSULATION 07400: PREFORMED ROOFING 07900: JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section
08100: METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS 08200: WOOD DOORS AND WINDOWS 08520: ALUMINUM JALOUSIE WINDOWS 08700: HARDWARE 08800: GLAZING
DIVISION 9 WOOD AND PALSTICS
Section
09200: PLASTER 09300: TILE 09510: SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 09900: PAINTING
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section
10040: IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10800: TOILET ACCESORIES
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Section
04310: ELEVATORS
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
Section
15100: AIRCONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 15300: STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15400: PLUMBING
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL WORKS
Section
16050: GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16100: BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16420: ELECTRICAL DISTTRIBUTION SYSTEM 16700: FIRE ALARMM SYSTEM 16800: PATHWAYS 16850: STRUCTURED CABLING 16870: VIDEO SURVEILANCE
SECTION 01020 SUMMARY OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES
1.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
All applicable provisions of the different divisions of the Specifications for each work trade shall apply for all items cited in this Summary.
1.02 INFERRED ITEMS AND WORK
Materials and workmanship deemed necessary to complete the works but NOT but NOT specifically mentioned in the Specifications, Working Drawings, or in the other Contract Documents, shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor without extra cost to the Owner. Such materials shall be of the highest quality available, and installed or applied in a workmanlike manner at prescribed or appropriate locations.
1.03 SPECIFICS
Materials specifically mentioned in this Summary shall be installed following efficient and sound engineering and construction practice, and especially as per manufacturers application for installation specifications which shall govern all works alluded to in these Specifications.
1.04 ON-SITE ITEMS
A. Materials and finishes for on-site improvements and facilities as listed below are part of the scope of work and shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor without extra cost to the Owner.
B. Clearing, limited demolition and site grading works in preparation for new construction, renovation and landscaping. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
C. Construction of: 1. Concrete driveways, parking area, sidewalks, curbs and gutters along street fronts, walks, ramps, steps, posts, and miscellaneous slabs;
2. Concrete splash slabs, steel gratings;
3. Temporary facilities and below grade structures such as septic vaults, cisterns, hand holes, manholes, open drains, yard basins and trenches;
D. Unless expressly excluded in these specifications. Exterior utility lines, raceway system, fixtures, breakers, switches, buzzers, controls including fittings and accessories as required by the specialty trades under plumbing, mechanical, fire suppression and protection, electrical and communication works.
E. Hydro-pneumatic tanks, booster pumps and other necessary equipment and facilities.
1.05 OFF- SITE ITEMS
Off-site improvements shall generally be under the responsibility of the Owner and not included in the Contract, with exception of the following which shall be part of the Contractors Work:
A. Concreting of driveway to basement parking area including the sidewalks. This work shall neatly make connections to the existing roads or curbs and shall incorporate necessary utility ways under such as required.
B. Construction of drainage lines at along street fronts. This work shall neatly connect to the future storm drainage system along the road.
C. Permanent connections to the local utility lines for electrical, water, drainage, sewer and telephone lines including equipment, facilities, materials, fees, and/or work which utility companies or authorities may require of the applicant Owner as electrical transformers, etc.
1.06 OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS
Owner supplied finishing accessories, furnishing and fixtures such as curtain rods, wall clocks, picture frames, fixed furniture etc., shall be installed by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
1.07 ITEMS BY OTHERS
Equipment, fixtures and furnishings which in need specialty design and specialized technical expertise for their manufacture and installation shall be provided by specialty contractors other that the Contractor.
2.0
SITEWORK
2.01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM (Section 02160)
A. Types of shoring and bracing systems include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Timber Lagging
2. Steel Sheet Piles
B. Provide sufficient shoring and soil retention protection options to prevent displacement of existing adjacent structures, and cave-ins.
2.02 EARTHWORK (Section 02200)
A. Coarse-grained fill materials, such as stone fragment, sand and gravel mix, fine sand, silty or clayey sand and gravel, shall be laboratory approved from off site source, passing a 75 mm (3) sieve. The fraction passing a 0.425 mm (no.40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not to exceed 35% plasticity index not exceeding 12%. Only coarse-grained fill materials shall be used inside buildings and under parking areas, driveways and walkways.
B. Fine-grained fill material, such as silt, clay silty clay clayey silt shall be laboratory approved form off site source passing a 0.425 mm (no. 40) sieve and shall have a liquid limit not less than 40% and a plasticity index not less than 11%. Only fine grained fill material shall be used outside the limits of the buildings, for landscape purposes. Top soil stripped from the construction site may be stock piled and used for landscaping purposes as long as it is enriched to sustain landscape planting material.
C. Granular fill to form a capillary water barrier shall be clean, crushed, non-porous rock; crushed or uncrushed gravel uniformity graded and of a size which will pass a 1-inch mesh screen and be retained on a No. 4 mesh screen.
D. Excavated material approved for use as backfill shall be free of stones larger than 2 inches in longest dimension, roots and organic materials.
E. Batter boards: Second class, pest free lumber assembled and rendered secure for proper delineation of building lines and grades.
2.03 TERMITE & BUKBOK (Section 02280)
Product and application by Owner-accredited termite and pest control contractor.
A. For termite proofing: Use only SOILGUARD Termicide Concentrate. Dilution rating: 1part SOILGUARD Termicide to 75 parts water. There shall be no disturbance of treated soil between application of poison and pouring of concentrate.
B. For Bukbok proofing of kiln-dried wood: Use Pentachlorophenol. Dilution rating: 1 part Pentachlorophenol to 100 parts water.
2.04 SITE DRAINAGE (See Section 02400)
A. Drainage Pipe: as manufactured by RODEN CONST., or approved equal.
1. Plain concrete design pipe and fittings 250 mm (10) and below in diameter : T & G conforming to ASTM C-14-59.
2. Reinforced concrete pipes fittings 300 mm (12) and bigger: Centrifugally cast or vibrated T & G conforming to ASTM C-14-59 T.
B. Joining material: One part cement to two parts sand.
C. Building Storm Drain Connection to Main: Concrete wye branch and clean out, T & G or use junction boxes.
D. Area Drain Catch Basin: Load-bearing 14 Mpa (200psi) reinforced concreter with cover as shown in Drawings.
E. Catch Basins of Junction Boxes: 14 Mpa (2000psi) reinforced concrete as indicated in drawings, with solid reinforced concrete cover.
F. CHECK DRAINS: Load bearing 4.8 Mpa (700 Psi) concrete hollow blocks or reinforced concrete with steel grate from x 2x2 angle bars.
2.04 ROADS AND PARKING (See Section 02500)
A. Borrow Material Selected laboratory-approved gravel, disintegrated granite, sand, shale, cinders or other similar materials. The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall not be more than Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
35% and the fraction passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 35 % and a plasticity index not greater than 12%.
B. Base Course Material Hard durable fragments of stone and a filter of sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The Composite base course material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps of clay and shall comply with Grading Requirements as AASHO METHODS T-11 and T-26.
Sieve Designation U.S. Standard Sieve 1 1 No. 4 No. 200 100
Percent Weight Passing Type B Base Course
85 - 100 20 - 45 5 - 12
C. Concrete 28 day ultimate compressive strength of 21 Mpa (3000 Psi) with a maximum size of coarse aggregate of 5o mm (2).
1. Plain concrete design pipe and fittings 250 mm (10) and below in diameter: T & G conforming to ASTM C-14-59.
2.
Aggregates well graded, clean, hard particles of gravel or crushed rock.
3. Water clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other deleterious substances. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
4. Reinforcing Steel Structural grade ASTM A15 deformed bars (Fy = 40, 000 psi), new and free from rust, oil, grease, defects or kinks.
5. Joint Filler Pre-formed joint filler or poured, mixed, asphalt and rubber filler conforming to ASTM D 1751.
6. Concrete Curing Materials Any of the following:
Burlap: AASHTO M182 having a weight of 14 ounces or more per square yard when dry. IMPERVIOUS SHEETING: ASTMC 171 LIQUID MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND: ASTM C 309 Type ID or Type 2.Compound shall be free of paraffin or petroleum.
D. Concrete Paving Finishes: See Section 02520 Concrete Finishes: Coarse broom finishes in even strokes, in one direction (perpendicular to the centerlines)
E. Provide construction joints at every 6.0m and weakened plane joints in between for road pavements. For parking pavements, make construction and construction joints coincide with parking slot workings.
2.06 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND PAVED WALKS (See Section 02520) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Cement Use only one brand of cement throughout. Portland cement shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Portland Cement (ASTM Designation C 150 latest revision) for type 1 Portland Cement.
B. Concrete Aggregates
1. Aggregates shall be well-graded, clean, hard particles or gravel or crushed rock conforming to the STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE AGGREGATES (ASTM Designation C-33: latest revision).
2. Sand ASTM C 35 67, clean, washed river sand, strong, free from organic and other deleterious materials. Sand from salt water is not allowed.
C. Water Shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkali, organic materials or other deleterious substances.
D. Reinforcing Steel Structural Grade ASTM A15 deformed bars (Fy=40,000 psi), new and free from rust, oil, grease, defects or kinks.
E. Forms Shall be either wood or steel.
F. Controlled Strength of Concrete Concrete shall develop a minimum of 28 day cylinder strength of 17.2 Mpa (2500 psi) for sidewalks; 35 Mpa (5000 psi) for concrete curbs and gutters
G. Concrete finishes for curbs, gutters and valley gutters; steel trowel smooth straight-to-finish. For sidewalks and all other walks, fine brushed finish even strokes, one direction perpendicular to Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
general direction of trowel straight to finish. Smooth 1 strip borders around slabs using edging tool.
H. Construction joints provide construction joints on walks, curbs and gutters at 1.50m. interval or as shown on plans.
I.
Construction joints provide contraction joints ) weakened plane joints) by cutting way through the thickness of the slab.
3.0
CONCRETE
3.01 CONCRETE FORM WORKS (Section 03100)
A. Forms
1. Use Phenolic forms plywood , metal or surfaced lumber forms, free from warp and gross deformities, sufficiently braced with solid lumber and applied with form release Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
agent as its casting surface before each casting, where it will best give the most advantage in the specific concrete work involved.
2. For exposed reinforced concrete such as underside of media agua, exposed beams, columns and slabs, use Phenolic forms or approved equivalent.
3. Provide 40mm-wide chamfers for all exposed corners of columns.
4. Do not use Coco lumber for formwork.
5. Use only good lumber or metal sections for forms.
6. Use Aluminum frame table forms from FORMAPLY or approved equivalent.
3.02 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (Section 03200)
As manufactured by NATIONAL STEEL CORPORATION, PAG-ASA STEEL CORPORATION or approved equal.
A. Steel Bars: Intermediate Grade Steel Yield Strength ( fy ) = 276 Mpa (40,000 psi) for steel reinforcement up to 12mm and fy 414 Mpa (60,000 psi) for steel reinforcement greater than 12 mm. Use standard-sized deformed steel conforming to ASTM A 615 / PNS 49 standards, for concrete and masonry reinforcements. Upgrade to next bigger size if specified standard sizes are unavailable.
B. Use Ga. 16 Galvanized Iron (G.I) tie wires at joints or laps of placed reinforcements. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.03 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (Section 03300)
A. CEMENT Use only one brand of cement throughout. Portland cement shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Portland Cement ( ASTM Designation C 150 latest revision) for type 1 Portland Cement.
B. CONCRETE AGGREGATES
1. Gravel: Well graded, clean, hard particles of gravel or crushed rock conforming to the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE AGGREGATES (ASTM Designated C-33 latest revision). Use 38 mm (1- ) maximum for slabs and 19 mm ( ) for columns and beams and retaining walls.
2. Sand: ASTM C 35 67, clean, washed river sand, strong, free from organic and other deleterious materials. Sand from salt water or lahar is not allowed.
3. Maximum size of aggregates shall not be larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of the forms, not larger than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of the forms, not larger than 3/5 of the maximum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, and in no case larger than 33 mm (1 1/3) in diameter.
B. WATER
Use only water that is clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkali, organic materials or other deleterious substances. Fit for human consumption.
D. CONCRETE MIXES
1. Concrete compressive strength (fc) requirements:
Specified Compressive Strength Class psi AA 4,000 28 days Mpa 27.57 For spread footings, mat footings, columns, beams, suspended slabs, slabs on grade, shear walls, basement and retaining walls, cistern tank, septic tanks, and other work as indicated. For lintels beam and stiffener columns and for all reinforced work not otherwise indicated or specified. For plant box as indicated or specified Item
3,000
20.68
2500
17.23
2. Slump requirements:
Structural Element
Slump for vibrated concrete Minimum Maximum 100mm
Walls, columns, and grade beams, 250 mm max, thickness Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
75mm
Other components
50mm
75mm
E. CONCRETE ADDITIVES
1.
Use POSSOLITH 3R or DARATARD 17 in the amounts as recommended by the manufacturer, with the approval of the Architect.
2.
Plasticizer ECOPLAST R by Econtech
3.
Air entraining admixtures ECO AIR ENT by Econtech or approved equal to improve workability or durability of concrete mixes.
4.
Accelerators ECOFAST RAPID by Econtech or approved equal.
5.
Water Reducing Retarders ECOMENT PB 100 by Econtech or approved equal for canopy slab. Refer to Manufacturers manual/instruction for proper appli cation.
7.
Calcium chloride is not allowed. Secure approval of the Engineer prior to using of any other additive.
F. EPOXY BONDING COMPOUND
1.
ASTM C881, 2 component materials suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces DARAWELD-C or approved material type, grade and class to suit project requirements. For bonding new to old concrete, repair of cracks, bonding grout.
NOTE: PLACEMENT DRAWINGS: Shop drawings of each reinforcing steel detail and placement drawings shall be submitted for approval in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. Any material fabricated before final approval of the shop drawings will be done at Contractors risk, but no material shall be placed until shop drawings have final approval. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures (ACI315).
4.0
MASONRY
4.01 MORTAR (See Section 04100)
A. Portland Cement: Use only one brand of cement throughout. Portland cement shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Portland cement (ASTM Designation C-150 latest revision) for type 1 Portland cement.
B. Sand: ASTM C 35 67, clean, washed river sand, strong, free from organic and other deleterious materials. Sand from salt water or lahar is not allowed.
C. Water: Fit for drinking, free from injurious amount of oil, acids, alkali, organic materials and other deleterious substances.
D. Concrete Mortar compressive strength ( fc ) = 13.8 Mpa (2000 psi).
E. Adhesive Mortar: Use ECOFIX by Econech for laying vitrified ceramic tiled. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
F. Grout: Use ECO TILE GROUT by Econech pre-mixed dry wall filler for floor and wall tile either glazed or semi-glazed tiles. Masonry concrete grout compressive strength ( fc ) = 13.8 Mpa (2000 psi). For kitchen, toilet works and tile works.
G. Plaster Bond: Use AECOFILL by Econtech or approved equal. Apply on all wall areas, as required, prior to plastering. Suppliers shall furnish product description prior to purchase and delivery.
4.01 UNIT MASONRY (See Section 04200)
A. Concrete Hollow Blocks (CHB): JACKBUILT; or approved equal.
1.
150 mm thick x 200 mm x 400 mm (6 thick x 8 x 6) Load Concrete Hollow Block Units of standard manufacture, machine vibrated with even texture and well defined edges, conforming to PNS16 Type 1, Class A, with a minimum compressive strength of 4.82 Mpa (700 psi). 150 mm thick for certain parts of the retaining walls for the rotunda and septic tank.
B. Reinforcing Bars: as manufactured by NATIONAL STEEL CORPORATION, PAG-ASA STEEL CORPORATION or approved equal. Intermediate Grade Steel Yield Strength ( fy ) = 276 Mpa (40,000 psi ) for steel reinforcement up to 12mm.
C. Tie Wire: Use Gauge 16 G.I. tie wires
D. Provide reinforced concrete lintel beams and jambs on all masonry opening.
E. Provide reinforced concrete stiffener beams ( Min. 8 deep x thickness of masonry unit) for all th masonry walls at every 13 block of height (2.60m).
F. Provide reinforced concrete stiffener columns ( Min. 40 wide x thickness of masonry unit) for all masonry walls at every 4.00m of continuous masonry wall lengths.
5.0
METALS
5.01 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING (See Section 05100)
Owner/ Architect Approved manufacturer/ Sub contractor. All materials and workmanship must conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications for Design, fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings as amended to date or as may be specifically modified by the drawings or by these Specifications.
A. Plates, Sheets and Connectors: Conform to ASTM Designation A36 with specified yield point of 248 Mpa (36,000 psi). from mild sheets or plates with standards thickness, size, shape and design as indicated in the plans. For miscellaneous stiffener, bearing anchorage and connector plates or straps. Upgrade to next higher / bigger size and thickness if specified sizes & thickness are unavailable.
B. Standard solid section: Conform to ASTM 611 with specified yield point of 228 Mpa (33, 000 psi ). Mild Steel angles, flat bars, square bars, channel, U and other sections. For structural steel trusses, purlins, building eaves, framing, overhead anchorage of roll-up doors, grill work, miscellaneous fabricated mounting brackets, straps, dowels, frames and connectors. Upgrade to next higher / bigger size and thickness if specified sizes & thickness are unavailable.
C. Bolt Accessories: Conform anchor bolts to the Specification for High Strength Bolts ASTM and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners, ASTM 307. Low carbon steel with type, shape, size, threading, corresponding nut and accessories as required.
D. Bracing rods: Standard structural grade steel rods with turnbuckles whenever required for roof framing.
E. Welding Electrodes: Conform welding electrodes to ASTM Specification A233 and AWS Specification A5.1 and A5.5 E60 series for manual shielded metal are welding and E-70 series for structural welding.
F. Grout: Conform non-shrink grout to ASTM C827. grout shall be non-metallic.
G. Painting: Use only approved brand of epoxy zinc chromate paint and linseed oil for all base coat painting for structural steel. For finish painting, use BOYSEN brand of enamel paint or approved equal.
5.02 MISCELLANEOUS METALS (See Section 05200)
A. ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS ALCOPANEL, AULAND, ALPOLIC or approved equivalent lightweight durable panel made of aluminum and polyethylene compound, coated with advanced flouro carbon paint (PVDF), flat, rigid, bendable panel, 4 mm thick, Color : to follow, for installation Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
by ,manufacturer-approved qualified installer with guarantee. Provide shop drawings for approval by the Architect before fabrication/installation. For building faade fascias.
B. STAINLESS STEEL use AUSTENITIC Type 316 stainless steel for pipes, tubes, square bars, and other sections, as manufactured and installed by CO-CEN MARKETING CORPORATION or approved equal with guarantee. Provide shop drawings for approval by the Architect before fabrication/installation. For stair railings, and as indicated in drawings.
C. METAL CEILING HANGERS - See Section 09510 Suspended Ceiling System. DN STEEL, JT STEEL or approved equal.
D. GALVANIZED IRON Hangers Gauge 16 G.I. wire hanger.
E. STEEL GRATING For all check drains, open canals and trenches, as shown in plans. Refer to drawing for details.
F. STEEL GRILLES Window and fence grille, sections and sizes as shown in the drawings.
G. STAIR NOSING SIGMA brand, Brass, anti-sliding panel for all interior stairways; size 38mm x 30mm x 2.2mm or as approved.
H. METAL FURRING for suspended ceilings.
I.
FASTENINGS Commercial types, except where special types are shown or required. Fastenings for all exterior work shall be non-ferrous, unless otherwise shown. Fastening for stainless steel and aluminum and other interior work, where exposed shall match the fastened metal. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
6.0
WOOD AND PLASTICS
6.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY (See Section 06100)
Note:
For K. D. Tanguile, plywood inner sides and for cut ends of APITONG joints, nailers,a dn framings, supplementary termite and rot treatment to be applied by Owner0approved termite and pest control company, with guarantee.
A. LUMBER:
1.
ARMOUR WOOD or MATWOOD: Kiln-dried, treated,S4S, sound, hard and free form defects lumber. Use one color or shade for assembly framings which ars exposed. Maximum moisture content shall be 12% for lumber with thickness 1 or less: 16 % maximum moisture for all others. For framing of counters, platforms at classrooms, closets and cabinets. For edgings, trims, and moldings and others as indicated in the drawings.
B. PLYWOOD AND PLYBOARD: Note: Provide solid wood edging for all exposed sides of plywood 12mm (1/2) thick and larger and on all sides of detachable shelves.
1.
Class A Tanguile plywood 6mm (1/4) thick. For miscellaneous backing, patching, flooring and dividing components of wood based units such as closets and cabinets, and which are concealed or intended to be painted.
2.
Class A Tanguile Ply board 19 mm (3/4) thick. For free shelves and base components of cabinets, and for miscellaneous components of cabinets and closet housing which are concealed and intended to be painted.
3.
Weatherproof Marine Plywood 6mm (1/4) thick. For backing of mirrors and as indicated in the drawings.
C. FIBER CEMENT BOARD: HARDIFLEX as manufactured by JAMES HARDIE BUILDING BOARDS and distributed by JARDINE-DAVIES INC> Install as per manufacturers instructions.
1. 2.
4.5 mm thick for suspended ceilings. See Section 09510 for Suspended Ceiling Systems. 6.0 mm thick for interior dry-wall partitions and as indicated in the drawings.
D. HARDWARE AND FASTENERS: Use metal nails, screws, plates, straps, miscellaneous fasteners or anchorage: concealed or countersunk whenever called for laminated items and at cabinet framing joints.
E. ASSEMBLY MATERIALS: PIONEER or approved water-resistant glue, and nails, screws and bolts of appropriate type, shape and size for all types of joints.
F. Trademark: Each separate lumber piece or assembly is required to bear an official mark of the millworks supplier. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
7.0
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
7.01 WATERPROOFING (See Section 07100)
Apply with surface preparation, methods application and density as per manufacturers specifications.
A. WATERPROOFING: TEGRAPROOF, surface applied, crystalline capillary waterproofing coating for concrete, as manufactured by FOSROC, United Kingdom. Apply as per manufacturers application instructions. For all retaining walls, on negative side.
B. WATERPROOFING: BRUSHBOND brand, concealed liquid type elastomeric cementitious membrane manufactured by FOSROC, United Kingdom. Apply per manufacturers instructions. For all T & B.
C. WATERPROOFING: TRAFFIGARD brand, exposed type elastomeric cementitious membrane as manufactured by HITCHINS, Singapore and distributed by Specserv Inc., Philippines. For all eaves/ media agua, concrete gutters, balcony floors, and roof deck.
D. WATERPROOFING: SEAFLEX brand, as manufactured by HITCHINS, Singapore and distributed by Specserv Inc., Philippines. For all media agua, eaves/ media agua, concrete gutters, balcony floors, and roof deck.
E. WATERPROOFING: TEGRAPROOF, as manufactured by FOSROC, United Kingdom. Apply as per manufacturers application instructions. For all cistern tanks, elevator pits and slabs on grade.
F. WATER STOP: VOLCLAY WATERSTOP-RX, Bentonite Waterstop System, as manufactured by CETCO Building Materials Group, USA. Apply as per manufacturers instructions.
7.03 PREORMED ROOFING (See Section 07400)
A. Pre-formed Plastic Roofing:
1.
Use METAPLAS CORRUGATED ROOFING, 2.0mm thk, color: WHITE, by TECHNOTRADE RESOURCES (DAVAO) INC. Submit sample for Architects approval.
B. Ridge rolls and vent, flashings, cappings and trims: Use METALPLAS ROOFING accessories wi9th matching shape and color and fitting provisions as per drawings. For side laps, corrugation should be more than 1 wide.
C. Strainer: Use Brass Dome Strainers from METMA. Submit sample for Architects approval.
D. Fasteners and Fixation: Use appropriate connectors as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect. Paint same color as roof, all exposed fixation and fastening devices. Apply fasteners in a neat, consistent, even and standard manner. Apply strip of butyl rubberbased caulking compound along all end lap joints and passing over another meatl holes. For fixation of METALPLAS sheet to C purlins and when lapped over another metal sheet. For fixation of flashing: Use Tekscrews for roof eaves area, where roof frames are exposed.
7.04 JOINT SEALANTS (See Section 07900)
A. DOW CORNING Sealants shall be used in areas necessary to render structure watertight, sufficient even during strong winds:
B. For roofs, awnings, roof flashings, gutters and downspouts.
C. For bonding wood, plastic laminate, concrete, steel aluminum, and hardwood, rubber and glass.
D. For use between windows or door frames and walls, along skirting boards, around cornices, between counter tops and splashboard. In corner or between the wall and ceiling or where shrinkage or movement causes rigid fillers to crack.
E. For use on non-porous surfaces such as glass, ceramic and porcelain, particularly at kitchens and toilets.
8.0
DOORS AND WINDOWS
8.01 METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS (See Section 08100) (NIC)
A. General: Provide and install all jalousie windows with security steel grilles. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. METAL DOORS: Provide and install all doors with complete locksets, hinges and accessories as indicated in the plans and specifications.
Type A
Steel Swing Door with louver panel, 44 mm (1-3/4) METAFLAS by FILIPINAS SHUTTERS, INC. or approved equal. For storage, mechanical room, generator set and electrical room, and pipe chase.
Type B
Fire Rated Steel Hollow Core Swing Door finished with Wood Look Laminate sheets and Wood Casing as shown in plans. For bedroom entrance doors.
Type C
Steel Hollow Core Fire Door with Panic Lever Device for all fire exits.
Type D
Aluminum Framed Acrylic panels Swing Toilet Cubicle Door. For toilet cubicles.
Type E
6mm thick Annealed Glass on Sliding Aluminum Frames. For room balconies.
C. METAL WINDOWS:
Type A
BREEZEWAY or JALOUPLUS Aluminum Jalousie Windows, with steel sections of jambs, heads, tubing, or approved equal. Complete with snap on fasteners and accessories. (NIC)
a.) Head, sill, side sand mullions. Set in aluminum frames and mullions with sections when appropriate for, and adapted to mounting on concrete, with grooves and snap-on ribbings to accommodate other components and weather-strips, and provisions for a neat fixation to one another using concealed hardware connectors.
Type B
12 mm thick TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS on aluminum frames (NIC)
Type C
Same as Type B, using 6mm thick TEMPERED CLEAR GLASS. (NIC)
TYPE D
Steel 50 mm x 100 mm Tubular on verticals with 1 horizontal B.I. pipe, steel grilles. (NIC)
TYPE E
Glass Blocks
8.02 WOOD DOORS AND WINDOWS (See Section 08200) (NIC)
A. WOOD DOORS:
Type A
Tanguile Wood Framed Hollow Core Flush Swing Door, single-leaf, 44 mm )1-3/4) thick, for T & B Entrance doors. Marine Plywood both faces on K.D. Tanguile frames, automotive paint finish. (NIC)
8.03 FINISH HARDWARE (See Section 08700) (NIC)
All hardware shall be by US-Made SHLAGE, except where indicated otherwise.
A. Hardware Schedule:
1. Schlage entrance Door Lockset with Deadbolt All Bedroom Entrance Doors (3 , 4 , 5 , th 6 floors)
rd
th
th
2.
Schlage Bathroom Door Lockset All T & B Entrance Doors (3 , 4 , 5 , 6 floors)
rd
th
th
th
3.
Schlage Deadbolt All glass swing doors
4.
Schlage Sliding Door Lock All sliding glass doors
9.0
FINISHES
9.01 MAIN CONCRETE FINISHES
Poured concrete shall be straight-to-finish after pouring. Use ECO FLOOR HARD by Econtech for surfacing. Use mechanical trowelling equipment to achieve smooth, even surfaces burnish smooth. For general floor finish and all other floors not otherwise specified.
9.02 PLASTER (See Section 09200)
A. FOR EXTERIOIRS: PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER FINISH: Consisting of the scratch and finish coats. Use ECOFILL CTA B for the base/scratch coat, and ACOFILL CTA / ECOFILL MORTAR for the finish coat. Refer to Manufacturers technical data for proper application. Shall apply for all under slabs, beams and columns if fine finish cannot be achieved from off form finish and for all interior and exterior walls, and where plastering is essential to complete the work.
B. FOR INTERIOR WALLS: PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER FINISH: Consisting only of the scratch coat. Use ECOFILL CTA B for the base/ scratch coat, and ECOFILL CTA / ECOFILL MORTAR for the finish coat. Refer to Manufacturers technical data for proper application.
C. FORM rubbed finish for all exposed off-the-form concrete finish; all defects to be patched and fins removed. For under slabs, beams and columns.
D. STEEL TROWEL FINISH: Provide score joints whenever required. For surfaces to be painted with latex paint. For catch basins, septic tank and for all masonry walls.
9.03 PLAIN FLOOR FINISH
Use ECO FLOOR HARD non metallic floor hardener on mineral base by Econtech broadcasted over Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
concrete floor slab that has been steel trowelled to-finish while the concrete is still
green;
to a
concentration and curing carefully. For classrooms and other floors not otherwise specified.
9.04 TILES (See Section 09300) (NIC)
A. PORCELAIN TILE FINISH:
1.
Use IMPORTED PORCELAIN Tiles. Finish shall be clean, plumb, and true to line. For floor areas requiring the finish. Provide 3mm tight joint using ABC Grout by ALLGEMEINEBAUCHEMIE (ABC) PHIL., INC. only.
a.) 600 mm x 600 mm porcelain tiles, for lobbies, hallways, activity areas, stairs, offices, and hallway, particular color and texture to follow.
B. CERAMIC TILE FINISH:
1.)
Use only Class A Imported VITRIFIED CERAMIC Tiles particular color and texture to follow. Finish shall be clean, plumb, and true to line. For floor and wall areas requiring finish. Provide 3mm tight joint using ABC Grout by ALLGEMEINE-BAUCHEMIE (ABC) PHIL., INC. only. For stairs, T & B, Service Areas and as specified in plans; particular color and texture to follow.
Provide Tile stock upon Final Acceptance, as follows;
3% of tiles used per type, size, and color. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2.)
Tile Trim: For all exposed edges and corners of vitrified ceramic tile works. GENESIS or HOMELUX PRODUCTS LIMITED or approved equal.
9.05 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM (See Section 09510) (NIC)
A. FIBER CEMENT BOARD
1.
Fiber Cement Board: 6.0 mm thick x 1200 mm x 2400 mm fiber cement board HARDIFLEX as manufactured by JAMES HARDIE BUILDING BOARDS and distributed by JARDINEDAVIES INC. install as per manufacturers instructions.
2.
Suspended Ceiling System: Use G.I. metal furring from DN STEEL or JT STEEL, 6 mm diameters suspension rod, suspension clips, eyelets, attached to concrete slabs with expansion shields. Submit sample and mock-up before installation.
9.06 PAINTING (See Section 09900)
Use BOYSEN PAINTS only (one brand all throughout). All exposed finish hardware, lighting fixtures and accessories, plumbing fixtures and accessories, glasses and the like shall be adequately protected that these areas are not stained with paint and other painting materials prior to painting works. All other surfaces which would be endangered by stains or paint marks should be taped and covered with craft paper or equal.
A.
EXTERIOR:
1.
BOYSEN PLEXIBOND-WALLGUARD PLAIN FINISH for all exterior finishes and as shown in the drawings and for all exposed and/or visible concrete and masonry surfaces, media agua, as well as for exterior HARDIFLEX surfaces unless otherwise specified.
Surface Preparation: Concrete and masonry surfaces must be fully cured for at least 14 days.
1 coat: BOYSEN PLEXIBOND (as manufacturer instruction) Putty minors cracks and surfaces imperfection with BOYSEN PLEXIBOND (as manufacturer instruction)
st
2 coat: Boysen Acrytex Primer
nd
3 and 4 coats: BOYSEN WALLGUARD
rd
th
B.
INTERIOR PERMACOAT LATEX PLAIN FINISH for minor interior walls and exposed slab ceilings as indicated in the drawings and for all interior concrete and masonry surfaces unless otherwise specified.
Surface Preparation: Concrete and masonry surfaces must be fully cured for at least 14 days.
BOYSEN Masonry Neutralizer #44
1 coat: BOYSEN Permacoat Flat Latex #701 White Putty minor cracks and surface imperfections with BOYSEN Masonry Putty #7311
st
2 and 3 coats: BOYSEN Permacoat Semigloss Latex Tinting Colors.
nd
rd
C.
BOYSEN AUTOMOTIVE LACQUER PLAIN FINISH for Steel Doors and Frames, Steel plate Supports, and wooden members intended to be lacquered. (NIC)
Surface Preparation: Wood must be Kiln dried. 1 coat: BOYSEN Lacquer Primer Surfacer # 305 Putty: BOYSEN Lacquer Spot Putty #306 as required. 2 coat: BOYSEN Lacquer Primer Surfacer # 305 3 and 4 coats: BOYSEN Automotive Lacquer # 1300 in required color.
rd th nd st
D.
BOYSEN Flatwall Enamel # 800 For minor unexposed wood surfaces. (NIC)
1 coat: BOYSEN Flatwall Enamel #800 Putty: BOYSEN Plasolux Glazing Putty White #311 2 and 3 coats: BOYSEN Flatwall Enamel #800 Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
nd rd
st
Thinner: BOYSEN Paint Thinner
E.
BOYSEN OIL WOOD STAIN VARNISH FINISH for wood handrail at Corridors and Stairs. (NIC)
1 coat: BOYSEN Oil Wood Stain in required color. 2 and 3 coats: BOYSEN Acrytex Clear.
nd rd
st
F.
METAL SURFACES: (NIC)
1.
BOYSEN EPOXY ENAMEL For ferrous surfaces such as steel grille, steel windows, steel and roof framing and other exposed steel surfaces unless otherwise specified.
Surface Preparation: Must be free from rust. 1 coat: BOYSEN Epoxy Primer Red Oxide # 2277 2 and 3 coats: BOYSEN EPOXY ENAMEL in required color. Thinner: BOYSEN Epoxy Reducer
nd rd st
10.0 SPECIALTIES (by others) (NIC)
10.01 IDENTIFYING DEVICES (see Section 10400) (NIC)
A. BUILDING IDENTIFICATION LETTERING: Suarez Brothers Stainless steel letter with size, style, locations and dimensions as specified in the drawings. Size of anchorage dowels shall be as required for the fixation of masonry surface. At faade.
B. ROOM MARKERS: Walter or RC Traders or approved equal. White silk-screened letters (Lucida Sans font) with dark brown acrylic background and white silk-screened border. Fabricated from plastic materials with size and dimensions as shown in the drawing.
C. EXIT SIGNS: White acrylic letters and green acrylic background. Model MSSR/M/1080, 2 hours, by SLIMLINE or approved equal, complete with 1 x 8 fluorescent lamp, recess mount, high temp nickel cadmium battery.
10.07 TOILET ACCESSORIES (see Section 10800) (NIC)
A. Toilet Paper holder B. Liquid Soap dispenser C. Roll Toilet Paper Dispenser D. Type 316 Stainless Steel Grab Rail: 38 mm (1-2/2 ) diameter, at toilet for the disabled.
14.07 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14.01 ELECTRIC ELEVATORS (NIC)
PASSENGER ELEVATORS : MITSUBISHI, complete and ready to use, with the following descriptions:
Type of building Location Model Number of Units Capacity Speed Control Operation Travel No. of Stops No. of Openings Front
: : : : : : : : : : :
Hotel A.C. Cortes Ave., Mandaue City Bed Elevator/Next way-S-AW-B Two (2) 825 kg (11 persons) 1 meter/sec Variable voltage, variable frequency (VVVF) 2C-Al-22 (Two car computerized group control system) 20.58 meters Six (6) Six (6)
Rear Shaft Size Car Design Walls Front Return Panel Floor Door Type (S11)
: : : : : : :
None (W) 4350mm x (D) 1725mm (for two (2) cars) Painted steel sheet with central indirect down lights Painted steel sheet in color selected Hairline finished stainless steel sheet Durable Vinyl tiles (2mm thk.) Two panel center opening with safety door edge at both sides and driven by VVVF door motor
Hoistway Entrance Size of openings Doors : (J) 1200 x (H) 2100 mm Hairline finished stainless steel sheet Painted steel sheet in color selected (automotive lacquer) E-302S: Splayed jamb(250 thk) without transom transom panel of Hairline finished stainless steel sheet
(Ground Floor) : (Other Floors ) :
Jambs
(Ground Floor) :
(Other Floors)
E-102P: Narrow lintel and jambs (50mm thk) without Transom panel of painted steel sheet in color selected (automotive lacquer)
Entrance Sill Signals
: :
Extruded hard aluminum Mark (B1, B2,G,2,3,4,4,6)
Car Operating Panel
Type CBV-C210 hairline-finished stainless steel faceplate at front return panel
Car position Indicator Hall Position indicator
: :
Incorporated with Type CBV-C210 Type PIV-C220 of hairline-finished stainless steel faceplate with vandal-resistant micro stroke click type, flat button at ALL FLOORS
Hall Buttons Electric Power Supply Electric Lighting Supply Machine Room Accessories and other features
: : : : :
Incorporated with Type PIV-220 @ ALL FLOORS 230 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz 230 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz Directly above the hoist way Automatic car fan shut-off (CFO-A) Automatic car fan shut-off (CFO-A) Automatic car fan shut-off (CLO-A) Attendant Service (AS) Automatic Electronic Car arrival Chime (AECC) Basic Announcement (AAN-B) Car Call Cancelling Emergency Car Lighting Emergency Exit Extended door-door open (DKO-TB) Firefighters Emergency Operation (FE) False Call cancelling-automatic (FCC-A) Interphone (ITP0 + one (1) master phone
Mistubishi Emergency Landing Device (MELD) Satefy Ray (SR, 2 Beams) Secret Cal Service (SCS-B) Overload protective device with alarm bell and signal light (OLHL) Ventilation Fan
15.00
MECHANICAL
15.01
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (See Section 15050) (NIC)
A. WATER SUPPLY FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM: 1. Pumps: a. For Fire Pumps: One Unit, Electric motor driven, Centrifugal, end-suction with automatic controller and accessories, 3500 rpm, 30 HP, 3-phase 220-240V 60 Hz, 400 gpm, 80 psi operating pressure.
b. For Jockey Pump: One Unit, Electric motor drive, Vertical online with automatic controller accessories, 3500rpm, 2 HP, 3-phase 220-240 V 60 Hz. 18 gpm, 90 psi operating pressure.
15.02
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (See Section 15100) (NIC)
A.
DUCTWORK AND SUPPORTS:
1.
Sheet Metal Ductwork: Standard gauge galvanized sheet metal, fabricated in accordance with the following Gauge Schedule:
Dimension (longest side)
Sheet Metal Gauge (minimum)
Reinforcing (4 sides) & longitudinal spacing between joints or intermediate reinforcing
Up to 305 306 to 460 461 to 760 761 to 1500 1525 to 2250
26 24 24 22 20
None required None required 25 x 25 x 3 at 1.50 m 25 x 25 x 3 at 1.50 m 25 x 25 x 3 at 1.50 m
2.
Flexible Connections: Use heavy canvass cloth, close-weaved. Treated so as to be airtight. Provide angles, bolts, clips and other fastening materials necessary for securing the flexible materials to the equipment and duct.
3. Duct Hangers and Supports: Steel angles, with triple-coat of anti-rust paint. 4. Supply Air Register, Diffusers, and Grilles: Fabricate from Ga. 22B.I. sheets bonderized after fabrication and finished with oven-baked enamel paint.
B. PIPE AND PIPING INSULATION 1. Pipes and Fittings: Pipes and fittings shall be in conformity with the designed system, as shown in plans, ASTM-D, ISO 138/2N 187E, ISO/D1S 4435, PVC Schedule 40 condensate pipes and fittings as manufactured by NELTEX (SERIES 1000), SANIMOLD (150 161/1), ORANGE BERG, A p-trap with a clean-out plug shall be provided at the outlet for each drain pan.
2.
Pipe Supports and Hangers: Steel angles, rods, and flat bars. Provided 3mm thick rubber pad between metal and plastic pipes
3. Pipe Sleeves: Standard, steel pipes, of sufficient diameter to provide a minimum clearance of 6mm around the insulation 4. Refrigerant Piping Insulation: Flexible elastomeric insulation, 25mm thick 1.5 pcf density, applied on all refrigerant suction lines and condensate drain lines, joints sealed with appropriate contact adhesive. For pipes installed outdoors, a weather-resistant protective finish is to be applied and covered with Ga. 26 aluminum cladding.
C. EQUIPMENT 1. Multi-split type (Variable Refrigerant Flor or VRF) air conditioner, ceiling-cassette and wall mounted, free blow, with complete accessories. The system shall use environment friendly refrigerant such as 410A. The system should be ready to be connected to a building management system. HITACHI, MITSUBISHI or approved equal.
2. Room air conditioners, window-type, inverter-driven compressor, free blow, complete accessories and controllers mounted on wall. The system shall use environment friendly refrigerant such as 410A. The system should be ready to be connected to a building management system. Brand shall be HITACHI.
15.03 FIRE SUPPRESSION AND FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (NIC)
A. Sprinkles Heads: TYCO Central UL/FM US made, dia Orifice, buld type, upright, pendent or sidewall heads, Sprinkler rating of 70 deg. C or use in max ceiling temp. of 100 deg. F. Pendent heads shall be provided with aluminum escutcheon or approved equivalent to fit into ceiling boards or ceiling runners.
B.
Fire Hose Cabinets: 40 mm diameter hose, 30 m. swingle Jacket; Straight Nozzle 50 mm diameter, Semi-Automatic Rack; 40 mm diameter Angle Valve, 100 m water pressure with nipple and union patent; full flush Cabinet or surface mounting door with aluminum for all glass plate, frame and box shall be no. 20 gauge steel with white interior baked enamel finish over primer to contain the above components.
C. Pipings Black iron pipes, Schedule 40 of different sizes as shown in plans for feed mains, cross main and branch lines. All side piping shall be installed be means of screwed or flanged fittings. Welding of branch lines shall be shop welding and shall be done be electric arc welding process.
D. Fittings GI for sizes below 50 mm and BI for longer sizes. Whenever a change in pipe is made, one piece of reducing /increaser fittings shall be used. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
E. Valves All valves shall be of the same manufacture for each class of piping and as muc as possible for the entire project. Valves shall permanently bear affixed stamp or tag indicating manufacturer, catalog number, pressure and temperature ratings of gate valve, angle valves, check valves, pressure relief with all cast iron body with bronze trim.
F.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1.
Fire Alarm System The system shall have supervised circuit emergency paging capability and graphically annunciated with back-up battery capable of 48 hour resume power and quiescent condition and 2 hours alarm condition. Furnish and install Addressable fire alarm system. Use GTS or approved equal for the fire alarm devices and detectors and connect to Building Fire Alarm Control Panel. System shall be with Smoke detectors, Heat detectors, Manual station, sounder and Strode Fire Alarm Control Panel (GTS200 (Digital Addressable type, Brand: GTS)
2.
Fire Extinguisher: Use Dry Chemical Type KAPPER or FIRESTOP brand, Mono Ammonium Phosphate with 5-year warranty. Provide 2A rated 5.0 kg fire extinguishers, non-conductor, non-expirable, stored, pressure with gauge, quick operation, in seamless steel cylinder and brass valve head, in locations as shown on plans.
15.04. BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS (See Section 22100)
A.
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1. Cold and Hot Water Lines: All pipes exposed to weather shall be Galvanized Iron G.I. pipe Schedule 40 with epoxy coating, by APO or shall be Polypropylene Plastherm (PN-20) PPR Pipes and Fittings, by :BUGATTI, or approved equal conforming to ISO 4065 standard dimensions, using manufacturer specified method of installation and connection.
2. Valves: ASTM B-61 & 62, ASTM A 197, KITZ or BERMAD or approved equal. For gate valves and check valves, cast brass, sizes as required in the drawings. 150 psig working connection. 3. Hose Bibbs: 20mm standard hose connection, male tapered threads, polished chromium plated, KITZ or GERBER. 4. Pumps: a. For Ground Floor Transfer Pump: For Non-Potable Water: Two sets Duplex Type Electric Driven Transfer Pump, 3450rpm Vertical multistage, 2.5 HP, single-phase, 230 V, 60 Hz with magnetic switch control, 70 gpm, 80 TDH (ft), Operation: Alternate, complete with magnetic motor controller. Complete with accessories.
For Potable Water: Two sets Duplex Type Electric Driven Transfer Pump, 3450 rpm Vertical multistage, 2.5 HP, single-phase, 230V, 60 Hz with magnetic switch control, 70 gpm, 80 TDH (ft.) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Operation: Alternate, complete with magnetic motor controller. Complete with accessories.
b. For Elevated Booster Pump: For non-potable: Two sets Duplex Type Centrifugal End Suction Hydropneumatic Pump, Capacity: Q=75 GPM 3 HP, TDH = 100 (ft), single phase, 3450 rpm, 60 Hz, 230V. Operation: Alternate, complete with magnetic motor controller w/ bladder tank. Complete with accessories.
Two sets Stainless Steel Elevated Water Tank, Cap = 2,700 gals, complete with accessories.
For potable: Two sets Duplex Type Centrifugal End Suction Hydropneumatic Pump, Capacity: Q=50 GPM, 3 HP, TDH = 100 (ft), 3 phase, 3450 rpm, 60 Hz, 230V. Operation: Alternate complete with magnetic motor controller w/ bladder tank. Complete with accessories.
One set Stainless Steel Elevated Water Tank, Cap= 2,700 gals, complete with accessories. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
c.
For Fire Pump: One Unit, electric driven, Centrifugal, 30 HP, 80 psi, 400 gpm, 380 vcl,3-phase 220V 60 Vz (as indicated in plans)
d. For Jockey Pump: One Unit GRUNDFOS, Vertical on line, 2 HP, 90 psi, 18 gpm, 3-phase 220V 60 Vz with magnetic, switch control, 2 sets mechanical float switch liquid level control or approved equivalent.
B.
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM: 1. For outside the building, concrete drain pipe (CDP), tongue and groove, mortar joints, reinforced for 300mm____ and larger. Concrete Drainage Pipes: As manufactured by CONCRETE SOLUTIONS inc., or approved equal. Pipes with sizes are required. 2. Storm Drainage and Downspouts: shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, Emerald brand or approved equal. Fitt ings shall be solvent cement joint conforming to ASTM D2564.
3. Drainage Junction Boxes 140 kg/sq. c.m. reinforced concrete with pre-cast reinforced concrete cover. a. Thrust Blocks 140 kg/sq. c.m. plain concrete.
b. Sewer Junction Boxes 140 kg/sq. reinforced concrete with C.I. grating cover.
c.
Area Drain/Catch Basin 140 kg/sq. reinforced concrete with C.J. grating cover.
4.
Open Canal Steel Grating: Built up as shown in detailed drawings.
C. SANITARY DISPOSAL SYSTEM 1. Sanitary Pipes/Sewer Pipes: Shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, EMERALD, brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement joint conforming to ASTM D2564. 2. Vent pipes: Shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, EMERALD, brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564. 3. Waste pipes: Shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, EMERALD, brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement conforming to ASTM D2564. 4. Exposed soil, waste and vent pipes shall be cast iron, extra heavy. 5. Clean-out Plugs: Cast brass ferrule with countersunk tap screw cover, For all drain and sewer lines requiring clean outs. N-240, ASA or equal.
D.
OTHER MATERIALS 1. Drains ASA, METMA as indicated or approved equal. a. Roof M-319-16, ASA or equal M-210 ASA or equal M-319-36, ASA or equal
b. Floor/Shower c. Deck
d. Canopy e. Trench Drain f. 2. Cleanout
M -319-34, ASA or equal M-319-34, ASA or equal M-240, ASA or equal
Water Meter (size as indicated on the plans) BADGER or approved by MWSS for main meter.
15.05 PLUMBING FIXTURES (NIC) 1. Water closets 2. Lavatories 3. Urinal 4. Kitchen Sink:
16.0 ELECTRICAL
16.01 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (See Section 16100) (NIC)
A. WIRES AND CABLES : 1. PHELPS BODGE or approved equal.
2. All wires shall be copper, soft-drawn and annealed, shall be of 99% conductivity, shall be smooth and true and of a cylindrical form and shall be within 1% of the actual size called for.
3. All wires and cables shall comply with the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, the A.S.T.M. and the I.P.C.E.A. EIA/TIA as they apply in the particulars.
4. Wire and cables for lighting power and auxiliary systems shall be plastic insulated for 600 volts working pressure, type THHN unless otherwise noted on plans.
5. For lighting and power system, no wire smaller the 2.0mm dia. Shall be used. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
6. All wires and cables shall be color-coded and as manufactured by cable manufacturers. Colors coding and wires are as follows: Line A Black Line B Red Line C Yellow 7. Ground Green Neutral White Control wires other color
Fire rated cable shall have fire resistance of 3 hours. Insulation shall be flame retardant, halogen free and low smoke emission when exposed to fire.
8. No conductor shall be less the 3.5 mm2 in size unless otherwise specified. 9. 600 volts wires and cables should meet the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for the type of insulation, jacket and conductor specified or indicated in all power and lighting wires shall be 600-volt, type THW or THHN. High voltage cables shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE type) to withstand 23KV potential. B. CONDUITS 1. Rigid steel Conduits (RSC) and Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) shall be standard weight, mild steel, hot dip galvanized or sherardized with zinc coated interior, threaded type and not smaller than 13mm (1/2 inch) nominal diameter, ANSI C80. 1. Use MATSUSHITA brand. 2. Rigid Plastic Conduit: UL 561 Schedule 40 PVC. Use NELTEX brand.
3. Conduit fittings: Fittings for RSC shall be threaded type. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514.
C.
OUTLETS, OUTLET BOXES AND FITTINGS: 1. Convenience Outlets: CLIPSAL, white color, 220V with amperage as required. For general building interior use.
2. Weatherproofed Outlets: CLIPSAL, double device plate with cover receptacle heavy duty. For pump house. Other as indicated on drawings. 3. Boxes: FUMACO metal utility boxes, sizes and shapes as required.
D.
SWITCHES, PANELBOARDS AND CURCUIT BREAKERS: 1. Switches: PANASONIC, gray color, flush type rate 220 volts to 16 amperes, Suited to location and intended purposes.
2. Circuit Breakers: Manufactured by SQUARE-D or equivalent, bolt-on type, prepainted, surface mounted, with latch lock. 3. Magnetic Starter: SQUARE-D with NEMA casing approved equal, surface mounted with latch lock. 4. Metal Enclosures and Cabinets: FUJI-HAYA or approved equal. 5. Panel Boards: All Panel Boards shall comply with NFMA standards. Panel Boards Buses. Provide Copper bus. Support the bus bars on bases independent of the circuit breaker. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so those breakers may changes without machining, drilling or tapping. Provide a separate ground bus marked with green stripe along its front and bonded the steel cabinet for type of conductor. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breaker shall be ambient compensated thermal magnetic type with interrupting capacity as indicated. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suited for type of conductor provided. Use SQUARE D brand or approved equivalent. E. JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES 1. Junction and pull boxes per code gage steel, shall only be subject to the permission of the engineer and be provided as indicated or as required for facilitating the pulling of wires and cables. Pull boxes in finished places shall be located and installed only with the permission of and to the satisfaction of the architect and engineer.
F.
POWER CABLES & TERMINATIONS
1.
Supply and installation of service entrance power cables 50 mm sq. XLPE, rated at 25KV.
2. Supply and install high voltage termination kits and long barrel crimp type terminal lugs. G. BUS BARD GUTTERS 1. Bus bar gutters shall be epoxy-coated sheet steel having a code required minimum thickness and cross section and shall be provided with a cover along one side hinged with galvanized screws. The length shall be fit into each other (malefemale) or shall be bolted in a manner approved by the engineer. Gutters shall be installed complete with all fittings and accessories and supports as shown on drawings and directed by the engineer. Each section of the gutters shall be fixed in at least two places and shall be effectively grounded in accordance with code requirements.
2.
Bus Bars shall be 98% pure copper with regular cross-sections. All bus bars shall be silver plated. Ground bus shall be provided and sized at 50% of the phases buses.
H.
TRANSFORMER: 3-250 KVA, 1 PHASE Oil Filled Transformer, BANKED, self cooled, 60deg. C temp. rise oil filled. OUTDOOR type, built and tested in accordance to ANSI / IEEE standards. PHILEC brand or approved equivalent, as location indicated in plans.
Capacity Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
3 250 KVA
Primary Voltage BIL Rating Taps
: : :
24 KV 125kv x 2.5% FCAN and 2 x 2.5% FCBN Tap Changer for de-energized operation
Secondary BANKED BIL Rating Temperature Rise
: : :
380Y/220 wye connected 30kv 65 deg. C
I.
GENERATOR SETS: (NIC) One (1) 200 KVA, Diesel Electric Genset, Direct Injection Turbocharged Aftercooled, at 1800RPM, 60 Hertz, 3 Phase, 0.8 Power Factor with fan, 380V/220V Volts complete with standard accessories and attachments including: -battery charger, static, float type -batteries, 2pcs. -Exhaust muffler, local supply -Exhaust elbow, 1 pc., local supply -Stainless Steel flexible exhaust -Radiator Coolant -Engine Oil -EMCP 3.1 control panel (self diagnostic) -fuel tan, 8 hrs. minimum -Circuit breaker
16.02 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (See Section 16420) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES: UL 1570, except lighting fixtures for dampand wet locations shall conform to UL 57.
Fluorescent lamps: Provide the number, type and voltage as indicated on the drawings. All fluorescent lamps shall be provided with retainer for safety or using the spring type fluorescent holder.
Fluorescent Ballast: UL 935, ANSI C.82.1, and shall be labeled Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CMB), electronic, certified by the Electrical Testing (ETL). Ballast shall be high power factor type unless indicated otherwise and shall be designed to operate on the frequency and voltage system to which they are connected. Ballast shall be class P and shall have sound rating A unless other noted. Fixture and ballast shall be Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
designed and constructed to limit the ballast case temperature to 90C when installed in an ambient temperature 40C.
B.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES: (NIC) 1. Flood lighting: 250W, 240V, Metal Halide Lamp, tempered glass protection, aluminum reflector, pole-mounted, (warm white) at (FAADE LIGHTING)
2. CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp recessed Compact Fluorescent Lamp, 8W with electronic ballast by Osram. (ELEVATOR LOBBY LIGHTING) 3. CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp recessed Compact Fluorescent Lamp, 8W with electronic ballast by Osram. (BASEMENT PARKING AREA LIGHTING) 4. CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp recessed Compact Fluorescent Lamp, 8W with electronic ballast by Osram. (BASEMENT RAMP LIGHTING) 5. PL Pin Light Down-light, Pin Light, 11 watts, 220V, with Electronic ballast (LOBBY) 6. PL Pin Light Down-light, Pin Light, 7 watts, 220V, with Electronic ballast (HALLWAYS, COMMON AREAS) 7. PL Pin Light Down-light, Pin Light, 5 watts, 220V, with Electronic ballast. (COMFORT ROOMS & MEDIA AGUA) 8. Exhaust Fan: Ceiling Inline Exhaust Fans, 2238 watts, 6000 CFM, 220v, Centrifugal Type. (BASEMENT 1 & 2) 9. Exhaust Fan: Ceiling Inline Exhaust Fans, 32 watts, 50 CFM, 220v, with Back-draft Damper, Centrifugal Type. (COMFORT ROOMS) 10. Emergency Lights: PL-C Down light, 1 x 13 watts with White Acrylic Reffector, equipped with BAG Digital Electronic Ballast, BAG 1 hour Battery Pack & GE Biax D/E 4 pin 13W/865 (Elevator Lobbies, Access of Exits, Semi-Private Rooms, Common Areas) 11. Exit Lights: AURA Exit Sign LED 2.1 watts with charging Time of 24 hours, Operation Time of 2 hours in Ni-CAD Battery, Model # ST-8011G. (Directional Access Area Exit & Exit Doors) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
16.03
PATHWAYS (See Section 16800)
A.
Conduits
1.
Shall be Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit, polyvinyl chloride.
Schedule 40, constructed of
B.
Fittings: (NIC) 1. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Connectors shall have insulated throat up to and including 1 size. For sizes 1 and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing.
C.
Waterproofing Seals: (NIC) 1. Provide watertight expanding link-type seals for installation between the conduit and the sleeve or core drilled hole.
D.
Pull and Junction Boxes (NIC) 1. Shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type cover boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of rain-tight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs.
E.
Ladder Cable Trays (NIC)
1.
Ladder Cable Trays shall be steel construction including accessories. Maximum rung spacing 9 in. on center is welded to side rails. Minimum radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special radius elbows where required for field conditions.
F.
Cable Hangers (NIC) 1. Provide prefabricated, zinc coated, carbon steel hangers designed specifically for UTP and Optical Fiber cable installations.
2. Hangers shall have open top, rolled edges and a 3 or 4 minimum loop. 3. Provide beams clamps, rod fasteners, flange clips and brackets.
16.04
STRUCTURED CABLING (See Section 16850) (NIC)
A. CABLING COMPONENTS 1. Voice and Data 1.1. UTP Cat 6, 4 pairs, solid, 24 AWG 1.2. UTP Cat 6, 25 pairs, solid, 24 AWG 1.3. Patch Cords Cat 6, 3ft and 5ft 1.4. Open Bay Rack, 6ft 1.5. Patch Panel Cat 6, 24 ports 1.6. Cable Manager, 2U 1.7. Rack Shelf, 19 1.8. Cable Duct, 8 1.9. 110 Wiring Block with Legs, 100 pairs 1.10. 110 wiring Block with Legs, 50 pairs
1.11. 8-Pin Modular Jacks, Cat 6 (RJ45 Information Outlets) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2.
CATV 2.1. RG-11 Coaxial Cable 2.2. RG-6 Coaxial Cable
B.
CONDUITS: 1. Metallic conduits for interior and exterior systems shall be a standard weight, mild, steel, hot-dip galvanized with an interior coating as manufactured by MATSUSHITA, PUSAN, TSP, NIPPON, ALLIED, or equal.
2. Non-metallic conduits shall be NELTEX or equal. 3. No conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 21mm dia. Electrical trade size, nor shall have more than two 90-degree bends in any one run and when necessary, pull boxes shall be provided as directed. Location and sizes of pull boxes shall be cleared to the engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 4. Outlet boxes shall be deep type gage #16, as manufactured by MATSUSHITA or equal.
C.
CABLE TRAYS
1.
Tray size shall be 12 x 4.
2. All cable trays shall be grounded and bonded per Electrical Codes.
D.
OUTLET 1. For voice and data, all RJ-45 jack modules should be wired in accordance with TIA/EIA 568-B
2. For CATV, all connections shall be RG6 F Connector type.
E.
MDF and IDF Rooms 1. All walls shall be lined with 4 x 8 x 3/4 Fire-resistant A/C plywood, A side out.
2. Plywood shall be mounted vertically with flush or countersunk fasteners. 3. The bottom edge of the plywood shall be mounted 9 AFF so that the top is 8 9 AFF. (This allows better support for cable runaway brackets) 4. Plywood shall be mounted such that the joints are butted tight. 5. Plywood shall be painted with two coats of white, sating finish (washable) paint. 6. All telecom rooms shall be provided with three 20 amps circuit to serve three standard outlet boxes, each having two duplex receptacles. Locate outlet boxes directly above the top of the edge backboard. 7. Telecom rooms shall have grounding as specified in Section 27100 paragraph 3.10 Grounding System.
F.
INFORMATION OUTLETS 1. The information Outlets shall be Category 6, RJ45 jack for the data system using the EIA/TIA 568-B wiring standard.
2. Coaxial cable shall be terminated in a flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet in a standard electrical outlet box. Type and color of receptacle outlet plates be selected by the Architect and appropriate samples of outlets and plates shall be submitted prior to purchase of devices. Receptacles shall be as manufactured by National or equal.
G.
PANELS and CABINETS: 1. Standard panels and cabinets as far as possible shall be used and assembled at jobsite. Cabinets shall be of code gauge steel with gutters at least 150mm and wider, if necessary. The trim for all panels shall be finished in gray enamel over a rust inhibitor. Front doors shall be provided with concealed hinges.
2. Panels and cabinets shall be fabricated by a reputable fabricator. Fabricators shop drawings in triplicate shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Only one brand of circuit breakers and fabricator shall be used for the entire requirement of the project.
H.
INDIVIDUAL BREAKERS and SWITCHES 1. Provide individual circuit breakers, and disconnect switches when indicated on the plans. Voltage rating shall be suitable in each case of service application.
2. Enclosure for indoor application shall be NEMA-1 and for outdoor application shall be NEMA-3R unless otherwise indicated in the plans. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3. All protective devices shall meet NEMA and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. specifications. 4. Only one single brand of circuit breakers shall be used on the entire project requirement. Acceptable brands are GENERAL ELECTRIC, FUJI ELECTRIC, SQUARE D and MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC. Submit brochures for approval. 5. Safety and disconnect switches shall be non-fusible and of sizes indicated on plans and shall be normal duty type, except as noted otherwise. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use.
16.05. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE (See Section 16870) (NIC)
A.
All cameras and accessories: Use VIVOTEK brand or approved equivalent
B. Network switch: Use LINKSYS brand. C. Video Server (PC) with LCD monitor. D. Wires and Cables a. Will be carried in an enclosed conduit system, utilizing electromagnetic tubing (EMT) to include the equivalent in flexible metal, rigid galvanized steel (RGS) to include the equivalent of liquid tight, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40 or 80.
SECTION 01100 ITEMS FOR SUBMISSION BY THE CONTRACTOR
ITEMS FOR SUBMISSION BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR THE ARCHITECTS APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDER, PURCHASE, WORK OR MANUFACTURE
The following section is a listing of materials and construction documents for the Architects appreciation to ensure that design objectives for the intended class of construction are met. It is designed to avoid waste such as when the Contractor installs specific materials or systems which are not acceptable for the project.
1.0 SAMPLES
DIVISION 2 > All fill materials
SITEWORK 1 plastic packet each
> Plant Materials
1 sample each, at holding area
DIVISION 3 > Cement > Aggregates
CONCRETE
> All specified sizes of rebars per bulk delivery > Post tensioning tendons, conduits and anchorages
1000 mm length
DIVISION 4 > Masonry Units
MANSONRY 1 sample each
DIVISION 5
METALS 1000 mm length 150 mm length 150 mm length
> All specified sizes of structural steel sections > Stainless Steel Pipes and other sections > Brass Nosing
DIVISION 6 > All lumber > All Plywood
WOOD AND PLASTICS 600 mm length 1 panel 1 panel
> All Fiber Cement Boards
DIVISION 7
THERMAL & MOISTURE CONTROL 300 mm x 300 mm swatch
> All waterproofing materials Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
> All damp proofing products
300 mm x 300 mm swatch
> All insulation products > Metal Roofing showing overlap of sheets > Plastic Roofing showing overlap of sheets
300 mm x 300 mm piece 600 mm length 600 mm length
DIVISION 8
DOORS & WINDOWS 1 unit each 1 piece each
> All corner sections of doors, jambs and hardware > All finishing hardware: lockets, deadbolts, hinges, door stopper/holder door closer, bumpers, bulletin board sliding mechanism, all cabinets & drawer pulls and locks and aluminum door Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
hardware > All glass panes & glazing compounds > All mirror 600 mm x 600 mm mock-up 600 mm x 600 mm mock-up
DIVISION 9
FINISHES 1 piece each 300 mm x 300 mm swatches for all types and colors
>All sizes and colors of vitrified tiles > All paints and lacquers
DIVISION 10 > All toilet accessories
SPECIALTIES 1 piece each
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL 200 mm length each
> All metal pipes, PVC pipes and fittings include (Phil. Bureau of Standards) certificate for other Than those specified > All plumbing fixtures / fittings > All valves > Floor drains
1 set each 1 unit each 1 set each
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL 1 set each 1 of each type 1 complete set each
> Panel board and circuit breaker > All conduits, fittings, wires, cables & accessories > All lightings fixtures, switches & convenience outlets Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
> All wiring devices, junction box, pull box & accessories > Ground rods and accessories > Blowers and exhaust fans > All telephone terminal cabinets, accessories > All Public Address system components > Fire Alarm Control Panel > All Intercom system components > All cabling components
1 set each 1 set 1 unit each 1 unit each 1 unit each 1 complete set 1 unit each 1 unit each
> All conduits, fittings, wires, cables & accessories > All outlets, junction box, pull box, fittings & accessories > Individual circuit breakers and switches > All grounding wires and bus bars Read and accepted as part of the Contract:
1 of each type 1 set each 1 set each 1 of each type
> Terminal cabinet, conduit, tray outlets & pull boxes For Telephone/Data System > CATV cabinets, conduits, boxes, taps, splitters & CATV outlets > All cameras > Video display equipment > Camera housing and mounts > All conduits, fittings, wires, cables & accessories > Matrix switches, network servers, routers, Network video recorders > Surge protectors, lighting grid > Video encoders > All conduits, fittings, wires, cables & accessories > Installation kit
1 set each
1 set each 1 unit each 1 set each 1 unit each 1 of each set 1 set each
1 set each 1 set each 1 of each type 1 set
2.0 TECHNICAL CATALOGUES AND BROCHURES 1. Fire Extinguisher 2. Aluminum Window System 3. All Plumbing Fixtures and accessories 4. Booster and Deep Well Pumps 5. Electrical panel distribution system 6. Wires and Cables 7. Conduits, fittings and boxes Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
8. Lighting Fixtures 9. Telephone pull box 10. Others (if required by the Architect / Owner)
3.0 DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS 1. All steel built-up members and framing works of roof framing system 2. Jalousie windows, mullions, headers, sills, and end frames and accessories. Specify catalog numbers of each section 3. Roofing system including the fixation details per manufacturers specifications. 4. Installation method and details of building I.D. brass letters. 5. Suspended Ceiling System. 6. Others (if required by the Architect / Owner)
4.0 LABORATORY TEST CERTIFICATES
1.
Certified Fill and Backfill Test Reports
2. Granular Fill Test Reports 3. Concrete reinforcing steel 4. Concrete hollow blocks 5. Concrete (bases on batch mix for specified phases of pouring works), Concrete mix design Concrete test results 6. Compaction test on fill materials
7. Potability of water 8. Roof truss welding tests 9. Others (if required by Architect / Owner)
5.0 GUARANTEES / WARRANTIES
1.
Termite-proofing & soil-poisoning
2. Waterproofing 3. Dampproofing 4. Insulation 5. Roofing 6. Joint Sealant 7. All pumps and tanks Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
8. Fire extinguishers 9. Others (if required by Architect / Owner)
SECTION 01200 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.0 DETAIL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS
The drawings referred to in these Specifications maybe further supplemented by additional detail drawings and instructions essential to proper interpretation of the Drawings and the proper execution of the work. The Architect shall furnish with reasonable promptness such additional detail drawings and instructions. All such additional detail drawings and instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, through developments thereof, and reasonably inferable therefrom. All such additional drawings and instruments are to be considered of equal force as those which originally accompany the Specifications. The work shall be executed in conformity with such detail drawings and instructions, and the Contractor shall do no work without proper drawings and instructions.
1.02 SCHEDULE FOR SUBMISSION OF DETAIL AND SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor and the Architect, if either one so request, shall jointly prepare a schedule of subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of work, fixing the dates at which the various detail drawings will be required, and the Architect shall furnish them in accordance with that schedule. Under like conditions, a schedule shall be prepared, fixing the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
dates for submission of the shop drawings, in preparation for the manufacture and installation of materials and for the completion of various parts of the work.
2.0 SHOP DRAWINGS
2.01 CONDITIONS IN THE PREPARATION OF SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall prepare at his own expense and submit with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any other Contractor doing work on the same building, two (2) copies of all shop or setting drawings, templates, patterns and models, as well as schedule required for the work of various trades, and the Architect shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness making desired corrections. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as maybe needed.
2.02 CHECKING DRAWINGS OF SUB-CONTRACTORS
Before submitting shop drawings for approval, the Contractor shall check drawings of all sub-contractors for accuracy. He shall see that all work contiguous with and having bearing on work indicated in the shop drawings in accurately and distinctly illustrated and that work shown is in conformity with contract requirements.
2.03 IDENTIFICATION
Shop drawings shall be numbered consecutively and represent: 1. All working and erection dimensions
2. Arrangements and sectional views. 3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections for other work. 4. Kinds of materials and finishes.
Shop drawings shall be dated and contain (a) name of project (b) descriptive names of equipment, materials and classified item numbers, (c) location at which materials or equipment are to be installed in work.
2.04 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
Submission of Shop Drawings shall be accompanied by a Letter of Transmittal in duplicate, containing the name of the project. Contractors name, number of drawings, titles and other pertinent data.
2.05 CORRECTIONS, CHANGES AND VARIATIONS
The Contractor shall submit three (3) set of prints of shop drawings to the Architect for approval. Satisfactory shop drawings will be identified by the Architect, dated, and one copy thereof returned to the Contractor should shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor with necessary corrections and changes to be made as indicated.
A.
The Contractor shall made required corrections and changes and re-submit shop drawings, in duplicate until the Architects approval is obtained.
B. Upon receipt of approval, the Contractor shall insert date of approval on tracings and promptly furnish the Architect with three additional prints of approved drawings. C. No work called by shop drawings shall be executed until the Architects approval is given. D. If shop drawings show variation from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make mention of such variations in his letter of submittal.
2.06 RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCURACY
Approval of shop drawings will be general. It shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for accuracy of such drawings, nor for proper fitting and construction of work, nor for furnishing of materials or work required by the Contractor and not indicated on shop drawings. The Architects approval of such drawings or schedule shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviation from Drawings or Specifications, unless he has in writing. Called the Architects attention to such deviation at the time of submission and secure written approval, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules.
SECTION 01300 FIELD ENGINEERING
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SERVICES OF LICENSED SURVEYOR
The Contractor shall pay for the services of a licensed Surveyor to confirm and certify the location of column centers, piers, walls, pits, trenches, pipe work, culvert work, utility lines and work of similar nature required by the Contract.
A.
The contractor shall furnish certification from a licensed Surveyor that all portions of work are located in accordance with Contract requirements and at elevations required thereby.
B. The Surveyor shall promptly verify and certify to lines and levels of any portion or subdivision of work at any time it may be deemed necessary by the Architect. Any deviation from the Drawings shall be certified to the Architect within 24 hours of discovery of same.
1.02 SURVEYOR REQUISITES
The Surveyor selected for the purpose of undertaking the work involved in this project shall be subject to the Architects approval. He shall not be a regular employee of the Contractor, nor shall he have any interest in the Contract. He shall be employed by the Contractor in laying out the work, it being intended that the Surveyor shall present an independent and disinterested verification of the projects layout.
1.03 CERTIFIATION BY SURVEYOR
A final certification shall be submitted upon completion of work, or upon completion of each major segment of the work, or as required by the Architect, and before final certificate, and there shall be included a map, plot note or the like necessary in the opinion of the Architect to constitute a full and complete report.
SECTION 01400 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
1.0 USE OF PREMISES
1.00 LIMITATIONS FOR USE The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials, and the operations of his workmen to limits indicated by the law, ordinances, permits, or directions of the Architect and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials.
1.02 SAFEGUARD FOR STRUCTURE
The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with weight that will endanger its safety.
The Contractor shall enforce the Architects instructions regarding signs, advertisement, fires and smoking.
2.0
TEMPORARY STRUCTURE AND FACILITIES
2.01 TEMPORARY OFFICE AND CONTRACTORS BUILDING
The Contractor shall at all times provide and maintain adequate weather tight temporary office with air conditioner, water, light telephone, and toilet facilities for the use of the Architect, resident, engineers, inspectors, contractors, and sub-contractors. This office shall be provided with wooden flood raised above the ground, windows, doors and locks, tables, closet, blackboard, tackboard, benches and racks of drawings. One closed private room shall be apportioned for the exclusive use of three Owners Project Representative. Another room of approximately TWELVE (12) square meters shall be provided for the Architects use.
2.02 TEMPORARY HOUSING FOR WORKERS
The temporary buildings for housing men, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection will be permitted only at such places as the Owner or Architect shall designate; and the sanitary condition of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Nobody shall be allowed to sleep or cook within the building line of the project under construction.
2.03
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES AND FIRST AID STATION
The Contractor shall provide, construct and maintain for the duration of the contract, ample sanitary toilet accommodation and other necessary conveniences including water connections for the use of personnel and laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation, in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Architect, and their use shall be strictly enforced. He shall keep places clean and free from flies, remove all connections and appliances connected therewith prior to the completion of the contract, and leave the premises perfectly clean.
2.04 TEMPORARY BARRICADES AND GUARD LIGHTS
The Contractor shall furnish and put up all temporary barricades and guard lights necessary for the protection, proper prosecution and completion of work. The guard lights at the top of the falsework barricades, railing, etc. shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor throughout the duration of the project.
2.05 TEMPORARY WATER, POWER AND TELEPHONE FACILITIES
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the local utility companies in order that temporary facilities for water, power, and telephone are sufficiently provided till the completion of the work. All expenses incurred in connection therewith shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.06
TEMPORARY SIGNS
No signs or advertisements will be allowed to be displayed without the Architects approval. The Contractor may erect one painted sign as approved by the Architect, giving names and address of the Architect, Contractor, and various sub-contractors. The Architect shall approve the size, color, lettering, and sign location.
2.07 TEMPORARY ROADWAYS The Contractor shall construct and properly maintain temporary roadways within and adjacent to the site in order to provide proper access to the building. Temporary roadways adequately sustain loads to be carried on them and be so constructed as not to endanger existing or newly installed underground structures.
2.08 TEMPORARY STAIR, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, runways, derricks, chutes, and the like, as required for proper execution of work by all trades. All such apparatus, equipment, and the construction shall meet all requirements of Labor Law and other local laws applicable thereto.
2.09 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY STRUCTURES Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Temporary facilities allowed inside the construction site shall include the field offices, sanitary facilities, first aid station and the temporary barricades and fences. The temporary housing for workers and the bodega for materials shall be loaded in a lot close to the work site, as approved by the Owner and the Architect, which shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost.
2.10 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY STRUCTURES The Contractor shall remove all temporary work from premises, erected by him and shall clean the premises as a condition for completing the work and before acceptance of work by the Owner.
3.0 PROTECTION OF WORK AND OWNERS PROPERTY
3.01 SAFEGUARD MEASURES
The Contractor shall put up and continuously maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect the Owners property, as well as all materials furnished and delivered to him by the Owner. He shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Owner, or due to causes considered as Act of God.
A. The Contractor shall provide reliable and competent watchmen to guard the site and premises from commencement of operations until building is fully operational. Provide all doorways with locks under control of the Contractor, who shall lock doors at the close of each days work. In the event that the Architect at any time deems watchmen service inadequate or incompetent the contractor shall increase or change the watchmen personnel to the Architects satisfaction
B. Smoking on premises shall be prohibited except in areas designated by the Owner of the Architect. Fired shall not be built on premises except by express consent of the Architect. C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain barrels of water and fire buckets on premises for fire protection. Such equipment shall not be used for any other purpose. D. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good working order an adequate number of fire extinguishers.
3.02 TREES AND OTHER PLANTS Existing trees, plants, shrubs, etc., which are to remain shall be boxed or otherwise protected from damage. No trees within site or located outside building lines shall be cut or removed without specific approval from the Owner and the Architect. A. All trees and other plants that need to be transplanted elsewhere within fifty (50) meters from the building line shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense in accordance with instructions from the Architect or from the authorities concerned.
B.
Undue damage of trees, plants, shrubs, streets, sidewalks, etc. resulting from or in connection with the construction work shall be made good and or replaced by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect.
3.03 DRAINAGE
If it is necessary in the prosecution of the work to interrupt or obstruct the natural flow of rivers or streams, the drainage of the surface, or flow of artificial drains, the Contractor shall provide for the same during the progress of the work in such a way that no damage shall result to either public or private interest. For any neglect to provide for other natural or artificial drainage which he may have interrupted, he shall solely be held liable for all damages which may result therefrom during the progress of the work.
4.0 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY AND EXISTING UTILITIES
4.01 CONTRACTORS SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor shall adequately protect the adjacent property ad provided by law and the Contract Documents. The construction, building or work, in addition to any neighboring property or building which may be jeopardized in any manner, must be thoroughly and substantially braced against winds, floods, setting, falling, of like similar occurrences, and when necessary, covered and protected from sun and rain at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall solely be liable and pay for all damages occasioned in any manner by his acts or neglect, or if his agents, employees, or workmen.
Existing utilities, if damaged due to negligence or fault of the Contractor, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.
5.0 PROTECTION OF LIFE, WORK AND PROPERTY DURING EMERGENCY Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
5.01 AUTHORIZATION OF CONTRACTOR
In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Owner or Architect, is hereby permitted to act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury and he shall so act, without appeal, if so instructed or authorized. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on amount of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement or arbitration.
SECTION 01500 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
1.0 GENERAL
Notwithstanding anything herein specified or provided that may be construed to the contrary, all materials and equipment must conform to all laws, ordinances, regulations and building codes now or hereafter may be in force and applicable during the period of Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
construction, and the Contractor shall obtain the necessary permits and pay the required fees therefore to the proper authorities. The Contractor shall bear any and damages by reason of any delay in the work arising from his failure to comply with the provisions of this clause. Provided, however, that should any revision or amendments to such laws, ordinances, regulations and codes made during the construction period affect the cost or time or completion of the contract, a corresponding adjustment shall be made.
2.0 EQUIPMENT
2.01 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT
In order to establish standards of quality, the Architect and the Engineers has in detailed Specifications, referred to certain equipment by name and catalog number. This procedure is not to be construed as eliminating from competition other products of equal or better quality by other manufacturers where fully suitable in design. A. The Contractor shall furnish the complete list of proposed substitutions prior to the signing of the Contract, together with such engineering and catalog data as the Architect and the Engineer may require.
B. The Contractor shall abide by the Architects and the Engineers judgments when proposed substitute items of equipment are judged to be acceptable and shall furnish the specified item of equipment in such case. All proposals for substitutions shall be submitted in writing by the General Contractor and not by individual trades or material suppliers. The Architect and the Engineer will approve and disapprove proposed substitutions in writing within a reasonable time. No substitute equipment shall be used unless approved in writing.
2.02 EQUIPMENT APPROVAL DATA
The Contractor shall furnish three copies of complete catalog data for every manufactured item of equipment and all components to be used in the work, including specific performance data, materials description, rating, capacity, working pressure, material gauge or thickness, brand name, catalog number, and general type. A. This submission shall be complied by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and the Engineer before any of the equipment is ordered.
B.
Each data or catalog in the submission shall be indexed according to specification section and paragraph for easy reference.
C. After written approval, this submission shall become a part of the Contract, and may not be deviated from except upon written approval of the Architect and the Engineer. D. Catalog data for equipment approved does not in any case supersede the Contract Documents. The approval of the Architect and the Engineer shall not relive the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications, unless he has, in writing called their attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him responsibility from errors of any sort in the items submitted. The Contractor shall check the work described by the catalog data with the Contract Documents for deviations and errors. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that items to be furnished fir the space available. He shall make necessary field measurement to ascertain space requirements, including connection, and shall order such sizes and shapes of equipment, final installation shall suit the true intent and meaning of the Drawings and specifications. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
F. Where equipment requiring different arrangements of connections from those shown is approved, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install equipment to operate properly, and in harmony with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, and to make full changes in the work required by the different arrangements of connections.
3.0 MATERIALS, FIXTURES, APPLIANCES, AND PITTINGS FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR
3.01 MANUFACTURERS AND DEALERS
Names of proposed manufacturers, material men, and dealers who are furnish materials, fixtures, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as early as possible, to avoid proper investigation and checking. A. No manufacturer will approved for any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good reputation, shall have a plant of ample capacity and adequate quality control, and shall have successfully produced similar products. B. All transactions from manufacturers, and sub-contractors, shall be through the Contractor. C. In asking for prices on materials, the Contractor shall provide manufacturer or dealer with complete information form Specifications and Drawings, and shall inform manufacturers or dealer of all pertinent contract requirements. D. The manufacturer or dealer shall have the materials, equipment, fixtures, appliances or other fitting supplied by him properly coded or identified in accordance with existing standards for same to indicate class grade or quality.
3.02 SAMPLE OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall furnish for approval, with such promptness as to cause no delay in work, samples as specified or required. Work shall be in accordance with approved samples.
A.
Unless otherwise, specified, three samples shall be submitted, and of adequate size to show quality, type, color, range, finish, and texture of material.
B. Each sample shall be labeled, bearing material name and quality, the Contractors name, date, project name and other pertinent data. C. Where specifications require manufacturers printed installation directors, such directions shall accompany samples submitted for approval. D. A letter of transmittal in triplicate from the Contractor requesting approval shall accompany all set of samples. E. Transportation changes to the Architects office must be prepaid on all samples forwarded. F. Materials shall not be ordered until approval is received in writing from the Architect. All materials shall be furnish substantially equal in every respect to approved samples.
3.03 TRADE NAME MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTES
A. Whenever item or class of materials is specified exclusively by trade name, by manufacturers name or by catalogue reference, only such item shall be used except as provided for in paragraph (b) hereof. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. No substitution shall be made for any material, article, or process required under contract unless approved in writing by the Architect. C. Materials and articles installed or used without such approval shall be at the rick of subsequent rejections. D. Samples of materials for use in reinforced concrete work such as steel bars, cement, and aggregates and their certificates or origin are to be approved by the Architect.
3.04 TESTING SAMPLES OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall submit to the Architect as many samples as may be required for testing. Testing of all samples shall comply with the Specifications and government standards and shall be performed by a competent entity or testing laboratory approved by the Architect. All costs for shipment, delivery, handling, and testing of samples are to be paid by the Contractor.
3.05 QUALITY OF MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new. The quality of materials shall be of the best grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. The work shall be performed in the best and most acceptable in manner in strict accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
The decision of the Architect as to quality and quantity of work and materials shall be final and precedent to the Contractors right to receive any money hereunder.
3.06 STORAGE AND STOCKPILING MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall allot suitable space to sub-contractors for storage of their materials and for erection of their sheds and tool houses. B. All cement, lime and other materials affected by moisture shall be stored on platforms and protected from weather. Materials shall be stored as to insure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials shall be located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. C. Should it be necessary at any time to move materials, sheds, or storage platforms, the Contractor shall do so at his own expense.
3.07 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS
All materials not conforming to the requirements of these Specifications shall be considered as defective. No defective materials, the defects of which have been subsequently corrected, shall be used until approval has been given. Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply forthwith with any order of the Architect made pursuant to the provisions of this article, the Architect shall have the authority to remove and replace defective materials and to deduct this cost of removal and replacement from any money due or to become due to Contractor. A. The apparent silence of the specifications, Drawings, Special Provisions and Supplementary Specifications, as to any detail or description concerning any point shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only materials and workmanship of first-class quality are to be used.
B. Failure and neglect on the part of the Architect, or any of his agents to condemn or reject bad or inferior materials shall not be construed to imply acceptance of the materials if said bad or inferior materials are discovered at any time prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the release of the Contractor.\
3.08 IMPORTED MATERIALS, FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall take cognizance of the time element of the Contract. He shall make early arrangements for the purchase and delivery of all specified imported materials, fixtures, appliances and equipment in order to avoid delay in the completion of the Work.
No extension of time or substitution of materials shall be allowed due to negligence or inadvertence of the Contractor.
4.0 ITEMS FURNISHED BY THE OWNER
Materials, equipment, fixtures, appliances and fittings specifically indicated shall be furnished by the Owner in accordance with a schedule of delivery agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. The fact that the Owner is to furnish materials is conclusive evidence of its acceptability for the purpose intended, and the Contractor may continue to use it until otherwise directed. If the Contractor discovers any defect in material furnished by the Owner, he shall notify the Architect.
The Contractor shall be responsible for material loss and damage after receipt of any material, fixture, appliance or fitting unless same have been installed and accepted for safekeeping by the Owner or his representative. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
5.0 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees on all patented materials and processes furnished by him. He shall defend all suits and claims corresponding thereto for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof.
6.0 MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS
All manufactured articles materials, equipment, appliance and fittings shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned, in accordance with manufacturers printed directions, unless herein specified to the contrary. Where reference I made to manufacturers directions, the Contractor shall submit specified number of copi es of such directions of the Architect.
SECTION 01750 Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.0 CONTRACTORS INSURANCE AND BONDS
1.01 CONTRACTORS LIABILITY INSURANCE
The Contractor shall secure and maintain such insurance from an insurance company approved by the Owner as will protect himself, his sub-contractors, and the Owner from claims of bodily injury, death or property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under this section and shall have filed the certificate of insurance or the certified copy of the insurance policy with the Owner. Such insurance policy shall contain a clause providing that it shall not be cancelled by the insurance company without ten (10) days written notice to the Owner of intention to cancel. The amounts of such insurance shall be as agreed upon.
1.02 CONTRACTORS FIRE INSURANCE
In addition to such fire Insurance as the Contractor elects to carry for his work protection, he shall secure and maintain in the name of the Owner policies upon such structures and materials and in such amount as shall be designated. These policies shall be secured from a company which is satisfactory to the Owner and delivered to the Owner.
1.03 CONTRACTORS PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS
The Contractor, prior to signing the Contract, shall furnish a Performance Bond equal to 30% of the Contract Amount for the faithful performance of his work and 30% Payment Bond covering payments and obligations arising from his Contract. Such bonds shall be in Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
the forms of sureties as approved by the Owner. Such bonds shall remain in effect until replaced by the Contractors Guarantee Bond.
1.04 CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE BOND
The Performance and Payment Bonds will be released by the Owner after the expiration of two (2) months from the final acceptance of the work and only after the Contractor has furnished the Owner, a Guarantee Bond in the amount of 20% of the Total Contract Cost. The Guarantee Bond shall be for a period of one (1) year commencing from the date of acceptance as a guarantee that all materials and workmanship installed under Contract are of good quality.
1.05 CONTRACTORS GUARANTY-WARRANTY
A.
The Contractor shall, in case of work performed by his sub-contractors and where guarantees are required, secure warranties from said sub-contractors and deliver copies of same to the Owner upon completion of work.
B.
The Contractor shall and thereby warrants all work performed by him directly and for which guarantee are required.
C. The Contractor shall and thereby warrants and/or guarantees for a period of one year, or for longer periods where so provided in specifications, as evidenced by date of final certificate issued by the Architect, all materials and workmanship installed under Contract to be of good quality in every respect and to remain so for period described herein.
D. Should any defects develop in aforesaid work, within the specified period due to faults in materials and/or workmanship, the contractor thereby agrees to make all repairs and do all necessary work to correct defective work to the Architects satisfaction. Su ch repairs and corrective works shall be done without cost to the Owner and at entire cost and expenses of the Contractor within five (5) days written notice to the Contractor by the Owner.
E. In case the Contractor fails to do the work so ordered, the Owner may have the work done and change the cost thereof against monies retained as provided for in the Agreement and, if said retained monies shall be insufficient to pay such cost, or if no money is available, the Contractor and his sureties agree to pay to the Owner the cost of work.
F. All the foregoing are without prejudice to the right of the Owner under the New Civil Code and other laws now or hereafter that may be applicable.
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This section shall include the removal of existing site structures, disposal of items deemed unusable by the Owner, as well as the salvaging and storage of items deemed valuable by the Owner.
1.02 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREA
Areas in which demolition and salvage work are to be accomplished will be available upon receipt by the Contractor of the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 EXECUTION
2.01 PROCEDURE
The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of salvage and demolition or removal work shall be submitted for approval. The procedure shall be provided for safe conduct of work, careful removal and disposal of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection of utility services.
2.02 DISCONNECTION OF UTILITY SERVICE
Utilities shall be disconnected at the points directed. Where such disconnection will interrupt the utility services to an area not included in the contract, arrangements for such interruption shall be made with Project Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of the interruption.
2.03 DUST CONTROL
The amount of dust resulting from the salvage and removal operations shall be controlled to prevent the spread of dust to adjacent buildings, and to avoid creation of nuisance in the surrounding areas.
2.04 USE OF EXPLOSIVES Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The use of explosives will not be permitted.
2.05 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted
2.06 DEMOLITION
A.
SALVAGING Items to be salvaged shall be identified by the Owner, and be removed accordingly with care.
B. STORAGE Salvaged items shall be delivered and stored in the Owners designated storage facility. C. EXISTING STRUCTURES After the removal of the items to salvaged, all existing structures shall be demolished or removed. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS Materials not specified to be salvaged shall be disposed of by the Contractor outside the limits of the Owners property to a designated legal dump site. E. UTILITIES Existing utility lines shall be removed to the extent that they encroach into the field of work and wherever necessary, restored to working condition.
SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A.
Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant tools required to complete: > Demolition of existing structures > Removable of salvage materials
> Clearing of shrubs > Disposal of resulting trash, waste, timber stumps, and other vegetation
B.
Do not cut down any trees without the approval of the Architect and the Owner. Secure permit from proper authorities in the transfer and cutting of trees. See drawings for coverage or work involved.
1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Visit the site of the work and examine the premises to fully understand all existing conditions relative to the work. No increase of cost or extension of performance time will be considered for failure to verify and know actual site conditions.
1.03 PERMITS
Secure and pay for all necessary permits needed for the work.
1.04 PROTECTION
Provide adequate measures to protect workmen and passers-by in the areas. Protect adjacent properties and existing facilities on site, persons, shrubs, trees, lawns, structures and utilities therein against harm or damage. Provide surface drainage in a manner to avoid creating nuisance to adjacent areas during the period of construction.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A.
All salvageable materials shall remain the property of the Owner. Hauling and tracking of salvaged material within a 300 meter radius to Owners specified storage shall be for the account of the Contractor. However, upon Owners written instructions, salvageable materials may be disposed of by the Contractor at the Contractors expense.
B.
All debris and other materials resulting from clearing and grubbing work shall be immediately removed from the premises and dumped at sites provided by the Contractor in manner approved by the Architect.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove from existing structures and other obstructions within the building area. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Where existing concrete on ground is to be demolished, remove all existing concrete and other obstructions to a depth of 610 mm (24) below grade. C. Cap all existing utility lines. Consult Owner before commencing work.
3.01 CLEARING AND CRUBBING
A.
Do not uproot or cut down trees unless specifically shown in the plans or as directed by the Architect and / or Owner. Secure permit to cut when necessary.
B. Protect trees indicated in the plans as trees to be preserved. C. Cut down trees in manner to avoid damage to trees to be preserved, prevent injury to structures or minimize danger to traffic. D. Remove tree slumps and roots. Holes left behind shall be filled with suitable material and compacted in accordance with item Section 02200 EARTHWORK. E. Grub up or clear undergrowth, bushes, vegetation rubbish and all objectionable and dispose in accordance with item 210 of this Section.
3.02 REPAIRS:
A.
Repair damage done to existing on-site facilities or to property of any person or persons off the premises by reason of the required work for demolition, clearing and grubbing. All expenses arising from the above scope of work shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
SECTION 02160 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEM
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes, but is not limited to the following:
Shoring and bracing necessary to protect existing building, streets, walkways, utilities, and other improvement and excavation against loss of ground or caving embankments.
Maintenance of shoring and bracing Removal of shoring and bracing, as required.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Layout drawings for excavation support system and other data prepared by or under the supervision of, a qualified engineer. System design and calculations must be acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Supervision: Engage and assign supervision of excavation support system to a qualified professional engineer foundation consultant. 1. Submit name of engaged consultant and qualifying technical experience.
C.
Regulations: jurisdiction.
Comply with codes and ordinances of governing authorities having
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Before starting work, verify governing dimensions and elevations. Verify condition of adjoining properties. Take photographs to record any existing settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and other improvements. Prepare a list of such damages,
verified by dated photographs, and signed by Contractor and others conducting investigation. B. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing qualified professional engineer, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
C.
During excavation, resurvey benchmarks, weekly, maintaining accurate log or surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, or other damage is evident.
A.
Protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity and other utility services and structures.
B. Notify municipal agencies and service utility companies having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements of governing authorities and agencies for protection, relocation, removal, and discontinuing of services.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Refer to Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes
3.0
EXECUTION
3.01 SHORING
A.
Whenever shoring is required, locate the system to clear permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures.
B. Shoring systems retaining earth on which the support or stability of existing structures is dependent must be left in place at completion of work. C. Provide sufficient shoring and soil retention supports to prevent displacement of existing adjacent structures and cave-ins.
3.02 BRACING A. Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction and other permanent work. If necessary to move a brace, install new bracing prior to removal of original brace. B. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Installs internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. E. Remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing in stages to avoid disturbance to underlying soils and damage to structures, pavements, facilities and utilities. F. Repair or replace, as acceptable to Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced through installation or removal of shoring and bracing work.
SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A.
Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools required to complete: Stripping Site Grading Excavation Trenching Earthfilling and Backfilling Compaction Dewatering
B.
See drawings for location and extent of work required.
1.02 VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
Verify and examine the site of work to familiarize with the character of materials to be encountered and all other existing conditions affecting the work.
1.03 PROTECTION
A.
Provide adequate protection measures to protect materials, men and adjoining property.
B. Provide shoring, sheeting, and bracing to prevent caving, erosion or gullying of ides of excavation C. Provide for surface drainage during the period of construction in such manner as to avoid creating a nuisance to adjacent area. Keep all excavation free of water at all times.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Certified Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from an approved Testing Agency before starting work for the following: 1. Fill and backfill tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM D 2487.
2. Granular fill tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM D 2419. B. The Contractor shall submit during construction all required shop drawings such as fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, manufacturers standard drawings and schedules, performance and test data and all other drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment and construction methods required for specific areas of work.
C.
No portion of any work requiring a submission to Owners Engineer for review sha ll be commenced until the submission has been reviewed and approved by Owners engineer and returned to the Contractor. All work shall be in accordance with reviewed documents and samples, and be constructed bearing the Owners Engineers approval.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Assurance: The Contractor shall develop and perform a quality assurance program to ensure proper materials are place and compacted, as well a other requirements are met or exceeded. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. To assure the quality of materials, the Contractor shall retain an approved independent Testing Agency with experience on similar project as Testing Agency for testing and excavation of foundation and other subgrades. C. General Requirements 1. The Contractor shall retain, at his own expense, an approved Testing Agency to perform all tests and submit reports as specified on this Section 2. The approved Testing Agency shall be responsible for conducting the tests, shall state in each report whether or not the testy results indicated conformed with all the requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall specifically note any deviation therefrom. D. Tests: The approved Testing Agency shall perform all tests herein specified and any other additional tests as may be required by the Owners Engineer and submit the test reports directly to the Owners Engineer for evaluation. 1. One Optimum Moisture: Maximum density curve shall be made for each type of soil encountered insubgrades and fills under paved areas and building slabs. Maximum densities shall be determined by ASTM D 1557 and ASTM D 698. The approved testing agency shall test all materials to be incorporated on the project as subgrades and fills (See Section 3, 4, 7)
E. Subgrades and Fill Layers: All subgrades and fill layers shall be tested by the approved Testing Agency before construction of any further work thereon. Tests of the subgrade and fill layers shall be taken as follows: 1. For paved areas and building slab subgrades, perform field density tests on subgrade and each fill layers at rate of one test per 100 square meters of area of overlying building slab and paved area. 2. For the subgrade below each foundations, estimate the soil thickness over dense material; determine and indicate soil type; perform field density tests before and after compaction of the subgrade determine bearing elevation; verify depth of penetration into bearing soils; confirm that subgrade is hand trimmed where required; confirm top surface by subgrade has been compacted Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
to required density; confirm that minimum 500mm thick top soils have been removed before placing the engineer fill. 3. For backfills behind retaining walls, perform field density tests at 15 meters maximum on center elevation to be determined but no greater than one meter vertical and in each of the top three 200 mm fill layers.
4. For backfill over utilities in trenches, perform density tests as indicated for backfill behind walls. 5. Record all above data and determination in a written report to Owners Engineer for evaluation prior to placing of subsequent fill layers. 6. All subgrades must be inspected prior to placing subsequent fill layers. 7. Maintain subgrades until tests have been completed and evaluated by the Owners Engineer. 8. Allow taking and performing 25% additional test as directed by the Owners Engineer. F. The Contractor shall cooperated with the approved Testing Agency in every respect in the performance of the required test. G. When the subgrades or backfills which have been placed are formed to be below the specified density, the Owners Engineer may require additional compaction and testing or complete removal and replacement at the expense of the Contractor.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
In general, the materials to be incorporated in the project shall be free from debris, wood, roots, vegetable, matter refuse, unsound particles, deleterious or objectionable materials. Fill shall be sand, gravel, friable earth or clays of low plasticity, subject to approval of the approved Testing Laboratory. Remove and dispose of top soil to at least 500 mm thickness before filling.
See Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout permanent construction bench marks and other reference points on and off site for horizontal and vertical control. This shall be set up by a registered Geodetic Engineer and carefully checked by Triangulation. A minimum of two (2) such stations shall be provided and all must be mutually visible.
3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
This work consists of the removal of all superficial obstructions including tree, shrubs and the like on the site in the way of or otherwise affected by construction of proposed structures as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall clear each part of the site at times and to the extent required of approved by Owners Engineer. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.
Designated trees, vegetation, rubbish, etc., shall be uprooted or cut down as near as possible to ground level as directed by the Owners Engineer. No items shall be removed without verification in writing from Owners Engineer prior to removal.
2. Stumps, tree roots, undergrowth, bushes, vegetation, logs, branches and the like and rubbish and other objectionable material shall, unless otherwise directed by the Owners Engineer, be grubbed up or cleaned and disposed of a dump site to be provided by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Owners Engineer. 3. All existing topsoil and unsuitable soils for general fills and backfills shall be removed and disposed of the site in dumps to be provided by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Owners Engineer.
3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavation for all works shall be the contour and dimensions indicated. Keep excavations free from water while construction is in progress. Contractor shall construct, as a minimum, temporary drainage trenches to lines and grades specified in the plans and add drainage as may be required by Owner or his Representative. The Contractor shall notify the Owners Engineer immediately in writing in the event that it becomes necessary to remove hard, soft, weak or wet materials to a depth greater than specified. Excavation cut below the depth indicated shall, unless otherwise specified, be refilled with granular fill and be compacted to 100 percent in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Soil disturbed or weakened by the Contractors operations and soil permitted to soften from Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
exposure to weather shall be excavated and refilled with granular fill and be compacted to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. All additional work of this nature will be at the Contractors expense. B. Excavation made below the elevation shown on the drawings or required by the Specification, without written authorization from the Owners Engineer, shall be filled and compacted as hereinafter specified for filling and compaction with no additional payment thereof. C. Excavation for Footings 1. All footing subgrades shall be tested before proceeding with the construction of footings. Bottoms of all footings shall be founded on Geogrid-reinforced Engineered. Fill at elevations as indicated on Drawings and as determined by the Testing Laboratory. Unless otherwise specified, all Building Foundations shall rest on Engineered Fill approximately 1.0m below finished ground line.
2.
Subgrade of all footings shall be level and clean of all loose soil, dirt and debris and free of standing water prior to acceptance for placing concrete.
D. Excavation for Paved Areas and Building Slabs 1. All subgrade shall be reviewed by the Testing Laboratory before proceeding with construction of pavements, slabs, or structural members. The top 300mm of subgrade shall be free of unsuitable materials and be equal to 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 1557, if the subgrade does not meet the requirements, the subgrade shall be compacted by suitable compaction equipment to obtain density required.
2. Excavation made below the elevation shown on the drawings or required by the Specifications, without written authorization from the Owners Engineer, shall be filled and compacted as hereinafter specified for filling and compaction with no additional payment therefor. E. Disposal of Excavated Materials: The following materials shall be disposed offthe site in dumps to be provided by the Contractor. 1. Materials resulting from clearing operations
2. Excavated material which is unsuitable for fill. 3. Stripped topsoil which is not being stockpiled for future work. 4. Excess excavated materials.
3.04 FILLING A. This work shall consist of furnishing, placing, compacting and shaping suitable material of acceptable quality obtained from approved sources in accordance with Specification and to the lines, grades, dimensions and cross sections indicated on the drawings and as required by the Owners Engineer.
B.
Prior to placing of filling materials upon any area, all clearing and grubbing shall have been completed in accordance with Subsection 3.02 and stripping of topsoil, where required, shall have been completed. Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Owners Engineer, the surface of existing ground after excavation shall be compacted to 95% of MDD in the surface with ASTM D 1557 to a depth of 300 mm.
C. For purposes of checking the stability of materials and the efficiency of the equipment and the construction methods which is proposed to be used, the Contractor shall demonstrate trial sections for spreading and compacting filling materials, as directed by the Owners Engineer before commencing the main work of filling construction. Materials for fills shall consist of acceptable materials as specified in Section 2.01 obtained from the required excavation site, or from borrow sources.
D. The Contractor shall carry out full scale compaction trails on areas not less than 10m wide and 50m long, or as directed by the Owners Engineer that all specified requirements regarding compaction can be consistently achieved. Compaction trials with the main types of fill materials to be used shall be completed before work with the corresponding materials will be allowed to commence.
E.
Utilization of Excavated Materials: All suitable materials removed from excavations, including materials from foundation excavation can be used in so far as practicable in the formation of fills and backfilling. Suitable material removed from excavation shall be tested and subject to Owners Engineer review. All excavated unsuitable materials shall be separated from material which is suitable for fill. Material which is suitable for use as fill under slabs and paving and for backfill shall be separated from material which is only suitable for general grading.
F. Placing o Fill: 1. Fill shall be placed in horizontal layers in such manner as to produce a uniform thickness of materials. Placement shall start at the deepest areas and progress approximately parallel to the finished grade except as otherwise specified. Fill shall be constructed to the required grade and shall correspond to the shape of the typical sections shown on the drawings. No fill material shall be placed on area where free water is standing or on surface which have not been tested by the approved Testing Laboratory.
2. The Contractor shall not mix materials of different characteristics and carry out such selection, processing or stockpiling as in necessary. Each layer shall contain only one type of material. 3. Thickness and Grading of Fill: a) Paved Areas: Thickness of layer after compaction shall not exceed 200mm for cohesive soil nor 300mm for cohesionless soils. Fill shall not exceed the subgrade elevation required to accept the full pavement section at the required finished grade nor below the design subgrade elevation.
b) Non-Paved Areas: Fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 300mm to the design subgrade elevations. Fill shall be graded to provide uniform slopes, free of mounds, ridges and depressions which may collect water or impede surface drainage.
G.
Compaction 1. Each layer of fill shall be compacted with acceptable equipment to achieve the specified percentages of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 698 for Buildings and open area and ASTM D 1557 for Roadways and Driveways. A uniform moisture content will be required throughout the layers of fill materials. Wetting and drying manipulation shall be required if necessary to accomplish this. In case of cohesive soil, suspend compaction operations when the moisture varies one than 2% from the maximum moisture content. Compaction operations maybe suspended, when, in the opinion of the Owners Engineer, satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain and other unfavorable field conditions.
AREA
SPECIFICATIONS
MDD%
Under Footings Under Building Slabs on Grade/Pedestrian Areas Under Roadways/Driveways Open Areas
ASTM D 698 ASTM D 698
95% 95%
ASTM D 1557 ASTM D 698
95% 85%
In place density shall be tested by the approved Independent Testing Laboratory using ASTM D 1556 Sand Cone apparatus.
2. Throughout the period when compaction in earthwork is in progress, the Contractor shall adhere to the compaction procedures found from compaction trials to be satisfactory for each material being compacted and for each type of compaction specified. All materials shall be tested and may be reviewed by the Owners Engineer. 3. Compaction or consolidation by soaking or jetting with water are not acceptable alternative methods to utilization of mechanical equipment. H. Moisture Control: 1. Filling and subgrade material which does not contain sufficient moisture shall be sprinkled with water prior to compaction operation in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
2. Filling and subgrade material containing excess moisture shall be required to dry prior to or during compaction to a moisture content not greater than 2% above optimum, except for material which displays pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of loading rubber tired conveyances, the moisture content shall be reduced to optimum if necessary to secure stability. For subgrade material, these requirements for maximum moisture shall apply at the time of compaction of the subgrade. I. Granular Fill for Building Slabs: 1. Clean granular fill shall be provided beneath all concrete building slabs to be place on grade. Fill shall be placed to the depth indicated on the Drawings and shall in no case be less than 100 mm deep. Fill shall be compacted with suitable compacting equipment to key the stone in a firm base and overlay with sand as required to provide a smooth surface to receive the PVC vapor barrier.
J.
Backfilling Against foundation Walls: After completion of foundation walls and removal of forms, the excavation of all trash and debris shall be cleared prior to application of damp proofing or water proofing and placement of backfill. Backfill shall consist of suitable material as specified in Section 2.01, except where drainage fill is required in connection with subsoil drainage systems, and shall be placed and compacted as follows: 1. Backfill under utility service line, walks, paved areas and building slabs shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed 200mm thickness and shall be compacted to 90% of maximum density (minimum).
2. Backfill under areas of general grading shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed 200mm in thickness and shall be compacted to 90% of maximum density (minimum) 3. Backfill against walls shall not be done until completion of the floor slabs and structural members which provide lateral support to these walls. Exercise special care when placing backfill to prevent wedge action, eccentric loadings, or overloading of all structures by equipment used in compaction operation and backfill material and to prevent damaging required, place backfill so as to prevent any damage to the systems. 4. Symmetrical backfill loading shall be maintained and compacted; each layer by hand tampers and other acceptable equipment.
5.
Drainage fill shall be extended from weeps or drains to within 600mm of finish grade, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings, and placed and compacted as necessary to obtain the required densities under paved areas and areas of general grading as specified herein.
K.
Fill under Areas of General Grading: Fill material shall be obtained from the excavation or from approved borrow sources as herein before specified. 1. Fill shall be placed in 200mm layers (maximum) to suitable elevation above subgrade in order to provide for anticipated settlement to required elevation. Each layer shall be compacted in accordance with compaction requirements set forth in Subsection 3.04-G (Compaction).
3.05 STAKES AND BATTER BOARDS A. Stake out building accurately and establish grades. B. Batter boards and reference marks shall be erected at locations where they will not be disturbed during the construction. C. Construct two permanent bench marks of previously known elevations near the site of construction. D. Excavate with proper allowance made for floor slabs, from erection, shoring, drain tile, waterproofing, masonry and adequate space for inspection of foundations.
3.06 DEWATERING A. Control grading around building so that ground is pitched to prevent water from running into excavated areas of buildings or damaging other structures. B. Pump water out of excavated areas throughout the construction period. Water shall not be conducted into adjacent developed property.
3.07 TRENCHING FOR SUB-DRAINAGE
A. Excavate trenches for underground utility systems and drain lines. lamp to provide firm bed trenches for drain lines.
Grade and
B. When rock is encountered, excavate to a depth of 150 mm (6) below the bottom elevation of the pipe and fill with sand and gravel or crushed stones thoroughly compacted before laying pipe.
4.0 SOIL BEARING CAPACITY
4.01 UNCONFIRMED CONDITIONS If during excavation, conditions discovered at the site do not conform to the findings of the SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT submitted by the Soils Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect or his representative, in writing, of such conditions.
4.02 SOILS/STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
The Soils Engineer and the Structural Engineer shall visit the site and make the changes in foundation design, as necessary. Any changes in the foundation design and drawings shall be treated as EXTRA WORK covered under Article 23 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of the Contract.
4.03 WRITTEN NOTICE TO PROCEED The Contractor may proceed with excavation work but foundation forms and reinforcement shall not be installed until after the receipt of written notice to proceed from the Architect.
SECTION 02280 TERMITE PROOFING, BUKBOK PROOFING
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall hire the services of an approved or accredited pesticide company to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, plant, tools, and services to complete the termite and bukbok proofing work hereinafter described of work involved.
1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Visit the site of the work and examine the premises to fully understand all existing conditions relative to the work involved. Prior to soil stripping, excavation or filling, all termite mounds within the area should be demolished, removed and treated. No increase of cost or extension of performance time will be considered for failure to verify and know actual site conditions.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 CHEMICALS AND EUQUIPMENT Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Refer to Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes A. For termite proofing, use only SOILGUARD Termiticide Concentrate
B. For bukbok proofing of kiln-dried wood, use Pentachlorophenol, while for untreated wood, use chemical name accredited and/or acceptable to the Owner and with valid license from the Fertilizer and Pesticide Authority (FPA). C. The pest control Contractor shall submit the specified chemicals in their original manufacturer sealed containers to the Construction Manager for inspection, sampling and safekeeping. Containers with broken seal shall not accepted.
D. Dilution ratings: 1 part SOILGUARD to 75 parts of water 1 part Pentachlorophenol to 100 parts water E. Dilutions shall be done only at the jobsite in the presence of Construction Manager. The strength of the mixture or solutions shall be made uniform by thorough stirring. All solutions prepared for termite proofing shall be used within 24 hours.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTRACTOR LICENSE AND CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENT
A. The pesticide company should have a valid license from the Fertilizer and pesticide Authority of the Department of Agriculture. B. All pesticides shall applied by or under the direct supervision of a certified pesticide applicator.
3.02 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY CONDITIONS
A.
Formulation, treatment, storage and disposal of pesticides shall be in accordance with label directions. Water for formulation shall be drawn only from site/s designated by the Architect, and the filling hose shall be fitted with a backflow preventor meeting local plumbing codes and standards. The filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of the Construction Manager to assure that overflow is prevented.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Termite Control
Application of solution shall be done by means of power sprayers fitted with flow meters for accurate monitoring of actual quantity used. All the time of soil treatment application, the soil shall be preferably in a friable condition with low moisture content to allow uniform distribution of the treatment solution throughout the soil. Do not allow pesticide during or immediately following heavy rains, or when conditions will cause runoff and create an environmental hazard. Cover treated area with waterproof sheeting if concrete is not poured on the same day as the soil treatment. Take precautions to prevent disturbance of pesticide barrier. Before the placement of structural components, re-treat where soil or fill is disturbed after treatment. Apply pesticide prior to placement of gravel base, vapor barrier or waterproof membrane.
1.
Slab on Grade Construction: Establish a horizontal pesticide barrier over areas intended for covering by floors, porches, attached entryways, garages, carports and terraces. Apply treatment solution with a low pressure coarse spray at the rate of four (4) liters per square meter. Apply at the rate of seven (7) liters solution per square meter. If the gravel fill is washed gravel or other coarse material. Establish a continuous chemical barrier in the voids of hollow block foundation or voids of masonry. Apply treatment at the rate of seven (7) liters per three (3) linear meters. Make pesticide band at least 150mm wide with the pesticide evenly distributed throughout. Treat buildings constructed with basement slabs in the same manner.
2. Crawl Space Construction: Establish a vertical pesticide barrier inside of foundation walls, both sides of interior partition wall, around piers, plumbing and roddings and utility conduit. Apply treatment solution by roddings or rodding and trenching the fill at the rate of fifteen (15) liters solution per three (3) linear meters, and 300 mm deep from grade to bottom of foundation. Treat sides of foundation and around all piers and pipes. Make treated barrier of fill at least 150 mm wide with the pesticide evenly distributed throughout.
3. Dry Pipes and Conduits: Establish pesticide barrier on various dry pipes and conduits such as electrical service entrance, raceways, pipe chase, vents. Use powder type termiticide by injecting it inside the pipe. 4. Termite Mounds: Demolish and treat all termite mounds within the property found after construction. B. Bukbok Proofing Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Kiln-dried wood, plywood, tanguile, apitong, cabinets, dividers, and paneling shall be brushed generously with pentachlorophenol before painting or varnishing.
C. Sun-dried Wood Treatment Sun-dried lumber to be used for ceiling joists, runners, nailers, etc. shall be brushed with pentachlorophenol before installation of plywood or ceiling panels.
3.04 ARCHITECTS APPROVAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, a copy of the pest control companys proposal and chemical application, method/procedure including the description of the equipment to be used before the start of work.
3.05 INSPECTION AND TEST
Sampling shall be done only in the presence of the Construction Manager
Amount of sample to be taken, SOILGUARD TC and Pentachlorophenol (from Original Container) 50 cc each.
3.06 CONTRACTORS GUARANTEE
Upon completion of work, as a condition for final acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written guarantee from the pesticide company which shall provide that:
A.
The soil poisoning treatment shall prevent subterranean termites from attacking the building and its contents for a period of not less than five (5) years.
B. The contractor shall thereby warrant all works in pest control; that all materials and workmanship applied under the contract are of good quality in every respect and will remain as such for not less than five (5) years. C. Should there be termite and bukbok infestation within one (1) year period, the Contractor thereby agrees to do all necessary repairs on the damaged portions of the building caused by termite infestation to the satisfaction of the Owner and at the Contractors expense. Re-treatment shall also be done by the Contractor after completion of the repairs and at his expense. Such repairs and corrective works shall be done within five days after a written notice from the Owner has been received by the Contractor.
D.
Should there be infestation within one (1) year period up until the five (5) years guarantee, the pesticide company agrees to do all the necessary repairs at their expense. The pesticide company shall conduct annual inspection of the building and the surroundings to check any infestation during the guarantee period. Notice shall be given by the pesticide company to the Owner in case there is presence of termites in the surroundings.
SECTION 02400 SITE DRAINAGE
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools required to complete the storm drainage system external to the building
1.02 PROTECTION
Protect materials from loss, injury or defacement. Lost or damaged materials shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
2.0 PRODUCT
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate trenches for all underground pipe lines to require depths, slop and grades
B. Rest pipes on well-tamped solid bedding along its entire length. C. Lay water and sewer pipes in separate trenches D. See SECTION 02200: EARTHWORK, ITEM 3.06 Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.02 BACKFILLING
A.
Pipe lines shall be tested by Contractor and by Owners representative prior to backfilling.
B. Clean and free all excavation from trash and debris. C. Backfill shall consist of same material excavated or other approved materials. Free backfill of debris and big stones. Place backfill in horizontal layers not exceeding 300 mm (12) or as indicated or directed. D. Carefully place and tamp backfill under and around pipe barrel in such manner so as not to disturb pipe line and joints. E. Properly moisten each backfill layer and compact by hand or machine to an optimum density that will present excessive settlement and shrinkage.
SECTION 02500 ROADS AND PARKING Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant and tools required to complete B. driveways roadways parking
See drawings for location and extent of work
C. Related works specified elsewhere. See Division 3 CONCRETE
1.02 PROTECTION
Protect all materials from dirt and all injurious substances that may affect the strength of concrete and cement.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Refer to Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.
Prior to commencing the preparation of the subgrade complete all installations of subdrainage lines, manholes and catch basins and all other utilities underneath the subgrade, including their fully compacted backfill.
B. Compact all materials immediately below subgrade level on embankment to a depth of 150 mm (6), or to such greater depth as may be specified, in accordance to the requirements of AASHTO T-180 Method D.
3.02 BASE COURSE
A.
Placing and Spreading of Base Course. The sub-base and/or base material shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 200 mm, (8), moisture conditioned as necessary and compacted to a minimum of 95% of its maximum dry density.
B. Rolling Base Course: 1. Immediately following spreading, compact materials to the fully by rolling with a 3 wheeled or tandem roller weighing at least 8 tons or with a multiple wheeled rubber tired roller loaded as directed to give satisfactory compaction.
2. Progress rolling gradually from the sides to the center, parallel with the centerline of the road and it shall continue until compaction is satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. After rolling all the base course materials blade or smoothen the surface. Blade and roll alternately as required or directed to maintain a smooth, even surface. 4. Machine tamp base course materials along curbs, headers or walls and at all places not accessible to the rollers. 5. Sprinkle all layers of base course materials with water during rolling, tamping and blading. C. Spreading of Choker Aggregate: 1. After final rolling of base course aggregates, evenly spread choker aggregates over the surface until the voids are filled to within approximately 10 mm of the surface, and if possible, the surface shall be broomed with push brooms or diagonal brooms. Continue to spread, broom and roll until a smooth surface is obtained.
3.03 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A.
See DIVISION 3 CONCRETE for concrete proportions and consistency, from works, methods of placing concrete, compaction, finishing and curing concrete.
B. JOINTS: 1. WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS
With the use of a power driven saw, cut a groove in the pavement, al locations shown in the Plans, to a minimum depth of 50 mm, and a maximum width of 5 mm, within 24 hours after the concrete was placed. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2. TRANSVERSE EXPANSION JOINTS Use pre-molded expansion joint fillers for transverse expansion joints as detailed an shown in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. C. SURFACE FINISHING Finish the pavement surface to the required roughness by passing over the concrete a drag of one or two burlap cloths or by other approved means D. CURING AND PROTECTION Immediately after the finishing operations, exposed concrete surfaces shall be cured by one of the following methods as the Contractor may elect. 1. Mat Method. The entire exposed surface shall be covered with two or more layers of burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 150 mm (6). The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days. 2. Impervious Sheeting Methods. The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting metal. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 300 mm (12) when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing medium shall not be less than 450 mm (18) wider than the concrete surface to be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or by placing a bank of moist earth along edges, and laps in the sheets. Sheets shall be satisfactory repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days. 3. Membrane-Curing Method: the entire exposed surface shall be covered with a membrane-forming curing compound. Where type 1 curing compound is used, the concrete surface shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun for a period of 3 days immediately after spraying. Curing compound shall be applies in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet per gallon for both coats. The second coat shall be applied in the direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional coat to all surfaces showing discontinuity, pinholes or other defects. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
has been applied shall be re-sprayed by the above method and at the above coverage at no additional cost to the Owner. Expansion-joint openings shall be sealed at the top by inserting moistened paper or fiber rope or covering with strips of waterproof paper prior to application of the curing compound, in a manner to prevent the curing compound entering the joint. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for 7 days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action that might disrupt the continuity of the membrane. Any area covered with curing compound and damaged by subsequent construction operations within the 7-days curing period shall be re-sprayed as specified above at no additional expense to the Owner. E. OPENING TO TRAFFIC Preclude any or all kinds of traffic over the concrete pavement for a period of 10 days or longer if the Engineer deems it necessary to extend this time. Maintain satisfactory barricades to exclude all traffic on the pavement. Repair of damage to the pavement due to traffic is at the expense of the Contractor.
SECTION 02520 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTER AND PAVED WALKS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A.
Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant and tools required to complete concrete curbs gutters paved walks and other concrete pavements
B.
See drawings for location and extent of work.
C. Related works specified elsewhere. See DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
1.02 PROTECTION
Protect all materials from dirt and all injurious substances that may affect the strength of concrete and cement.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Proof-roll prepared sub-base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous
progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances.
1.
Top of Forms: Not more than 3mm in 3.00 n (1/8 inch in 10 feet).
2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 6mm in 3.00 m (1/4 inch in 10 feet). C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institutes recommended practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars for placing and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in eight director. E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.
3.04 JOINTS
A.
General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface place of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before development of random contraction cracks. 3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each joint edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. debris.
Clean groove of loose
C.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated. 3. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 4. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Extend joints fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3. Furnish joint fillers in on-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever is possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint fillers sections together. 4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in Division 7 Section Paving Joint Sealants
F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. C. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 1. When concrete placing is interrupted for than hour, place a construction joint
E. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels of hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. G. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats and darbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off and screed. 1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to Architect. I. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
J.
K. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist: Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
2. For spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish.
2.
Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating surface 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line traffic.
B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to 10mm (3/8 inch) radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold and hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturers instru ctions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials: a. Water b. Continuous water-for spray c. Adsorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturers directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.08 TRAFFIC PAINT Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A.
Traffic Paint: Apply traffic paint for stripping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturers recommended rates to provide a 15-mil minimum wet film thickness.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A.
Employ a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement as follows:
B. The Owner will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following:
1.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each days pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes
b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each days pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
c.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each days pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. Yd. but less than 25 cu. Yd. plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing is required. 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. When total quantity is given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. 4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, other nondestructive devise may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump. Air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section. B. Drill test where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill dried core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, plant, tools, required to complete: All cast in place concrete form work.
B. All work shall be done in accordance with the minimum requirements of the AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE CODE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE ACI 381 except as modified herein. C. Refer to the General Conditions for all pertinent provisions Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings of formwork when required by the Architect shall be submitted for approval before fabrication and erection of such formwork.
1.03 APPROVAL All form materials are subject to approval before fabrication of formworks.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide adequately braced forms that will produce correctly aligned concrete, able to meet the specific weights and side pressure of newly placed concrete. B. Choose form fittings that are adequate to the purpose. C. Exercise care in the choice of surface forms and form fittings that will be in contact with concrete
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A.
Check all forms to conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of members as called for in the plans.
B. Check all formwork for plumbness and correct alignment.
C. Provide openings in column forms for cleaning and inspection preferably at lowest points of pour lifts. D. Provide camber for cantilever and long spans or as indicated in construction notes. E. Coat all forms with ECO MR AB, by Econtech, before reinforcement is placed. Remove all surplus coats on form surfaces.
3.02 FORM AND SHORING
A. Removal 1. Remove forms only upon arrival of the Engineer in such manner and at such time as to insure the complete safety of the structure. In no case shall the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
supporting forms and shorings be removed until the members have attained sufficient strength to support their weight and load there on. 2. Exercise due care while stripping forms and protect corners subsequently against chipping or other damage by approved means. 3. The results of suitable control tests shall be used as evidence that the concrete has attained sufficient strength to permit removal of shorings and supporting forms. Cylinders required for control tests shall be made in addition to those required by this Specification.
3.03 TOLERANCE LIMITS
A. Set and maintain concrete forms as to insure completed work within the following tolerance limits: 1. Variation from the plumb a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and rises: In 3.00 m (10) . 6 mm (1/4) In any storey or 6.00 m (20) max ..10mm (3/8) b. For exposed corner columns, control joints, grooves and other conspicuous lines: In any way 6.00 m (20) max 6mm (1/4) In 12.00 m (40) or more ..10mm (3/8) 2. Variation from the level or form the grades indicated on the drawings: a. In floor (below removal of forms), ceiling beams, soffits and rises, In 3.00 m (10) 6mm (1/4) In any way or 6.00 m (20) max .10mm (3/8) In 12.00 m (40) or more .10mm (3/8) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
b. For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: In any way of 6.00 m (20) max.. 6mm (1/4) In 12.00 m (40) or more 10mm (3/8) 3. Variation of the linear building lines from the established position plan and related position columns, walls and partitions: In any way or 6.00 m (20) max .. 6mm (1/4) In 12.00 m (40) or more .25mm )1)
4. Variation in the sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings and in thickness of slabs and wall, Openings . 6mm (1/4) 5. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls: Minus .6mm (1/4) Plus ..12mm (1/2) 6. Footings a. Variation of dimensions in Plan Minus 12mm (1/2) Plus 50mm (2) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
(applies to concrete only and not to reinforcing bars and dowels). b. Misplacement of eccentricity, 5% of specified thickness. 7. Variation in steps: a. In a flight of steps: Rise 3mm (1/8) Tread ..6mm (1/4) b. In consecutive steps: Rise .2mm (1/16) Tread ..3mm (1/8)
Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.75" Formatted: Font: Bold
SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools required to complete: steel reinforcing bars bar supports and dowels reinforcement accessories
B. All pertinent provisions of the General Conditions form part of this section
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings of each reinforcing steel detail and placement drawings shall be submitted for approval in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITONS. Any material fabricated before final approval of the shop drawings will be done at Contractors risk, but no material shall be placed until shop drawings have final approval. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures: (ACI 315).
1.03 PROECTION AND STORAGE
Protect steel reinforcement adequately from using. Store reinforcing steel on supports, above ground/floor level. Store under cover. Keep cover with tarpaulins, of required, due to a delay in use.
1.04 TESTING
Tests shall conform to ASTM Designations of specified materials. Samples for testing shall be provided by the Contractor without additional costs to the Owner. Expenses for testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Copies of the results shall be furnished to the Owner and the Architect promptly. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
For deduction or addition in the contract sum due to deletion or extra work involve, the steel reinforcement shall be measured by weight either in kilograms or in tons. The Contractor shall be paid based on the steel weight as per prices submitted on the proposal form. Steel bars that are not installed shall not be paid by the Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Before placing reinforcement and before pouring of concrete, remove all loose rust, mill scale, oil or other adhering materials which tend to reduce or destroy bond between concrete and reinforcement. B. All bars shall be bent cold. Bends of strirrups and ties shall be made around pins with a diameter of a least twice the thickness of the bars; bars 25 mm (1) and smaller, six (6) times the thickness; for larger bars, eight (8) times the thickness.
3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Metal Reinforcement 1. Placing shall be in accordance with the Plans furnished. Refer to the Engineer in case of doubt in placing of steel. 2. Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and adequately secured with concrete metal wires, metal chair spacer ties or other accessories. 3. Wire mesh reinforcement where shown in slabs shall be secured in position by spacer bars and chairs. Spacer bars shall be lapped not less than 15 mm (5). In slabs on ground, precast concrete blocks may be substituted for chairs. B. Bar Spacing Spacing of bars shall be done in accordance with the ACI-Building Code or as follows: 1. Clear distance between parallel bars shall be one and one-half (1-1/2) times the diameter of the bars. 2. Clear distance shall not be less than 1-1/3 times the maximum size of aggregates, nor less than 25 mm (1) 3. Where bars are used in two or more layers, the bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above those in the lower layers at a clear distance of not less than 25 mm (1). Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.03 OFFSET AND SPLICE IN REINFORCEMENT
A. Splices 1. Generally, avoid splices in slabs, beams and girders at points of maximum stress. Splices may be allowed only upon written approval of splice details by the Architect / Engineer or as shown or noted in the Plans.
2. Splice in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum distance for forty (40) bar diameters. B. Offsets: Where changes in cross section of columns occur, longitudinal bars shall be offset in a region where lateral support is afforded. Where offset, the slope of the included portion shall not be more than one on six (1:6) and in case of tied columns, the ties shall be spaced 75mm (3) on center for a distance of 300 mm (1) below and above the point of offset.
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.0 GENERAL Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete: proportioning mixing placement curing and finishing of concrete
B. All pertinent provisions of the General Conditions form part of this Section.
1.02 PROTECTION & STORAGE
A. Cement store in dry, water tight, properly ventilated structure B. Aggregate prevent from inclusion of foreign matter. Maintain storage piles in a manner that will afford good drainage. Prevent segregation of particle size. C. Admixrtures store to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matters.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete Mix Design Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Samples Submit samples of cement and aggregates proposed for exposed architectural concrete work for approval, giving names, sources and descriptions of the materials. C. Reports Submit 5 copies of mix design and test results D. Notification Submit schedule of pours and location at least 7 days prior to date of pouring for approval.
1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
For deduction or addition on the contract sun due to deletion or extra work involved, measure cast-in-place concrete in cubic meter and base payment on the actual poured volume using the units prices on the proposal form.
1.05 DESIGN STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
All strengths of concrete shall be as indicated on the Structural Design Criteria / Construction Notes.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
2.02 METHOD OF DETERMINING CONCRETE STRENGTH AND PROPORTIONS
Submit mix design obtained from samples made in accordance with STANDARD METHOD OF MAKING AND CURING CONCRETE COMPRESSION AND FLEXURE SPECIMEN (ASTM Designation C192) and STANDARD METHODS OF TEST COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MOLDED CONCRETE CYLINDERS (ASTM Designation C-39) for each strength required stating the proposed slump and proportional weights of cement, saturated surface dry aggregates and water. These mixes shall be proved by preliminary tests 30 days before concreting and shall show a 28-day strength of 15 percent higher than the ultimate required. No substitution shall be made in the materials or mix with additional tests to show that the quality of concrete is satisfactory.
2.03 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS AND CONSISTENCY
A. Cement and Aggregate
Make proportions so as to produce a concrete mixture which will work readily into corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement with the method of placing materials to avoid segregation of accumulation of excess free water on the surface. B. Measurement 1. Measure concrete materials such that the proportions can be accurately controlled and easily checked at any time during work. 2. Conform measurement of materials for ready mixed concrete to STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR READY MIXED CONCRETE. ASTM Designation C-94, where applicable. 3. Never exceed the water content by U.S. gallons per bag of cement for all portions in the structure. Allow job mix adjustment of water content only on permission of the Architect / Engineer provided that cement is also added to keep the original water-cement ration of the design mix. Limit slumps to the following.
SLUMP TEST VALUES
Structural Element
Slump for vibrated concrete Minimum Maximum
Walls, columns, and grade beams, 250 mm max. thickness Other components
75 mm 50 mm
100 mm 55 mm
2.04 MIXING CONCRETE
A. No hand mixing shall be allowed except in case of emergency such as mixer breakdown during pouring operations and shall stop at the first allowed construction joint. All concrete shall be machine mixed for a least 1-1/2 minutes after all materials including water are in the mixing drum. B. Let the mixer be of an approved size and type which will ensure a uniform distribution of material throughout the mass. Equip it with a DEVICE FOR ACCURATELY MEASURING, TIMING AND CONTROLLING THE AMOUNT OF MIXING WATER IN EACH BATCH and operate in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. C. Place material in mixer in such a way that first batch of concrete materials shall contain sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum without reducing the cement content of the mix to be discharged. D. Never permit re-tempering of concrete.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATIONS
A. Inspect and clean all forms and check all installations before placing concrete. B. Wet surfaces thoroughly and grout before placing concrete. C. Clean all laitance from previous pouring and possibly expose aggregates before renewing pouring. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.02 DEPOSITING CONCRETE
A. Do not start placing of concrete until the forms and reinforcing for the whole unit to be poured have been completed, cleaned, inspected and approved. B. Do depositing without segregation, re-handling or flowing of concrete. Do it with the use of buggies, buckets or wheelbarrow. Never allow use of chutes except to transfer concrete from hoppers to buggies, wheelbarrow or buckets in which case shall not exceed 6.00 m (20) in aggregate length. C. In placing concrete, never let it drop freely for a height exceeding 1.5 m (5). D. Keep conveyors full of concrete and keep ends buried in the newly placed concrete as pouring progresses. E. Never allow placing of concrete without vibrations. vibration. Avoid segregation due to over
F.
Construction Joints 1. If possible, do concreting continuously, until section is complete. When stoppage of concrete operations occur, place construction joints either horizontally or vertically as indicated by the Engineer and be provided with shear keys and dowels to develop bond. 2. Roughen and clean construction joints. Just before placing of concrete, wet and slush with cement mortar. 3. Consult drawings and / or Engineer as to the details of contraction joints.
3.03 CURING CONCRETE
A. Finished Surface 1. Keep concrete continuously wet or moist for at least one week after placing. 2. Begin curing as soon as concrete has attained initial set. 3. Spray floors and vertical surface with an approved curing compound. B. Use curing additives for a minimum of 48 hours.
3.04 REPAIR OF CONCRETE
A. Imperfections: 1. Complete repair within 24 hours after removal of forms. 2. Remove fins neatly from exposed surfaces. 3. Remove damaged or honeycombed concrete and replace with drypack, rich mortar or concrete with pea gravel to produce a sound one. B. Large Bulges Remove large bulges and abrupt irregularities by bushing, hammering and grinding. C. Drypack Filling 1. Use for holes having at least one surface dimension less than the depth of the hole. 2. Fill with drypack holes left by the removal of fasteners from the ends of the rods; for grout and pipes recess; and for narrow slots cut for repair of cracks. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3. Never use drypack for filling behind reinforcement and for filling holes that extend completely through the concrete. D. Use mortar filling shall be under impact of mortar gun as drypack filling for holes too shallow for concrete filling and these holes should be no deeper than the far side of the reinforcement nearest the surface. E. Concrete filling shall be used for holes extending entirely through the concrete for holes which are greater in are then 1,000 square centimeters and deeper than 10 centimeters and for holes in reinforced concrete which are greater in area than 500 square centimeters and which extend beyond reinforcement. F. All materials, procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete shall be as directed by the Architect / Engineer. G. Filling shall be bonded tightly to the surfaces of the holes and shall be sound and free from shrinkage, cracks and drumy areas, after the fillings have been cured and dried.
H. The cost of all materials, labor and equipment used in the repair of all materials shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.05 FLOOR FINISH ELEVATIONS
Floor finish elevations shall be noted carefully by the Contractor. Prepare slabs suitable in surface and elevation to receive finishes. Consult Division 9 Finishes and its application.
3.06 TEST OF CONCRETE
A number of tests on concrete are required during the progress of the work. At least four cylindrical specimens shall be made for each test of which two shall be made for each days concreting. Samples shall be secured and molded in accordance with ASTM Specification C172 and C31. The Contractor shall provide the samples to be taken at the place of deposit as directed by the Engineer without cost to the Owner. Testing of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. The average strength of test samples representing each class of concrete shall be equal to or greater than the specified strength and not more than one test in ten shall have an average value less than 90% of the specified strength. Where tests fail to give the required strength, the Owner shall have the right to order a change in the proportions of the concrete or in the procedure of curing for the rest of the structure.
3.07 FAILURE OF TEST SAMPLES
In any case of failure to meet specified strength, the Contractor may, at his expense, obtain concrete core samples from the poured concrete and have their compressive strength determined by a competent testing authority which shall be taken as a conclusive evidence of its strength and integrity, provided the curing will not impair the safety of the structure and can be satisfactorily replaced. To determine adequacy of the structure, the Owner shall have the option to order load tests on parts of the structure where concrete strength tests are below 80% of those specified. These tests are to be done in accordance to ACI 318-89 recommendations and the cost are to be borne by the Contractor. Demolition and concrete replacement, if recommended by the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.08. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO MEET CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
For strength to concrete obtained on molded or drilled test specimen less than those required on Article 3.06, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty or forfeiture. The following are the percentages of the proposed unit prices per cubic meter for the quantity of concrete directly and indirectly affected by the failure to meet strength requirements regardless of whether or not analyses of test results show that the concrete in place can still safely carry the design loads:
A. For concrete less than one hundred percent (100%) but greater than ninety-two percent (92%) of specified strength, payment of thirty percent (30%) of the cost per cubic meter of concrete. B. For concrete equal to or less than ninety-two (92%) but greater than eighty-five percent (85%) of the specified strengths, payment of sixty-five percent (65%) of the cost per cubic meter of concrete. C. For concrete equal or less than eighty-five percent (85%) of the specified strengths, removal of the concrete deposited and its replacement at the expense of the Contractor.
3.09 INPSECTION
Concrete shall be proportioned, mixed and placed only in the presence of the Architect / Engineer. The Architect / Engineer shall be notified in advance to provide ample time for inspection of reinforcing steel bars before any mixing and placing of concrete is commenced. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
DIVISION 04 MANSONRY
SECTION 04100 MORTAR
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete plaster masonry work and patching mortar as shown in the drawings and specified in the Summary of Materials and Finishes herewith. B. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified herein, all materials or work under the division shall be subject to the provisions under Division 3 CONCRETE
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
2.02 MIXES
Cement Mortar: 1 part Portland Cement 2 parts sand, but not more than 1 part Portland Cement, 3 parts sand.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Application of Cement Plaster 1. Scratch Coat: Apply with sufficient force and material to form full keys or bond. Cross scratch as soon as scratch coat has attained initial set and apply brown coat as soon as practicable. 2. Brown Coat: Scratch or broom for bond of finish coat and allow to set hard. Keep brown coat moist until finish coat is applied.
3. Finish Coat: Bring to true even surfaces with rods and trowel smooth, leaving finished surface free from tool marks and blemishes. Keep cement plaster moist for at least 3 days and protect against rapid drying until cured. B. Application of masonry mortar Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Lay all concrete hollow blocks with 10mm (3/8) horizontal ad vertical mortar joi nts. C. Application of patching mortar 1. Provide the same mixture of gray and white cement for patching mortar and used to fill holes and imperfections, but should be richer mixture and the cement and sand proportions should be the same as those use in the concrete. 2. Never steel trowel patches, but finish with wood or cork floats. 3. Allowing the mixed patching mortar to stand for an hour or two before using it, reduces the amount of shrinkage, but never add water in remixing it. 4. No cement dusting is allowed to hasten any phase of surface for floors and wall finishing.
SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete concrete unit masonry
1.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Handle in a manner to prevent undue chipping and breakage B. Protect storage piles, stacks, and bins from heavy traffic. C. Provide platforms to protect bottom piles from contact with soil.
1.03 VISUAL INSPECTION
A. All units shall be sound and free from cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction.
B. Units that are intended to serve as a base for plaster shall have sufficiently rough surface to afford good bond.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. Lay all masonry unit, plumb, true to line, level and with accurately spaced course. B. Let the Architect approve sample of special stone arrangement where required. C. Keep bond plumb throughout. Keep corners and reveals plumb and true. D. Build in anchors, wall plugs and accessories to masonry as erection progresses. E. Bed solidly each course in Portland Cement mortar. Keep all units damp when laid. F. Wedge units terminating against beam or slab soffits tightly with mortar and reinforcement properly secured to dowels. G. Consult drawings as to the schedule of reinforcements. H. Masonry joints
1. Unless otherwise specified or detailed on plans, make horizontal and vertical mortar joints 10 mm (3/8 with full mortar coverage on the face shells and on the webs. Fill surrounding cells. 2. Fill all joints solidly. 3. Do not permit furrowing of the mortar I. Tolled joints 1. Use concave joints where tooled mortar joints is called for in the drawings. 2. Joints must be neat and clean, plumb and true to line.
3.02 UNFINISHED WORK
A. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. B. Before new work is started, remove all loose mortar and wet the exposed joint thoroughly not less than one house before laying new work.
3.03 CLEANING Wash finished surface in a manner most appropriate and satisfactory to the Architect. No cement dusting is permitted for any cement finish.
DIVISION 05 METALS
SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor equipment, plant, tools, required to complete fabrication and erection of all structural steel and miscellaneous steel items including structural steel trusses structural frames and members connection system
B. Where so indicated on the plans, structural members shall be joined by welding. The welds shall be of size and type indicated and shall be made by competent operations.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITY
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate location of all steel work including all items used to attach materials to other parts of the work. B. Contractor shall see to it that any and all items of work are to be built into the works of other trades are installed at the proper time. C. Contractor shall notify the Architect / Engineer if the steel work shall be fabricated in a shop other than the site, so that arrangements can be made together with the Project Representative in the inspection of the delivered materials and in the fabrication of the steel work. D. Where specified steel sizes and thickness are found unavailable in market, all affected items shall be upgraded to next higher level of size and thickness.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. In accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions, furnish complete detailed fabrication and erection shop drawings including details of all connections for review and approval of the Engineer. 2. The Engineer will review and approve all shop drawings. Re-submit if any corrections are required. B. Samples Submit to the Architect / Engineer 3 sets of specimen samples of all structural steel materials to be used for approval.
1.04 DELIVERY
Shipping statements shall be delivered in the jobsite. The Project Representative and the Engineer shall inspect the materials per delivery and may request additional test on the materials delivered, if in their opinion, there is reasonable doubt as to the materials specification. The fabrication and delivery of the fabricated structural steel should conform to the approved schedule of erection and items such as anchor bolts, anchorage and others that have to be placed in concrete which shall be in jobsite before such concrete structural member will be poured. Erection marks shall be painted on structural steel members and fabricated sections. Small structural members such as rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc, should be shipped and kept in properly marked suitable container.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Refer to Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes A. Conform all materials and workmanship to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings as amended to date or as may be specifically modified by the drawings or by these Specifications. B. Conform structural steel planes and shapes to ASTM Designation A36 with specified yield point of 248 Mpa (3600 psi) C. Conform cold-formed steel to ASTM 611 with specified yield point of 228 Mpa (33,000 psi) D. Conform welding electrodes for manual shielded metal arc welding to E70 series of ASTM Specification A233 and AWS Specification A5.1 and A5.5. E. Conform anchor bolts to the Specification of High Strength Bolts ASTM A 325, Type 1 or 2 F. Conform common bolts to the Specification for Low Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. ASTM 307 G. Conform non-shrink grout to ASTM C827. Grout shall be non-metallic H. Use only approved brand of red lead paint and linseed oil for all shop painting for structural steel. For field painting, use on approved brand of enamel paint.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 WLEDING TECHNIQUE
A. Conform the technique of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made, the methods used in correcting defective work to the requirements of the Standard Code for Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Make surfaces to be welded free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foregoing material expect that mill scale which withstands vigorous wire brushing remain. C. Prepare edges by gas-cutting, whenever practicable, cut by a mechanically guided torch. D. Let gas cut edge by which will be subjected to substantial stress or which are have to weld metal deposited on them be free from gouges. Remove by grinding any gouges that remain from cutting. E. Shape all re-entrant corners notch free to a radius of at least 12 mm (1/2). F. Bring in to a close contact as practicable parts to be fillet welded and in no event separate by more than 4.76 mm (3/16). If the separation is 1.58 (1/16) or greater, increase the size of the fillet welds the amount of the separation. G. Never exceed the separation between laying surfaces of lap joints and butt joints on a backing structure of 1.58 mm (1/16) H. Bring the fit of joints at contact surfaces which are not completely sealed by welds, close enough to exclude water after painting. I. Align all abutting parts to be welded carefully. Correct misalignments greater than 3 mm (1/8) and in making the correction, never draw parts into a slope sharper than two (2) degrees (7/16 inch in 12 inches). Position the work for flat welding whenever practicable.
J.
K. In assembling and joining parts of structure or of built-up members, avoid needless distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses. Where it is impossible to avoid high residual stresses in the closing welds of a rigid assembly, make closing welds in compression elements. L. In the fabrication of cover plated beams and build-up members, make all shop splices in each component part before such component part is welded to other parts of the member. M. Let all complete penetration butt welds made by manual welding except when produced with the aid of backing material or welded in the flat position from both sides in square-edge material not more than 5/16 inch thick with opening not less than one half the thickness of the thinner part joined, have the root of the initial layer gouged out on the back side before welding is started on that side. Weld so an to secure sound metal and complete fusion throughout the entire cross-section. Butt welds made with the use of backing of the same material as the base metal, shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused with the backing material. N. Backing strips may be removed by gouging or gas cuttings after welding is completed, provided no injury is done to the base metal and weld metal. Weld metal surface is left flush or slightly convex with full throat thickness. O. Terminate butt welds at the ends of a joint in a manner that will ensure soundness. Where possible, do by the use of extension bars or run-off plates. Remove extension bars or run-off plates upon completion of the weld. Make the ends of the weld smooth and flushed with abutting parts.
3.02 BOLTS
A. Tighten all bolts to a bolt tension not less than the proof load given in the applicable ASTM Specification for the type of the bold used.
B. Do tightening with properly calibrated wrenches or by the turn-of nut method. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
C. Let completed member be free from twist, bends and open joints. Sharp or bends shall be the cause of rejection of materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES A. Let all structural members of single rolled shape and built-up members fabricated by riveting or welding, unless otherwise specified, be straight within the tolerances allowed by ASTM Specification. B. Never let compression members deviate from straightness by more than 1/100 of the axial length between points which are to be laterally supported. C. Let completed members be free from twist, bends and open joints. Sharp kinks or bends shall be the cause of rejection of materials.
3.04 SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean all steel work for painting by hardware brushing or other methods chosen by the fabricator for cleaning loose mill scale, loose, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, dirt and other foreign matter after inspection, approval and before leaving the shop. B. Give steel work, except those to be encased in concrete, one coat of shop paint. C. Remove oil and grease deposits by solvent. D. Do not paint all steel work that is to be encased in concrete. Clean oil or grease with solvent cleaners. Remove dirt and foreign materials by thorough sweeping with fiber brush.
3.05 FIELD PAINTING
A. For convenience, all steel works shall receive final painting on the ground before erection on a higher level. Connections made on the field by bolting or welding shall receive another coat of enamel paint. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. All steel work connections shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, weld slag and other foreign matter.
3.06 INSPECTIONS
A. Subject all material and workmanship at all times to the inspection of the Architect and/or Engineer at the place of fabrication and to all places of work. B. Inspection of welding shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 6 of the Standard Code for Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society. C. Non-destructive tests shall be used, to determine the distribution of weld defects. Al least two (2) tests per truss is required. Use radiographic or ultrasonic inspection. D. All expenses for testing shall be borne by the Contractor
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Mark to identify the ASTM Specifications of steel for main components. B. Identify such steel in completed members or assemblies by painting the designation of the piece over any shop coat of paint, prior to shipment from fabricators plant.
3.08 ERECTION
A. General The Contractor shall use special care in unloading, handling and erecting the steel to avoid bending, twisting or otherwise distorting the steel Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
members. The erector shall handle the materials in such a way as to minimize the damage to the shop coat of paint. The Contractor shall plan and execute the erection in such a way so that the close fit and neat appearance of the joints and the structure, as whole will not be impaired. If temporary braces or erection slips are employed, care shall be taken to avoid any unsightliness upon removal. Tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal or body solder and smoothed by grinding of filling. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect or Engineer the sequence of erection for approval. B. Bracing: The frame of the steel roof framing shall be carried up true and plumb and temporary bracing shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including equipment and the operation of the same. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety. Wherever piles of materials, erection equipment or other loads are varied during erection, proper provisions shall be made to take care of stresses resulting from such loads, As erection progresses, the work shall securely be bolted, or welded, to take care of all dead load, wind and properly aligned. C. Alignment: No riveting, permanent bolting or permanent welding shall be done until the structure has stiffened with the resulting stresses and properly aligned. D. Field Welding: Any shop paint on surface adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed, to reduce the paint film to a minimum. E. Inspection To ensure structural stability of installed steel roof structure, such work shall be subject to test by inspection specialist to be hired by Contractor.
3.09 WORKMASHIP
Structural steel truss members shall be aligned, plumbed, straight in fabrication, welding and installation.
The structural steel shall be fabricated, handled and crated as per specifications and in conformity with the American Institute of Steel Construction Specification for the design, fabrication and erection of the structural steel for buildings.
3.10 FIELD PAINTING
After erection, all unpainted areas including any marred or damaged surfaces shall receive one coat of same rust inhibiting paint as used in the shop painting.
SECTION 05200 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete all works which include galvanized iron work steel grille work brass work
B. See drawings for sizes, details and location of work required.
1.02 MEASUREMENTS AND COORDINATION
Obtain measurements for all work required to be accurately fitted at the job and not from the drawings. The Contractor will be responsible for the accuracy of all such measurements and the precise and assembly of the finish products. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades to prevent interference. Verify conditions at the job before fabrication.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Make all works well formed to shape and size shown and assemble as detailed. Methods of fabrication and assembly however, unless otherwise specifically stated, Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
shall be of first quality craftsmanship and at the discretion of the Contractors whose responsibility shall be to guarantee satisfactory performance as herein specified. B. Cut, shear and punch to produce clean, true lines and surfaces with burrs removed. C. Weld or bolt connections as indicated. Use countersunk screws recessed work where possible. Make all details of assembly strong with sufficient stiffness. Form joint exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. D. Provide all work with proper clearances. Fabricate and install in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction but will insure rigidly and provide close fitting of sections. E. Fabricate and install as directed by the Manufacturer. F. Provide a protective clear coating which is resistant to alkaline, mortar and plaster to be applied to aluminum sections after fabrication.
3.02 PROTECTION
Protect all finished work until turnover to the Owner.
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete: Wooden framing related rough carpentry work
B. Include in the works, nailing, strips, scaffoldings, plates, straps, joists, hangers, rods, dowels, hardware, fasteners and other miscellaneous iron and steel items pertinent to rough carpentry work.
1.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Stack framing lumber to insure against deformation and maintain proper ventilation. B. Protect lumber from elements C. Lumber in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated with two (2) coats of asphalt applied hot. D. Temporary Protection: 1. Provide and maintain temporary protection of the work as required to safeguard complete or partially completed work during the progress of the construction. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2. Provide all the necessary rough bars stairs, ladders, runaways for convenient access to all parts of the building until other permanent facilities are in place.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER
A. Moisture Content Not to exceed 18 percent B. Grade and Trade Mark Required on each piece of lumber. All lumber, excluding scaffoldings, to be pressure treated, conforming to 67% stress grade lumber in accordance to the requirements of the Philippines National Building Code, latest edition. C. For K.D. Tanguile plywood inner sides, and cut ends of Apitong framings, supplementary termite and not treatment to be applied by Owner accredited termite and pest control company. D. Refer to the Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes.
2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF LUMBER
Any lumber equally good for the purpose intended may be substituted for kinds specified, provided, however, the substitution needs to be authorized in writing by the Architect.
2.03 ROUGH HARDWARE AND METAL FASTENERS
Plates, straps, nails, spikes, bolts, joists, hangers, rods, dowels, fasteners and miscellaneous iron and steel items shall be of sizes and types to rigidly secure members in place.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fit carefully mortise and tenon joints of all framing including tongues and grooves of sheathings. Anchor all frames coming in contact with concrete, unless otherwise specified by means of 20 D nails, spaced not more than 200 mm. (8) apart all around the contact surfaces. Plane and dress side of frame that will receive the wall boards of sidings. B. Wood nailers shall be in accordance with detail drawings. Where not indicated on the drawings or mentioned herein, nailing strips shall be 25 mm. x 50 mm. (1 x 2) spaced at 400 mm. (16) on center both ways. Fasten securely by expansion bolts or other approved device at every 600 mm. (2) on center. C. Make all exposed nails countersunk. Do scribbling, mitering and joining accurately and neatly to conform to details. D. Effect butt joints appearance for all T and cross intersections or exposed frames, When stronger joints are required, introduce half-laps, doweling or tenon and mortise but still effect simple joints at the exposed surface. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
FINISH CARPENTRY
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete Ceiling boards and wall panels Related finish carpentry work as indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein
B. Coordinate work with all other related trades.
1.02 HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Millwork 1. Protect millwork against dampness during and after delivery 2. Do not bring interior finish, inside building until plaster is thoroughly dry. 3. Protect all finished woodwork from injury after it has been set in place until the completion and final acceptance of the work. B. Plywood, Fiber Cement Board Stack boards flat on a smooth level surface. Timber blocks may be used as support to ensure optimum performance. Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to fixing. If sheets should become wet, allow to dry thoroughly before fixing is commenced. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Make all wood finish and millwork true to details, clean and sharply defined. B. Set panels to allow for free movement in case of swelling or shrinkage C. Conceal means of fastening various parts together.
3.02 FINISH
A. Mill, fabricate and erect interior finish as indicated on the drawings. Machine sand at the mill and manual smooth at the job. B. Separate with 6 mm (1/4 stone-cut joints all interior trim set against with fine finishing nails, screws or glue where required.
C. Make mill moldings perfectly smooth on exposed surfaces and true to profile. D. Make joints tight and in a manner to conceal shrinkage. Secure trims with fine finishing nails, screws or glue where required. E. Set nails for putty stopping. F. Make window and door trim simple length. G. Miter moldings at corner, cope and angles.
3.03 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS
A. WELDWOOD or approved water-resistant wood glue B. SELLEY LIQUID NAILS or approved equal. C. Nails, screws and bolts of appropriate type, shape and size for all type of joints.
3.04 FASTENERS FOR FIBER CEMENT BOARD
A. Fasteners: Use galvanized wire nails 25 mm (1) long for fixing to timber frames. Deutsher Teks screws may also be used with self -embedded head, No. 8 *25 mm (1).
3.05 HARDWARE
A. Accurately fit and install all required finish hardware items. B. If surface-applied hardware is fitted and applied before painting, remove all such items, except butts and reinstall after painting is completed. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
C. Finish Hardware: See Summary of Materials and Finishes.
DIVISION 07
TERMINAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL

SECTION 07100 WATERPROOFING
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete: Protection of all exterior finishes Waterproofing
B. See drawings and details for location and extent of requirements
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples Submit to Architect samples of materials to be used clearly labeled as to brand name and manufacturers name to secure approval.
B. Manufacturers Instructions Submit to the Architect the manufacturers complete printed instructions for the application of the material. C. Warranties Upon completion, submit to the Architect written warranty that the waterproofing is effective for a period of five years.
1.03 ALTERNATES
No substitution of materials shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect prior to starting the work of waterproofing
2.00 PRODUCTS
3.00 EXECUTION
A. Waterproofing: 1. Deliver waterproofing materials to the site in original sealed containers or packages bearing the manufacturers name and brand designation, specification number, type and class.
2. Store and protect waterproofing materials from damage, weather, moisture and extreme temperature with extraordinary care. 3. Clean, free from holes and imperfections, smooth and dry all surfaces to receive waterproofing materials. The Contractor shall perform the necessary surface preparation according to the manufacturers specifications. Immediately before application of waterproofing, clean surfaces and secure approval. No application of waterproofing is permitted in wet weather. 4. All work under this section shall be performed only by a qualified Contractor trained and approved by the manufacturer. Apply all waterproofing strictly in accordance with manufacturers specifications.
3.02 TESTING
Flood test applicable waterproofed areas prior to acceptance for job, Plug all drains; build temporary dams at openings so that water will be 250 mm (1) deep at the high point of the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
waterproofed area. Maintain the water for at least 24 hours. evidence of leaking.
Remedy at once any
3.03 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee all waterproofing work to be free from defects in materials and in workmanship and free of leaks for a period of five (5) years from the date of final acceptance. Any defect shall be repaired at the Contractors expense.
3.04 CURING
Where curing of waterproofing is required, cure strictly in accordance to the Manufacturers specifications. Allow foot traffic only after complete curing.
3.05 TOPPING
Where topping over waterproofing is required, the Contractor shall provide the topping of the thickness indicated in the drawings.
SECTION 07400 PREFORMED ROOFING
Formatted: Font: Bold
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete: fitting and installation of pre-formed plastic roofing, flashing components, strap and rivet units and accessories application of supplementary materials to make the roof unit watertight and leak proof.
B. See drawings and details for sizes and location of work required. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit to the Architect shop drawings and samples of materials to be used and secure approval prior to installation
1.03 BRANDING
Each sheet shall be branded with the name or trademark of the manufacturer.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Lay down the ribbed roofing sheet starting from the end opposite the prevailing wind. B. Lay and install the first sheet with the turned down edge towards the outside of the area covered. C. Overlay the next sheet in such a manner that the exposed edge is turned down and the covered edge is turned up. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. Fix the strap according to indications shown in the manufacturers catalogue. E. Fasten the roofing sheets to the steel purlins by means of strap riveted to roofing sheets and strapped around purlins. F. Side al fasteners shall be done by steel tekscrews of J. bolts spaced from 300 mm (12) to 457 mm (18) on centers.
3.02 RIDGE ROLLS
Minimum lad of ridge roll shall be 300 mm (12) over roofing sheets. Rivet ridge to roofing sheets at top of every fourth corrugation in addition to rivets engaging top line of straps.
3.03 FLASHING & COUNTER FLASHING
A. Provide flashing and counterflashing at all critical points where water may seep through. B. Where corrugations run parallel to the walls, corrugate one wing of the flushing sheet to match corrugation of roof sheet while other wing shall go up against the walls and counter flash. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete: application of caulks and sealants for panel joints, expansion joints, construction joints, glazing of doors and windows, others.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples Submit to the Architect sample of materials to be used and secure approval. B. Manufacturers Instructions Submit to the Architect the Manufacturers complete printed instructions for the application of the material.
1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in the original sealed containers or packages bearing manufacturers name and brand specification. B. Materials stored on jobsite shall be protected from weather moisture and extreme temperature with extra ordinary care.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITION
Temperature and relative humidity conditions for a period before, during and after application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. If rain occurs, allow surfaces to dry before proceeding with the applications
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
A. Surface to be bonded should be free of oil, grease and dust. Scrub off soap residue with water, then clean with solvent. Surface must be completely clean and dry. Any trace of old sealant should be removed. B. Do not apply too thick. A thin bead of sealant will accommodate more joint movement than a thick bead. Ideally, sealant depth should be no more than 12 mm and no less than 6 mm. Use backing material to reduce depth. C. If necessary, widen joints by cutting sides or removing rigid filler. Wider joints accommodate more movement than narrow joints. D. Use masking tape for neat appearance. Remove soon after smoothing before sealant cures. E. Smooth with spatula for heat appearance, and to force sealant into joints and ensure proper contact onto sides of joint. F. Clean up spills before sealant cure with suitable solvent-based cloth. G. Remove cured sealant by scraping or wire brushing. H. Read product instructions carefully and follow them to the letter.
DIVISION 08 DOORS & WINDOWS
SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete all metal doors, windows and jambs B. See drawings and schedules for size, details and location of required work.
1.02 SHOP DRAWING AND SAMPLES
A. Submit shop drawings and secure Architects approval prior to placement or order. B. Submit sample corner sections, hinges, tracks, handles and all other accessories C. Submit sample of one full size unit, complete assembly, with all accessories, prior to fabrication of steel windows.
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum-framed casement, fixed and sliding glass doors that comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturers corresponding stock systems according to test methods indicated. B. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for each grade and performance class required. 1. Optional Performance Class Requirements: Where the required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified sliding glass door grade, comply with requirements of AAMA 101, Section 3, Optional Perform ance Classes, for a higher than minimum performance class. 2. Heights of sliding glass door units above grade at the door centerline are indicated on or can be delivered from Drawings. 3. Design wind velocity at Project sit 70 mph (113 km/hr). C. Testing Requirements: Test each grade and size of sliding glass door by a recognized testing agency according to ASTME 330 for structural performance, ASTME 283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 for water penetration. Test samples shall comply with AAMA 101 for sample size. Operating Force: Adjust each moving panel before performing tests so the maximum force to open the panel is 30 lbf (134 N) and the maximum force required to maintain motion is 20 lbf (89 N). D. Performance Requirement: Each required aluminum sliding glass door until shall comply with the following requirements.
1. Structural Performance: Sliding glass door units shall not show evidence of failure or permanent deflection of either the frame or panel after testing according to ASTM E 330 at a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 22.5 lb/ft (1.0773 kPa). Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2. Air infiltration shall not be more than 0.37 cfm/ft (1.9 L/s x m) of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf (75) Pa when tested according to ASTM E 283. 3. Water Penetration: There shall be no water leakage as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure at 2.86 lbf (137 Pa) when tested according to ASTM E 547. 4. Deglazing: There shall be no disengagement of the glazing surround members of operable panels when tested according to ASTM E 987 At 70 lbf (312 N) on the vertical rails ad 50 lbf (223 N) for the other rails.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully installed aluminum sliding glass doors similar in design and extent to those required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm whose aluminum sliding glass doors are listed by product name and manufacturer in the AAMA Certified Products Directory and comply with requirements indicated. C. Aluminum Casement and Sliding Glass Door Standard: Comply with provisions of AAMA 101 for standards of performance and fabrication workmanship. D. Safety Glass Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR for Category II materials. E. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendation of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual , except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or referenced standards. F. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide aluminum casement and sliding glass doors produced by a single fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those required.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual door openings in construction work by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 1. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure properly fitting sliding glass door units.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Aluminum Door and Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace sliding glass door units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, air infiltration, or failure weatherstripping. 2. Faulty operation of movable panels or hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Warranty period for all aluminum doors and windows is 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. 5. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the sliding glass door, swing door and casement window manufacturer for the strength, corrosionresistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi (150 MPa) ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062-inch (1.58 mm) thickness at any location for the main frame and panel members. B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum sliding glass door, swing door, and casement window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of door and window units. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners are screw-anchored into aluminum less than 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in-splined grommet nuts. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. To apply hardware, use Philips falt-headscrews that match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and sliding glass door, swing door ands casement window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip, zinc-coated steel complying with requirements of ASTM A 123. Provide strength sufficient to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Compression Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturers standard compressible weather-stripping of moled PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade-4, designed for permanent resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, concealed when door and window are closed. E. Sliding Weatherstripping: provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile, with resin-impregnated backing fabric and an aluminum backing strip; comply with AAMA 701.2. 1. Provide weatherstrpping with integral center-line barrier fin of semi-rigid plastic polypropylene sheet. F. Insect Screens: Provide a movable insect screen panel for each movable glazed panel. Comply with requirements of SMA 2005. 1. Screen Fabric: Provide 18-by-14 (1.1 by-1.5 mm) or 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3 mm) mesh of 0.013-inch (0.33 mm) diameter aluminum wire; comply with FS RR-W-365, Type VII, except use black-anodized or gun metal coating on wire. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2. Insect Screen Frames: Provide the manufacturers standard formed or extruded aluminum frames and removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline. Comply with requirements of ANSI/SMA 1004. Finish: Anodized aluminum or baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturers standards. G. Glazing Materials: Provide safety glazing materials that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and requirements of Division 8 Section Glazing.
2.02 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Provide hardware necessary to properly operate, tightly close, and securely lock doors. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide white bronze, cast or wrought aluminum, solid white metal with special-coating finish, or nonmagnetic stainless steel. 1. Roller Assemblies: Provide movable panels with rollers and roller assemblies that conform to requirements of AAMA 906.3. 2. Door and Window Pulls: Provide manufacturers standard aluminum pull grips. 3. Locks: Install manufacturers standard pull and keyless locking devise on each movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect openings before beginning door and window installation. Verify that the rough or masonry opening is correct and that the sill plate is level. Do not install door units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand and other construction debris. 2. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean sound and well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches (75mm) of the opening. 3. Metal surfaces shall be dry, clean, free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag, without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
3.02 ALUMINUM SWING DOORS AND AWNING WINDOWS FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum sliding glass door, swing door and casement window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of units. 1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. B. SEAMLESS WINDOW: Fabricate framing in profiles indicate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation C. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. D. Weepholes: Provide weepholes and other internal water passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior. E. Assembly: Assemble components into complete weathertight units with flush, rigid, and hairline joints. Mill, cope, butt, and miter joints; secure by mechanical devices or by other means to ensure permanently watertight joints. Provide at least two corrosion-resistant, pre-lubricated, or self-lubricating rollers for each sliding door panel of sufficient capacity to ensure easy, quiet, and smooth operation. F. Weatherstripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weatherstripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weatherstripping in meeting or jamb stiles, as required, to meet specified performance requirements. Provide compression-type weatherstripping at the perimeter of each movable panel where slipding-type weatherstripping is not appropriate. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops, coordinated with the Division 8 Section glazing and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match panel frames.
H. Screens: Provide insect screen unit of each operable panel. Design door units and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable arrangement on either inside or outside of door unit with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
3.03 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for recommendations relative to finish applications and designations. B. Powder Coat Finish: Per manufacturers standard finish.
3.04 ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturers instructions and recommendations for installing door units, hardware, accessories, and other components. 1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from source of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under the Dissimilar Materials paragraph in the Appendix of AAMA 101. B. Set sill members and other frame members in bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashing and other components. 1. Refer to Division 7 Section Joint Sealants for compounds. Fillers and gaskets to be installed concurrently with sliding glass door units. 2. Compounds, joint fillers, and gaskets installed after sliding door units are installed are specified in Divisions 7 Section Joint Sealant. C. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide proper supports and anchor frames and fixed panels securely in place. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.05 STEEL DOOR FABRICATION
1. Factory prefabricates all frames in accordance to the designs and dimensions indicated in the drawings. 2. Flush type doors shall be 45 mm (1-3/4) thick. Reinforce doors from steel sections extending full height of doors and spaced not over 200 mm (8) on centers vertically. 3. Tops and bottoms of doors shall have continuous stiffener channels welded to side plates. 4. Insulate hollow flush doors with fiberboard or cork to deaden metallic sound. Edges at top sides shall be reinforced and finished flush.
3.05 STEEL DOOR INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Set and anchor frames as shown in details and in approved shop drawings 2. Set frames plumb and square and brace where necessary to prevent distortion.
3.
Provide continuous vinyl weatherstrip, vertically at meeting stiles on pairs and concealed top and bottom rails for all exterior doors. Entrances shall be constructed so that gaps will not occur between pivot sites and door
jambs when doors are locked or operational to prevent heat and air transmission and entrance of water and insects. 4. Protective Coating: Clean all surfaces and apply a protective coating of clear, water-white methacrylate-type lacquer, resistant to alkaline mortar and plaster immediately after fabrication and may not be removed even after completion of installation 5. Wedge clear of masonry all frames set in prepared openings 3/16 to inch to allow for caulking. 6. Install hardware to fit details as shown in the drawings and as per manufacturers specifications. Supply all necessary templates and instructions required.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conduct on-site tests on Architect-selected units fir air infiltration and water penetration according to AAMA 502. Units not meeting specified test requirements and units having similar deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Testing shall be performed by an accredited testing agency: 1. Air infiltration Tests: Conduct tests according to the requirements of ASTM E 783. Allowable infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated. 2. Water Resistance Tests: Conduct tests according to the requirements of ASTM E 1105. No water leakage is permitted.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating panels, screens, and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping for smooth operation and weatherstripping closure. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. C. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. D. Factory Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand to feather-edge minor scratched, dripped, or damaged areas and apply touchup of compatible air-drying paint. Minor finish imperfections may be repaired provided finish matches new work finish and is acceptable to Architect, otherwise remove and replace.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installing doors and windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealing compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and the moving parts.
B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing door and window units. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to the date scheduled for final inspection. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other ways during the construction period, including by natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
3.10 PROTECTION Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Institute and maintain protective measures and other precautions required through remainder of construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, sliding glass door units will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 08200 WOOD DOORS
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete 1. Hollow core flush doors 2. Fiber cement board panel doors B. See drawings and details for sizes, location and other requirements
1.02 SAMPLES
Submit sample corner sections of wood and jambs for approval of the Architect.
1.03 PROTECTION
Protect doors adequately from scratches and other stains with heavy building paper until final turnover to Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATION
A. Assembly joints in doors with water-resistant glue. Keep doors under pressure until glue has thoroughly set. B. Sand smooth finished door. Provide doors with joints and clean cut moldings. C. Keep faces from defects or machine marks that will show through the finish. D. Hollow Core Flush Doors Provide doors with cross banding and edging. Make face veneer first quality selected plywood as directed in the drawings or as specified herein. Provide lock blocks of size for hardware used.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Cut, trim and fit each door to its frame and hardware accurately B. Give allowance for painters finish and possible swelling and shrinkage. C. Provide not more than 3mm (1/8) clearance at lock and hanging stiles and not more than 6mm (1/4 at bottom. D. Round all corners to 1.6mm (1/16) radius. Bevel slight lock and rail edges. E. All doors shall operate freely. functioning. All hardware shall be properly adjusted and
SECTION 08250 ALUMINUM JALOUSIE WINDOWS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Furnish materials and equipment and perform labor required to complete: Aluminum jalousie windows. See drawings and schedules for sizes, details and location of required work.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Submit shop drawings and secure Architects approval. B. Submit sample corner sections, hinges, track, handles and all other accessories
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum extrusions ASTM Specification 6063-T5. B. Fastening devices Cadmium or zinc plated. C. Anchor bolts, pressed or rolled anchor accessories-galvanized.
2.02 WINDOWS
Windows with aluminum sections of jambs, heads, tubing, complete with snap on glass fasteners and accessories.
A. Heads, sills, and mullions, set in anodized aluminum frames ad mullions with section appropriate for and adapted to mounting on concrete, with grooves and snap-on ribbings to accommodate other components and weatherstrips, and provisions for neat fixation to one another using concealed hardware connectors.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set and anchor frames as shown in details and in approved shop drawings. B. Set frames plumb and square and brace where necessary to prevent distortion C. Wedge clear of masonry all frames set in prepared openings3/16 to to allow for caulking.
3.02 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust all frames and attach hardware before glazing B. Secure all windows and doors to be watertight and all hardware operating free and easy.
SECTION 08700 HARDWARE
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. All finish hardware, including nails, spikes, bolts, long screws, etc., for all doors and windows shall be provided by the Contractor. B. Install all materials and equipment and perform labor required to fully equip in the most satisfactory condition all : 1. Finish hardware doors, and windows and 2. Other operating members C. Fit in place all: Hardware not herein specifically mentioned but necessary to leave the work complete. All such hardware should there be any, shall conform in every respect to the balance of the hardware herein specified. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit samples of locksets, hinges, door pulls , door stops, door closers and other finish hardware and accessories for Architects approval.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All hardware shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers directions. B. All work shall be installed plumb and true and secured with proper fastenings so as to make all work rigid and firm. C. After installation, all finishing hardware shall operate and function smoothly and efficiently in strict accord with their respective expected operating performance. D. All works which are to receive hardware shall be inspected and any defect must first be rectified before installing finishing hardware.
E. Exposed items of hardware: After hardware has been properly fitted, all exposed items such as knobs, plates, pull, locks, etc. shall removed until final coat of finish has been applied, and then hardware installed. F. Door Knobs, Lock and Latch Strikes: 1. All locks, latch strikes and strike boxes be installed in door frames at the same height from the floor. 2. Door knobs shall be located so that the center of the knobs is 965 mm (38) from the finished floor or as directed by the Architect. 3. All lock turn to be non-ferrous metal. All lock mechanisms to be free of dye cast material. 4. All locks are to be interchangeable and reversible without any alterations t o the door. 5. All face of each lock to be beveled 3 mm (1/8) in 50 mm (2) to conform to the level of the door. 6. Roses to hold firmly in place without use of wood screws. Knobs to be securely fastened to spindles without the use of set screws. 7. All cylinders must be removable and interchangeable with the aid of the key, but without requiring the lock to be removed from the door. 8. Key locks are to have automatic deadlocking latch to prevent forcing back of the bolt. All locks to have box strikes. Lips strike not to project beyond jamb trim.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Hardware which might be damaged by the construction work shall be protected during the progress of the building work and uncovered upon completion. B. Protection must be provided at all times including during painting operation
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work, all hardware shall be cleaned and polished and left in perfect operating condition B. Any hardware that may have been damaged either on its finish or more shall be replaced.
SECTION 08800 GLAZING
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete 1. All glass and glazing works free from imperfection, water marks. B. See drawings of size, location and details.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of glass panels with factory labels for Architects approval. B. Submit samples of glazing compound.
1.03 LABELS
Label each glass panels and do not remove from glass panel until final cleaning and after inspection and approval.
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver only as required and store in a safe location as directed. Unpack only when ready for use.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect all glass from damage, breakage, staining, etching, differential ageing, abrasion, scratches, and impact during construction and until final acceptance of the contract work. Replace unless satisfactory corrective measures can be made at the job without removing the damaged glass, as directed by the Architect. B. Glazed openings shall be identified with a colorful flag, festoon, or tape suspended near, but no in contact with the glass. Tapes or banners may be attached to the sash at head, jambs or site with a non-staining adhesive or by any convenient, mechanical means. Do not mark or coat glass partially or completely with X, S or other symbols with soap, wax cleaning powders or other materials. C. Lost and damaged materials shall be replace by the Contractor at his own expense.
2.0 PRODUCTS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2.01 GLAZING
A. Bulk compounds for glass installation may be: 1. Bulk compounds such as: Mastics elastic compounds and non-skinning compound. Putties wood sash putty, metal sash putty. Sealants one components, two components. 2. Preformed sealants such as: Synthetic polymer base sealants resilient or no-resilient type. Preformed gaskets compression type, structural type.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 GLAZING
A. Prevent glass from all contact with metal or any sharp materials by use of resilient shims placed at quarter points. B. Use resilient sealants. C. Use stops in sizes permitting a good grip on the glass D. Install glass only in opening that are rigid, plumb and square. E. Allow sufficient clearance at edges of glass to compensate for its expansion or for more settlement of the building. Clearance should be 6 mm (1/4) from edge to frame and 3 mm (1/8) for face. F. Removal of putty or glazing compound smears from glass shall be performed by the glazing contractor during the materials normal work life. Failure to do so may result damage to the glass.
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
SECTION 09200 PLASTER
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete all plain cement plaster finish. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. See drawings for details and location of work required.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. See Division 4 Section Mortar for description of Materials.
2.0 PRODUCT
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER FINISH
A. Provide all walls indicated with three coats of cement plaster (scratch coat, brown coat and finish coat). Mix each coat in the proportion of one part Portland cement to three parts and by volume. B. Apply the scratch coat with sufficient material and pressure to ensure a good bond and then scratch to a rough surface. Provide a thickness of 10 mm (3/8) for the scratch coat. Dampen with water before applying brown coat. C. Apply brown coat one day after applying scratch coat with a thickness of 10 mm (3/8) and level to a flat even surface. When stiff enough, trowel with a wooden float and cross hatch or broom lightly and evenly to secure a good mechanical bond for the finish coat. Wet the surface and keep from drying out for at least three (3) days.
D. Apply finish coat seven (7) days after the application of the brown coat. Provide thickness of 3 mm (1/8). Keep the fin ish coat damp but not saturated for a period of seven days.
SECTION 09300 TILE
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Tile finishing shall be Contractor supplies. B. Install all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools required to complete all types of tile work. C. See drawings and details for location and extent of work required.
1.02 SAMPLES
Submit samples of floor and wall tiles including all required beads and moldings.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION OF SCRATCH COAT
A. Thoroughly dampen, but not saturate, surfaces or masonry or concrete walls before applying the scratch coat. Make surface areas appear slightly damp. Allow no free water on the surface. B. On masonry, first apply a thin coat with great pressure, then bring it out sufficiently to compensate for the major irregularities on the masonry surfaces to a thickness of not less than 6 mm (1/4) at any point. C. Evenly rake scratch coats, but not dash coat, to provide goo mechanical key for subsequent coats before the mortar has fully hardened. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. On surfaces not sufficiently rough to provide good mechanical key ,dash on the first coat with a whisk broom or fiber brush using a strong whipping motion. Do not trowel or otherwise disturb mortar applied by dashing until it is hardened.
3.02 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION ON MORTAR BED
A. Before spreading the setting bed, establish lines of borders and center the fieldwork in both directions to permit the pattern to be laid with a minimum of cult tiles. B. Clean concrete sub-floor then moisten but not soak. Afterwards, sprinkle dry cement over the surfaces and spread the mortar on the setting bed. C. Mix mortar one (1) part Portland cement to three (3) parts sand. Tamp to ensure good bond over the entire area and screed to provide a smooth level bed proper height and slope. D. Pitch floor to drains as required. E. After setting bed has set sufficiently to be worked over, sprinkle dry cement over and lay tiles. F. Keep tile joints parallel and straight over the entire area by using straight edges. G. Tamp the tile solidly into the bed, using wood blocks of size to ensure solid bedding free from depression H. Lay tiles from center lines outward and make adjustments at walls.
3.03 WALL TILE INSTALLATION ON MORTAR BED
A. Before application of mortar bed, dampen the surface of the scratch coat evenly to obtain uniform section B. Use temporary or spot grounds to control the thickness of the mortar bed. Fill out the mortar bed even with the grounds and rod it to as true plane. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
C. Apply the mortar bed over an area no greater than can be covered with tile while the coat is still plastic. D. Allow no single application of mortar to be 19 mm (3/4) thick. E. Completely immerse wall tile in clean water and soak it at least hour. After removal, stack tile on edge long enough to drain off excess water. Re-soak and drain individual tiles that dry along edges. Allow no free moisture to remain on the back of tile during setting. F. Apply a bond coat 1/32 to 1/16 inch thick to the plastic setting bed or to the back of each sheet or tile. G. Press tile firmly into the bed and beat into place within one (1) hour. H. Lay tile fields in rectangular block areas not exceeding 600 mm by 600 mm (24 by 24). Cut the setting bed through its entire depth along the edges of each block area after placement and before subsequent blocks are installed. I. Within 1 hour after installation of tile, remove strings from string-set tile and wet the faces of face-mounted tile and remove the paper and glue. Avoid using excess water. Adjust any tile that is out of alignment.
3.04 GROUTING
A. After tile, brick, or marble slab has sufficient set, force a maximum of grout into joints by trowel, brush or finger application. B. Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of cushion-edge tiles to the depth of the cushion. C. Fill all joints of square-edged tile flush with the surface of the tile. Fill all gaps or sips. D. During grouting, clean all excess grout off with clean burlap, other clothes or sponges.
3.05 CLEANING Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Sponge and wash tile thoroughly with clear water after the grout has stiffened. Then clean by rubbing with damp cloths or sponges and polish clean with dry cloth.
SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This Section includes ceiling composed of ficem board panels and exposed suspension systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data of each type of product specified. C. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension system members 2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of ficem board ceilings with adjoining construction. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that based on its testing of current products for compliance of ficem board panel ceilings and components with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed ficem board panel ceilings similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful-in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility of Ceiling Panel Units: Obtain each type of ficem board ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section Project Meetings
1.04 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fiber cement panels and suspension system components to Project site in original unopened packages and store them in fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing fiber cement panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle five cement panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install ficem board panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
completed and dry, work aboe ceilings is complete and ambient temperature are humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ficem board panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any).
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Ficem Board Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which suspended ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work. B. Measure each ceiling area of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install ficem board panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturers instruction and CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from buildings structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Splay hangers only where required, and if permitted with fire-resistancerated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
7. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of 4 tight turns. Fasten bracing to concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors. C. Install edge moldings and trim type indicated at perimeter of ficem board ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of ficem board panels. 1. Apply ficem board sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on bak of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.18 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do no use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on molding and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent , kinked members. E. Install ficem board panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels and borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange ficem board panels in the manner indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality-control services. B. Remove and replace those fasteners and anchors that test results indicate do not comply with requirements.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of ficem board panel ceilings, including trim, edge, moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturers instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damange. Remove and replce ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
SECTION 09900 PAINTING
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete: all painting and varnishing works
B. See drawings for location, quantity and extent of surfaces to receive paint and varnish.
1.02 WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
The Painting Contractor shall also examine the drawings and specifications for the section being painted and for painting work in other sections for possible conflict of work.
The Painting Contractor shall also examine all the surfaces to be finished under the contract and see that the work of other trades has been left or installed in satisfactory condition to receive the paint, stain, or specified finish.
1.03 PROTECTION OF WORK
The Painting Contractor shall protect his work and the work of other contractors against damage or injury caused by paint application
1.04 WORKMANSHIP Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. The paint shall be applied only by skilled painters to the method specified so as to form a film of uniform thickness, free from sags, runs, crawls, or other defects. B. For painted work, each succeeding coat shall differ slightly in color or tint from that of the preceding coat. C. The Painting Contractor shall include in his work all final clean-up of paint spots on the floor, glass and finish hardware.
1.05 MATERIALS STORAGE
A. All materials shall be provided to the job site in clean, sealed, original containers with all labels and other markings intact. Materials will be stored in the area designated and all those areas will be kept neat, clean and locked.
B. A room or rooms in the premises shall be assigned for the storage of painting tools and materials. Protect the floor with drop cloths or building paper. Place cloth and cotton waste in covered metal containers, or destroy them at the end of each work day. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
C. All painting materials shall be received and mixed in an assigned room to avoid pilferage and maintain quality control. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire by complying with all applicable local Fire Prevention and Safety Ordinances.
1.06 COLORS
A. All colors are to be selected or approved by the Architect or his authorized representative and actual color chips shall be supplied to the Contractor for matching. B. All undercoats shall be tinted to approximate the finish coat color.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
TEST PANELS: Prepare sample panels of selected color or shade on 300 mm by 300 mm (12 by 12) plywood panels for approval by the Architect. Colors may not be the manufacturers standard color. Special color shall be pr ovided as required.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Refer Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes
All paint materials shall meet the requirements of the standard specifications of the Standardization Committee on Supplies and shall be in accordance with the latest Classification Class A of Institute of Science, Manila.
Use materials in accordance with the manufacturers directions printed on the labels unless otherwise, approved by the Architect.
A. Masonry (new surface)
1. All areas to be painted must be dry and free of dirt, grease, oil, dust, loose grit or mortar and other contaminant.
2.
Treat with Concrete Neutralizer at least a week prior to painting. Apply sufficient coats, let dry, then brush off white crystals that form on the surface.
3. Apply one coat Concrete Primer & Sealer. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
4. Fill up all hairline cracks and crevices with Concrete Putty. Allow to dry, sand smooth, dust off, then spot prime before applying finish coats. B. Masonry (old surface) 1. Remove scaling, flaking, blistering and peeling off paint either with the use of paint remover, wire brushing, or scraping. 2. For chalking old paint, use Masonry Surface Conditioner as primer. 3. In case of mildew infestation, treat with Fungicidal Wash Solution by scrubbing or brushing. To ensure adequate treatment, allow to remain on the surface for twenty four (24) hours. Brush off and rinse with water. Let dry. C. Wood (new surface) 1. All areas to be painted must be dry and free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and other foreign matter. 2. Sand surface until wood is smooth to touch and no silvers or rough edges remain. 3. Dust off completely, then wipe with clean rag. 4. Apply one coat of Interior Primer & Sealer or Exterior Wood Primer. 5. Fill nail holes, cracks, dents, and damaged areas with Plastic Wood Dough or Glazing Putty. D. Metal (new surface) 1. Remove dust, dirt, grease, oil, wax loose scales and other contaminants by wiping with rag soaked in lacquer thinner or naphta 2. Sand, wire brush or scrape all rusty metal exposed to the weather for some time. 3. Treat surface with Rust Converter. Let stand overnight, then wipe off while residue with clean rag soaked in lacquer thinner of naphtha. 4. Apply one coat Red oxide or Red Lead or Zinc Chromate Primer. Let dry overnight before finishing with one or two coats of recommended topcoat. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Employ only experienced, skilled craftsmen and apply as per manufacturers written specifications. B. Paint shall be applied by a brush, roller or spray in accordance with the manufacturers directions. All materials when brushed, shall be evenly flowed on with brush best suited for the type of materials being applied. When using roller, the covers shall be carpet, velvet back or high pile sheep wool best suited for materials and texture specified by the Architect. Sprayed paint shall be uniformly applied with suitable equipment.
C. Exposed surfaces shall mean all areas visible when all permanent or built in fixtures, etc, are in place in all areas specified or scheduled to be painted. Painted surfaces in back of movable equipment and furniture. Paint all inside metal and plastered surfaces visible through the above specified equipment covers. D. Access panels, electrical panels, louvers, exposed conduits, primed outlet covers, primed wall and ceiling plates and other primed items they occur unless otherwise Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
specified in Painting Schedule. Paint in back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers and the like. E. Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather. Do not apply interior paint when in the temperature. However, failures of the Architect to notify the Contractor shall not be relieve the contractor of responsibility to produce satisfactory results.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect or remove all exposed finished hardwares, lighting fixtures and accessories, plumbing fixtures and accessories, glasses and the like so that these are not stained during painting operations. Reinstall them after completion of works. B. Tape and cover with craft paper or equal all other surfaces which would be endangered by stains or paint marks. C. Repair any damage done. Refinish any work made necessary by defective workmanship for material or carelessness of other crafts.
3.03 WORKMANSHIP IN GENERAL
A. Mix paint with proper consistency. minimize brush marks.
Apply paint evenly and brush efficiently to
B. Stir paint thoroughly to keep pigment in even suspension when paint is being applied. C. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, apply paints in three coats (priming, body and finish). Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before the succeeding coat is applied. In general, unless otherwise instructed by the Architect, provide not less than 48 hours as the time between the application of succeeding coats. Let the Architect or his representative inspect and approve each coat before the succeeding coat is applied. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
D. If surfaces are not fully covered or cannot be satisfactorily finished in the number of coats specified, apply subsequent coats to attain the desired evenness of paint without extra cost to the Owner. E. Touch up knots, pitch steaks, sappy spots, etc., where finish call for interior paints or enamel. For exteriors, use any approved sealer. F. Sand smooth woodwork to be finished with enamel or varnish, use fine sand paper between coats of enamel or varnish applied to wood or metal to produce an even smooth surface. G. Do not paint exterior while surface is damp or during rainy or damp weather. H. Do necessary puttying of nail holes, cracks, etc. after the prime had been applied. Bring putty flush with adjoining surface in a neat, workmanlike manner.
I. J.
Tint undercoats of paint or enamel to same or approximate shade of final coat. Protect to remove hardwares, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures andother similar items during the painting operation and reinstall them after completion of work.
3.04 VARNISHING
A. Sand thoroughly all woodwork surfaces to be varnished. Fill carefully all cracks, nail holes and other defects with first-quality colored pr white putty tinted to match the desired finish. B. For open-grain wood like Tanguile etc., educe the prominence of the course grain by applying first quality pastewood filler with consistency to reduced for brush application and tinted to match the desired finish. Allow this filler to set sell and Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
remove excess by wiping across grain. Allow overnight drying or as per required by manufacturer. Remove all remaining surplus by wiping the wood. C. Allow stains and varnishes to dry 48 hours between coats and sand lightly between coats with no. 00 sand paper or finer. Clean and dust before applying the next coat.
3.05 CLEANING
Protect the work and adjacent work and materials at all times by a suitable covering or by other methods. Upon completion of the work, remove paint and varnish spots from the floor, glass and finish hardware. Remove all surplus materials, scaffolding, etc., so as to leave the premises ijn perfect condition, acceptable to the Owner.
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 010400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
1. Furnish materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools required for the installation of Building Identification Letters Room Identification Signs Fire Exit Signs
1.02 SAMPLE AND SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit samples for approval of the Architect. For the building identification, full size lettering layout and installation method shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before start of work. Make available half full size patterns for the Owner, upon request.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMASHIP
Execute in high quality workmanship comparable with artworks.
3.02 INSTALLATION Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Install in a secure and permanent manner at prescribed heights and/or layout. For the building identification, float letters away from the back wall with the use of cantilevered brass dowels behind each other. For back walls with irregular surface, provide dowels with different lengths such that the letter faces are true to place. Embed dowels into the back wall by drilling appropriate sized holes at accurate points. Do not mutilate the back wall. After the dowels are positioned, fill with expanding grout, or other approved fillers and retouch flush to the back wall surface.
SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. All materials required to complete all toilet and bath accessories shall be Contractor applied. B. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, required to complete all: toilet and bath accessories
C. See drawings and details for sizes and locations of work required.
2.0 PRODUCTS
3.0 EXECUTION
Furnish and install all toilet accessories true to line, plane and lever, in accordance to manufacturers specifications.
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS

SECTION 14310 ELEVATORS
1.0 PROJECT INCLUDES
A. Pre-engineered electric traction elevators 1. Passenger elevators
A. Safety Code: ASME/ANSI A17.1 and local regulations and handicapped requirements.
3.0 PRODUCTS
A. Features and Components: 1. Type: Gearless traction type with a speed of 1.0 m/sec. 2. Control System: Variable voltage, variable frequency (VVVF) 3. Cab Finishes: a. Ceiling: Painted steel sheet with central indirect downlights (N20) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
b. Walls: Painted Finish (Color: TBA) c. Floor: Vinyl Tiles (Color: TBA)
4. Door panels: Hairline-finished steel sheet (Color: TBA) 5. Car Operating Panels: Front Return Panel, Vandal resistant type micro stroke click buttons (CBV-C210) 6. Hall Design a. Doors: 1. All Floor: hairline-finished stainless steel sheet b. Jambs 1. Ground Floor: Splayed Jamb with transom panel, hairline-finished stainless steel (E-312) 2. c. All Other Floors splayed Jamb without transom panel, hairline-finished stainless steel sheet (E-302)
Hall Position Indicators and Call Buttons Vandal-resistant type micro stroke click button (PIV-C220)
d. Hall Position Indicators PIH-D330 e. Hall Buttons-Vandal-resistant type micro stroke click button (HBV-C210) B. Auxiliary Operations and Controls: 1. Automatic car fan shut-off 2. Automatic car light shut-off 3. Automatic electronic car arrival chime
4. Attendant service 5. Automatic bypass 6. Basic announcement 7. Car call canceling 8. Emergency car lighting 9. Emergency Exit 10. Extended door-door open 11. Firefighters emergency operation 12. False call canceling-automatic 13. Interphone +one (1) master phone 14. Emergency landing device 15. Safety ray 16. Secret call service 17. Overload protective device with alarm bell and signal light 18. Ventilation fan
C. SCHEDULE 1. Electric Traction Elevator Schedule: a. Capacity: 825 kg. (11 persons) b. Speed: 1.0 m/sec. c. Car Size : (w) 1350 mm x (d) 1400 mm
th
d. Landings Served: (Basement 1 through 6 Floor) e. Travel Distance : 20.58m f. Entrance Width :900 mm
g. Entrance Door Operation : Center opening (CO) h. Power Supply :230 VAC, 3 Phase, 60 hertz i. Lighting Supply: 230 VAC, 1 Phase, 60 hertz
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
SECTION 15100 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered includes all operations in connection with the supply, installation and testing of the air conditioning and ventilating systems.
1.02 GENERAL
The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the air conditioning and ventilating systems. If deviations from the drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such deviations and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Owner through the Architect and Mechanical Consultant for approval. No such deviations shall be made without the written approval of the Owner or his authorized representative.
1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
All materials, machinery, and equipment to be furnished shall be of the required quality used in good commercial and trade practice and shall be essentially the standard products of reputable manufacturers. The acceptability of these items including their workmanship and method of installation shall be established by the following:
1. The Philippine Mechanical Engineering Code 2. The Philippine Electrical Engineering Code 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 4. Fire Code of the Philippines 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 6. National fire Protection Association (NFPA) 7. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 8. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
9. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 10. National Electrical Manufacturing Association (NEMA) 11. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 12. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 13. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
1.04 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
As soon as practicable, after the date of award of Contract, a complete schedule of equipment proposed for installation shall be submitted for the approval of the Mechanical Consultant showing dimensions and arrangement of the equipment and necessary clearance. The schedule shall include catalogue, diagrams, and drawings. In the event that any of the items or equipment contained in the schedule fail to comply with Specifications, such items may be rejected.
1.05 COORDINATION OF WORKS WITH OTHERS
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to closely coordinate his work with the works of other Contractors to avoid conflicts and ensure the smooth and proper execution of works. The Contractor shall carefully check space requirements to make sure that this equipment, air ducts, piping, motor controllers, and others, can be installed in the spaces allotted for the same.
1.06 WORK DESCRIPTION
A. In general, the work under this section shall include, but be limited to the following: Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1. Supply and installation of air conditioning equipment. 2. Furnish and install piping system including refrigerant and condensate drain pipes, fittings, valves, hangers, insulation, supports, and other pipe accessories. 3. Furnish switches, motor starters, and install temperature control system including thermostats, wirings and controls. 4. Finishing works, such as painting of supports, brackets or hangers as required. 5. Furnish and install exhaust fans, fresh air blowers and pressurization blowers. 6. Testing, balancing, and commissioning of the mechanical system. 7. Submission of equipment and installation warranty of all Contractorfurnished equipment and devices, including free monthly service of the Contractor-installed system for a period of one year starting from the date of Final Acceptance of the system.
B. The following items of work are not included in this Section but shall be provided by other trades: 1. Electrical power supply system including main circuit breakers, wires, conduits, etc. 2. Concrete pad and foundation of the units 3. Access panels.
2.00 PRODUCTS
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 DUCTWORK AND SUPPORTS
A. Sheet Metal Ductwork: 1. Ducts shown on the drawings shall be constructed and erected in a first class, workmanlike and air tight manner, and in accordance with the SMACNA standards. 2. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, ducts shall conform accurately the dimension and reasonably true to the locations indicated in the drawings. The duct shall be straight and smooth in the inside with joints neatly finished and air tight. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3. Ducts shall be braced and reinforced with angles, supported and securely anchored to the building in an approved manner so as to be quiet and completely vibration free. B. Flexible Connections: 1. Flexible connections shall be provided between ductwork and equipment to which they are connected to prevent the transmission of vibration. 2. The necessary angles, bolts, clips and other fasteners shall be provided for securing the flexible materials to the equipment and duct. C. Duct Hangers and Supports 1. Provide hangers and supports for ductwork as required. Horizontal ducts shall be supported as shown in Plans. Vertical ducts shall be supported by angles riveted to the ducts and supported on the wall. All hangers shall be given triple coat of anti-rust paint. 2. The use of power actuated concrete anchors and other type of anchoring devices shall be allowed only upon written approval by the Architect.
3.02 PIPE AND PIPING INSULATION
A. Condensate drain piping shall be of PVC, sized to liberally dispose of the condensate to the nearest floor drain. Drain pipe shall be of a color to match the building. A p-trap with a clean out plug shall be provided at the outlet for each drain pan. B. Pipe Supports and Hangers shall be fabricated out of steel angles, rods, and flat bars in a workmanlike manner. Metal to metal contact between pipes and hangers must be avoided by providing 3mm thick rubber pad between. Supports on horizontal lines shall be spaced at not more than 1.80 meters on center. All pipings must be properly anchored so that no stress is placed on the equipment connection by expansion. C. Pipe Sleeves shall be of standard steel pipes with sufficient diameter to provide a minimum clearance of 6mm around the insulation. Pipe sleeves shall be installed Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
whenever a pipe passes through masonry or concrete. Pipes should not be permitted to pass thru bearing walls, beams, or columns unless permitted by the Architect. D. Piping Insulation shall be applied on all refrigerant suction lines and condensate drain lines. Insulation material shall be flexible elastomeric pipe insulation, 25 mm thick. Joints shall be sealed with appropriate contact adhesive. For pipes installed outdoors, a weather-resistant protective finish is to be applied and covered with Ga. 26 aluminum cladding.
3.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Multi-Split type ceiling and wall mounted, free blow, Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) air conditioning unit, equipped with a self diagnosis remote controller, and having the features of setting of room temperature, timer, air discharge direction, fan speed selections, and self-diagnosis circuit with malfunction display. This unit shall have the facility for wireless remote function and should be BMS ready. Hotel rooms shall be window-type and inverter driven. The controller for the room air conditioners shall be wall-mounted type. B. Capacity The capacity shall be as shown on the plans and drawings. The total static pressure is estimated values and deemed adequate for the purpose of bidding. The contractor shall verify the static pressure for each unit.
Motor and Drive The motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 30% and the motor shall be sized to meet the maximum requirements of the fan based on its performance curve. Belts shall be the oil resistant type. Fan motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common base to allow consistent tension with no relative motion between fan and motor shafts. Motor and drive shall be especially designed for quiet operation.
Disconnect Switch A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located near the units.
Access Doors Access doors and quick opening latches shall be provided ;in the casing to facilitate inspection of the interior.
3.04 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Pipe hangers, duct hangers, uninsulated piping and other ferrous metal works that have not received factory painting shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be applied with two (2) coats of rust preventive paint.
3.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Upon completion of the installations, and when the system is ready for operation, capacity and general operating tests shall be conducted by a competent and experienced engineer to be furnished by the Contractor. These tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities of the equipment.
3.06 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE
The ventilating systems, equipment, and accessories and installed under this part of the Specifications shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of Final Acceptance thereof, and materials and equipment furnished shall be free from any defects in the materials, workmanship and design.
At any time within one year after Acceptance and upon proper notice, the Contractor shall rectify any and all deficiencies including replacement of parts of the entire unit without additional cost to the Owner, if such deficiencies have been caused directly or indirectly by inferior materials, faulty workmanship, and/or defective design of parts. Expendable items such as oil, refrigerant, etc, are included in this one year guarantee. During this guarantee period, the Contractor shall perform free monthly inspection and service to make adjustment if necessary for proper and efficient operation of the system.
SECTION 15300 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
1.0 GENERAL
a. The General Conditions form a part of these specifications and contract. b. The sub-contractor for the Fire Protection Works is designed as a Contractor in this Division.
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
Furnishing of all materials, labor, tools, equipment and accessories for the complete installation, testing and adjustment, ready for use of the proposed automatic fire sprinkler system.
The work essentially shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following items: 1. Sprinkler System for the floors as shown on the plans.
2. Fire hose and cabinets, and accessories including connection to the Automatic Fire Sprinkler System. 3. Inspector test pipe nozzle and valves on the farthest point of each system. 4. Installation and supply of floor control valves and water flow switches. 5. All openings through which fire may spread from one floor to the other, such as holes through floors made for the passage of pipes and electrical conduits shall be sealed with fire resistant materials. 6. Tools and stock of spare sprinkler heads. 7. Furnishing and installation of instruction boards, charts, signs and markers. 8. Priming and finish painting (Red) of all exposed piping and all equipment except for the sprinkler heads. 9. Securing and payment of permits, licenses for construction purposes, including approval from Fire Department having jurisdiction. 10. Complete testing of all Fire Protection System in accordance with the Fire Code of the Philippines. 11. One-year warranty of trouble free operation, test and maintenance of the complete work. 12. Submission of as-built drawing in reproducible sheets including two (2) white print copies at no cost to the Owner (s).
1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
The following items of works will be supplied and done by others.
1. All civil cutting and patching shall be by the General Contractor, except as specifically modified herein.
2. Construction of the reinforced concrete water and fire storage reservoir including elevated tanks.
1.03 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES
A. The work covered in this contract is o be installed according to the specifications, codes, ordinances and requirements of the following:
1. Fire Code of the Philippines 2. National Plumbing Code of the Philippines 3. Fire Department Ordinances of Cebu City B. All construction permit and fees required for the work shall be obtained by and at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect, the Engineer and the Owner final certificates of inspection and approval from the proper government authorities after the completion of the work. C. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary allowances, pay royalties, etc. in connection with the use of any patented device or system and shall save the Owner harmless from any claim or lawsuit arising from such use. D. Prospective contractor shall be accredited and licensed by City Government to Install Fire Protection System as per City Ordinance requirement.
1.04 ACCEPTANCE TESTS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Acceptance of the work shall be conditioned on successful tests of the Entire system.
B. Test requirement laid out in the standards for the installation of sprinkler system shall be performed prior to the approval of the work.
C. Isolated leak tests or partial tests of areas may be performed prior to installation of ceiling materials in the area to preclude any damage there at during total system final tests.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a written statement to the effect that the work covered by the Contract has been completed and tested, before requesting for an approval of the installation by the Fire Department Authority.
2.0 WORKMANSHIP AND COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHERS
A. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the work of any manufacturer or sub-contractor supplying materials to or performing work for, as it is intended that the entire Fire Protection System shall be ready in every respect for satisfactory and efficient operation when finally delivered to the Owners.
B. The Contractor shall assume, full responsibility and shall provide the services of a qualified Engineer to supervise the complete installation of equipment and to conduct the final acceptance tests.
C. The work throughout shall be executed in the most thorough and satisfactory manner in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
3.0 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Type: Standard dia. orifice, bulb type, upright, pendent or sidewall heads. Pendent heads shall be provided with aluminum escutcheon or approved equivalent to fit into ceiling boards or ceiling runners. Heads shall be approved, of one band all throughout and shall be standard product of a reputable manufacturer.
B. Head Rating and Type: Convention centers, Corridors and break-up rooms Standard diameter orifice type Chrome Plated Sprinklers rating 70 degree C or use in max. ceiling temp. of 100 degree F.
C. Pipe Thread and Valve Seat diameter nominal
D. Furnish spare heads as required in the code and maintenance service part list for a period of at least one (1) year reckoned from the date after termination of Warranty.
4.0 FIRE HOSE CABINETS
A. Hose and valve assembly as locally manufactures Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Hose Nozzle Rack Angle Valve
40 mm diameter, 30.0 Single Jacket Straight Nozzle 40 mm diameter Semi-automatic 40 mm diameter, 100m water pressure, provide with nipple and union patent
Hose Nipple
Standard
B. Cabinet full flush or surface mounting door with aluminum for all glass place, frame and box shall be no. 20 gauge steel with white interior backed enamel finishes over primer. Cabinet size shall be containing the above components.
5.0 PIPING - GENERAL
A. Black iron pipes, must be schedule 40
B. Black iron, schedule 40 pipes, for inside building installation (feed mains, cross mains and branch lines)
C. All side piping shall be installed by means of screwed or flanged fittings
D. Welding if possible shall be shop welding only and shall be done by electric arc welding process. However field welding shall be done with utmost care for safety.
6.0 FITTING - GENERAL
A. Sprinkler system fittings shall be GI for sizes below 50mm and BI for longer sizes. Whenever change in pipe is made, one piece of reducer/increaser fitting shall be used.
B. All fittings shall be of malleable iron fittings, BI or GI.
C. Steel pipe flanges mating with steel equipment flanges shall have the same facing as mating flange.
D. Screwed union and fittings shall not be used on pipes larger than 50 mm (2)
7.0 VALVES - GENERAL
A. All valves shall be of the same manufacture for each class of piping and as much as possible, for the entire project. Valves shall permanently bear affixed stamp or tag indicating manufacturer, catalog number, pressure and temperature ratings of gate valve, angle valves, check valves, pressure relief with all cast iron body with bronze trim. B. Furnish all valves and accessories materials necessary for piping not shown on drawings as follows: a. Vents and drains for equipment to which piping connections are made. b. Temporary valves and accessories required for placing equipment into initial service. c. Piping 50 mm (20) and smaller required for proper operation of piping system and equipment, including drain valves required to drain all low points in piping.
C. Valve seats shall be renewable except for forged steel and high pressure cast steel valves where manufacturers standard is integral seats. D. All valves floor control shall be OSY or rising type valves.
8.0 SWAY BRACES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Sway Bracing: Steel flat bars, structural grade 5 minimum thickness, with corrosion protection; shape/type as shown on plans. B. Pipe Hangers; Steel flat bars, structural grade 5 mm minimum thickness, with corrosion protection, shape as shown on plans and 7 mm diameter bars with corrosion protection as shown on plans. C. Sway Bracings Installation a. Adequate sway bracing shall be provided to oppose longitudinal or transverse pipe movements. b. Lateral bracing shall withstand a force equal to 50% of the weight on the water contain in piping valves and fittings. c. Piping anchorages shall not be secured on two (2) dissimilar parts of the building, which will move differently.
D. Hangers Installation 1. Approved inserts may be used for the support of hangers, anchorages in concrete. Expansion shield should be used in a horizontal position on the sides of concrete beams and shall be above the bottom reinforcements.
2. Increaser couplings shall be attached immediately adjacent to the expansion shields. 3. When pipes 100 mm diameter and larger are supported in the vertical position, the supports shall be at minimum spacing of 3.0 meters (10) on center. Holes in concrete for expansion shield shall be made on the proper size and depth, as specified for the type of shield used, to provide a uniform contact with the shield over its entire length and circumferences. 4. Maximum distance between hangers shall be 3.65 meters (12) for size mm (1). Provide at least one hanger for each length of branch line one between each two cross main branches, one hanger for each 4.75 meters (15) length of feed mains. The distance between the hanger and the center line of upright sprinkler shall not be less than 76 mm (3).
E. Support on Risers Risers shall be adequately supported either by attachments directly to the riser or by hangers located on the horizontal connections close to the risers. Supports shall be provided at the ground level and at each third level and at the top most level of the riser.
9.0 PIPE SLEEVES
A. MATERIALS: 1. Through fittings BI or PVC
B. INSTALLATION 1. Minimum clearance between the pipe and sleeve shall not be less than 25 mm (1) for pipes, 25 mm (1) to 89 mm (3-1/2) and 50 mm (2) clearance between pipes 100 mm (4) and larger. The clearance between pipes and sleeves shall be filled with noncombustible flexible materials such as asbestos rope and furnished with semi-hardening mastic flush. 2. Floor sleeves shall be extended at least 76 mm (3) above the top of the wearing surface. 3. Drains, fire department connections, test manifolds and other auxiliary piping connected to risers shall not be cemented in walls or floors.
10.0 PIPE PAINTING Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Sprinkler heads, valve stems and the like shall not be painted. B. After installation and test and before the installation of ceiling fixtures or boards, all pipings shall be prime painted and coated with two coats of gloss red quick drying enamel.
11.0 FLOOR CONTROL VALVES AND WATER FLOW SWITCHES OR DETECTORS
A. Flow switches with sizes indicated on the plans shall be provided with two (2) N.O. electrical contacts that will close instantaneously with steady flow of water in the pipe and shall be complete with tamper proof terminal chamber with minimum of diameter conduit. False alarm shall be actuated only by an adjustable pneumatic device to retard the unidirectional flow of water. Electrical connections from these devices shall be done by the Electrical Contractors. B. The alarm apparatus shall be substantially supported, located and installed so that all parts shall be readily accessible for inspection, removal and repair.
C. An actual water flow, through the use of the test connection, shall be employed to test the operation of the sprinkler alarm units in each floor or as a whole.
12.0 MARKERS, INSTRUCTION & INDENTIFICATION SIGNBOARD
These signboards shall be made of gauge no. 14 black iron sheet with baked enamel finish and letter instruction as shown on the plans. Additional signboards shall be mounted on the unobstructed for easy identification reading. Paints shall be basically gloss fire red and white.
13.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. The Contractor shall conduct tests in the presence of inspector or Authority having jurisdiction (Cebu Fire Department Inspector) B. To remove foreign materials which may have entered the piping during installation of same, flushing required before sprinkler piping is connected. C. Hydrostatic Tests: 1. Test pressure not less than 150 psi on system pressure plus 50 psig for two hours. 2. No visible leakage for inside sprinkler piping will be allowed. For underground mains and laid-ins, exceeding the permissible leakage or joints necessary repair shall be made. 3. All control valve water pressure to insure proper operating tests. clean, non-corrosive water. 4. Fire connection shall be tested. D. Testing of drainage facilities shall be made by opening the main Drain valve while the control valve is wide open. Use
E. Test certificate shall be filled out and signed by the Owners and Contractors representative. F. System operations and maintenance chart shall be submitted to the Owners upon completion of the Contract. This shall include, among others, the locations of the control valves and care of the new equipment.
14.0 MINOR MODIFICATIONS AND TIME COMPLETION
A. The plans as drawing should show conditions as accurately as it is possible to indicate them in scale. The plans are diagrammatical and do not necessarily show all fittings, etc. necessary to fit the building conditions. The locations of valves, fittings and the fixture shown on the plans are approximate. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location in order to make them fir with the architectural details and instructions.
B. The Contractor shall complete the work herein described in accordance with the specific schedules set by the Owners in accordance with General Contractors Schedule of work. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
15.0 GUARANTEE
1. The Contractor shall guarantee that the installed sprinkler system complies with the requirements of the authorities and free from all defective workmanship and materials and will remain so, for a period of one (1) year from the date to final inspections and acceptance of the work. Any defect appearing within one year shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. The Contractor shall indentify and save the Owner, the Architect and the Consulting Engineer harmless from and against all liabilities for damage to property occasioned by any or omission of the Contractor on any of the Subcontractors, including any and all expenses, legal or otherwise which may be insured by the Owner, the Architect or the Consulting Engineer in the defense of any claims, actions or suits.
BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The General Conditions apply to all work under this section of the Specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor or his subcontractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, apparatus, appliances, accessories, transportation, labor and supervision required for the complete installation and testing of the Plumbing System ready for use in accordance with the best practice of the Plumbing Trade as listed herein but not limited to the following:
1. The Plumbing Contractor is required to refer to all Architectural. Structural, Mechanical, Fire Protection, and Electrical plans and investigate all possible interference and conditions affecting his work. 2. All work shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the Plumbing code of the concerned city, the Code on Sanitation of the Phil., and/or the National Plumbing Code of the Philippines. 3. Tapping from an existing water main of the building distribution system to include supply and installation of main water and gate valve. 4. Water supply and distribution system for the building and ground. 5. All building sanitary drains, waste and venting systems including floor drains. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
6. Sewage collection and disposal system including cleanouts up to septic tanks or service sewer line. 7. Building storm drainage system including deck and roof drains, canopy drains, plant boxes drains, catch basin and connection to street drainage. 8. Kitchen waste and vent system. 9. Supply and installation of all plumbing fixtures, fittings, trims and accessories. 10. Supply and installation of transfer pumps, sump pumps and fire pump, water heater and grease traps. 11. Supply and installation of fire water lines, valves, fire hose cabinets, dry stand pipe and fire department connection including for table fire extinguishers. 12. Testing for leakages of all storm drainage, waste, sewer and venting system plus pressure testing and disinfection of the water supply and distribution system. 13. Securing of all permits and licenses as required to include water connection. 14. Excavation and backfilling in connection with the work shall be included.
15. Preparation and submittal of two (2) sets of As-built plans and one (1) set of reproducible prints. 16. Furnishing of written one (1) year warranty on the plumbing system.
1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Construction of septic tank sump pit and cistem shall be by Civil Works. B. All electrical power wirings, except that furnished as an integral part of factory assembled except as otherwise specified herein. C. Painting except as required by the Plumbing Code and as specified herein. D. Deepwell drilling and construction to include deepwell pump and related works. (If required) E. Construction of elevated water tanks. (Owner furnished)
1.04 NOTES ON DRAWINGS
A. The drawings show the general arrangement all pipings. However, where local and/or actual conditions at the jobsite necessitate or rearrangement, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the new arrangement for the Architects approval. B. Small scale Drawings do not possibly indicate all offsets, fittings and other parts of the system required. The Contractor shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps valves and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.
1.05 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES
A. The work covered in this contract is to be installed according to the specs, codes ordinances and requirements of the following: 1. National Plumbing Code of the Philippines 2. The Code on Sanitation of the Philippines 3. National Pollution Control Commission Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
4. Ordinances of concerned city or municipality B. All construction permits and fees required for the work shall be obtained by and at the expense of the contractor. The contractor shall furnish the Owner with final certificates of inspection after the completion of work.
1.06 WORKMANSHIP & COORDINATION WITH TRADES
A. All work shall be performed in first class and neat workmanship by mechanics skilled in their trades and such mechanics and their work shall be satisfactory to the Engineer. B. The Plumbing Contractor is required to refer to the General Conditions and to all Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical and Fire Protection plans and shall investigate all possible interference and conditions affecting his work.
2.0 PRODUCT
2.01 GENERAL
A. Except as specified, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineers approval, four (4) copies of a complete list of manufacturers name of all equipment and materials he proposes to use, within thirty (30) days after award of contract. B. The Contractor shall assume the cost of and the entire responsibility for any change in the work shown on contract drawings which may be occasioned by approval of materials other than those specified.
2.02 PIPES AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE
A. Cold and Hot Water Lines All exposed pipes to weather shall be Galvanized Iron G.I. pipe schedule 40 similar Apo or Supreme pipes with epoxy coating. Pump discharge riser shall be Galvanized Iron G.I. pipe schedule 40 similar Apo or Supreme pipes. All unexposed pipes for hot and cold water supply shall be Polypropylene Pipe PN 20 by Bugatti Pipe or approved equal. B. Sewer Line shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, Emerald brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement joint conforming to ASTM D2564. C. Waste Line shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, Emerald brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement joint conforming to ASTM D 2564. D. Exposed soil, waste and vent stack shall be cast iron pipe, extra heavy. E. Vent Pipes shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, series 1000 II, Emerald, brand or equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement joint to ASTM D 2564. F. Downspout shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, Emerald brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement joint conforming to ASTM D2564. G. Storm Drainage shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe series 1000 II, Emerald brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be solvent cement joint conforming to ASTM D25640. H. For outside building, concrete drain pipe (CDP), tongue and groove, mortar joints, reinforced for 300 mm diameter and larger. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2.03 VALVES
A. Gate Valve 65 mm and smaller, shall be rising stem, all bronze, female threaded, min. of 150 psig working connection. Approved model, Bermad, Kitz, or approved equal. B. Check Valve 65 mm and smaller, same except female threaded connection. Approved model Bermad, Kits or approved equal
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Drains ASA, METMA, as indicated or approved equal. 1. Roof 2. Floor 3. Deck 4. Canopy 5. Trench Drain 6. Cleanout M-319-16, ASA or equal M-210, ASA or equal M-319-36, ASA or equal M-319-34, ASA or equal M-319-34, ASA or equal M-240, ASA or equal
B. Water Meter (size as indicated on the plans) Badger or approved by MWSS for main meter. C. Hose Bibb 20mm standard hose connection, male tapered threads, polished chromium plated. D. Outdoor Pipe Lines Appurtenances
E. Drainage Junction Boxes 140 kg/sq.c.m. reinforced concrete with pre-cast reinforced concrete cover. 1. Thrust Blocks 140 kg/sg. c.m. plain concrete 2. Sewer Junctions Boxes 140 kg/sg. reinforced concrete with C.I. grating cover. 3. Area Drain/Catch Basin 140 kg/sg. reinforced concrete with C.J. grating cover.
2.05 JOINTING
A. Flanged Joint Gasket GARLOCK OR EQUAL B. Screwed Joints U.S. Federal Specifications GG P-251 C. PVC Pipes and Fittings PVC cement or as per the Manufacturers recommendations. D. Dissimilar Pipes Adaptor fittings shall be used. E. Concrete Drain Pipe Cement mortar
3.0 IDENTIFICATIONS & APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Each length of pipe, fittings, traps, fixtures and device used in the Plumbing System shall have cast, stamped or marked on it, the manufacturers trade mark or name, the weight, type and classes of product when so required by the Standard. B. Within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the Architects approval, the names and/or samples of the materials if deemed necessary. C. Brand names mentioned in this Specifications are only for the purposes of indicating the desired quality and design. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
4.0 SUBSTITUTION & TESTING OF MATERIALS
A. Materials intended to be substituted for those originally specified shall be accepted only after a formal request for substitution, accompanied by: 1. Reasons for substitutions 2. Certificate of test indicating quality, compared to those originally specified. 3. Cost comparisons with material originally specified. Request shall be submitted to the Architect for evaluation at least 15 working days before installation of subject materials is due, or at least 7 days before opening of bids. B. Cost of testing of materials, whether on originally specified items or on substitutions, shall be to the account of the Contractor C. Results of tests shall be submitted to the Architect for evaluation at least 15 days before the material is due for installation on the job.
5.0 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPES
5.01 GENERAL
A. Underground soil, waste and water pipes and fittings shall be PVC pipes, unless specifically noted. Soil and waste pipes above ground shall be PVC pipes. Vent pipes shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe. Fittings for pipings above ground shall be drainage pattern. Fittings for piping on all dry vents shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe. All exposed stack shall be cast iron soil pipes, extra heavy grade. B. All cast iron soil and drainage pipes shall be pitched 6mm per 300 mm but in no case flatter than 3mm per 300mm.
5.02 TRAPS
A. Every plumbing fixtures shall be separately trapped by a vented water sealed trap as close to the fixture outlets as the conditions allow, but in no case at a distance greater than 600 mm. In case of the upper or the only fixture on a soil pipe extended full size through the roof, a vent shall not be required when said fixture has its center stack. Traps shall be of the same diameter as the waste pipes from the fixtures which they shall serve, all traps have a water seal of at least 32 millimeters with a brass thumbscrew cleanout at the bottom of the seal.
5.03 VENT
A. Vent shall be taken from the crown of the fixtures, except for water closet traps, in which case, the branch line shall be vented below and trap and above all small waste inlets, so connected as to prevent obstructions. Each vent pipe shall be run separately above the fixtures into the adjacent soil pipes, a distance not more than 1.50 meters. If more than this distance, the vent shall run immediately through the roof. B. A vent line shall be wherever practicable, direct extension of a soil or waste line. C. Main vent risers at 4.5 meters along or more shall be connected at the foot with the main water or soil pipes below the lowest vent outlet with a forty five degree (45) connection. D. All vertical soil or vent pipes shall be carried up at least 600 mm above the roof of the building and the open side ends are to be entirely and securely covered with ga. 16 mesh copper cloth.
E. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to be underside of roof with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps. Where an end or circuit vent pipe from fixtures it shall be connected into the main vent or vent stack.
5.04 ROUGHING-IN
A. Roughing-in for pipes and fixtures shall be carried along with the building construction. Correctly located openings of proper sizes shall be provided where required in the walls and floors for the passage of pipes all items to be embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly clean and free from all rust, scale and paint.
5.05 FITTINGS
A. All changes in pipes sizes on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings or reducers. All changes in direction shall be made by the appropriated use of forty five degree (45) wyes, or long sweep bends, except that sanitary fees may be used on vertical stacks. Short quarter bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in directions is from the horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge from the water closet.
5.06 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. All joints shall be air water tight. For joining pipes, the following shall be used.
1. Galvanized wrought iron and steel pipe, screwed or threaded joints, use sealant. 2. Concrete pipes: bell and spigot or tongue and groove Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes, socket type with PVC cement.
6.0 WATER DISTRIBUTION
6.01 METER
A. Water meter shall be furnished by the Contractor and installed with the proper and complete piping arrangements for the system. B. The exact dimensions for setting the meter shall be as per requirements of the Metropolitan Waterworks and Sewerage System (MWSS)
6.02 INSTALLATION
A. The pipings shall be extended to all fixtures, outlets and equipment from the gate valves installed in the branch near the riser. B. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection C. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements and shall be worked into place without springing of facing. Care shall be taken so as not to weaken the structural portions of the building.
D. All service pipes valves and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from work to permit finished covering not less than 15mm from such work or from finished covering on the different service. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
E. Changes in pipes shall be made with reducing fittings. F. Accessible Contraction Expansion joins shall be made wherein necessary. Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m in length shall be anchored to wall or the supporting structure about midway on the run to force expansion and contraction equally towards the ends.
7.0 EXCAVATING, PIPE AND BACKFILLING
7.01 TRENCHES
A. Trenches for and grades. solid ground extend to a materials.
all underground pipe lines shall be excavated to the required depths Bell holes shall be provided so that the pipe will rest on well-tamped for its entire length. Where rock is encountered, excavation shall depth 150mm below the pipe bottom and other approved filling
7.02 CONCRETE PROTECTION
A. All pipes except concrete pipes and cast iron will run underground shall be protected with Class B concrete casing, a minimum or 100 mm around the pipe perimeter and 250 mm below the finish grade.
7.03 MATERIALS
A. Materials for backfilling shall be free of debris or big rocks. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, properly moistened and comparted to an optimum density that will prevent excessive settlement and shrinkage.
8.0 MISCELLANEOUS
8.01 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanout shall be of the same size as the pipe, the location of which is extended to an easily accessible place.
8.02 TRAPS
A. Every plumbing fixtures of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. B. Each trap shall be placed as near as possible to the fixture. No fixture shall be double-trapped.
8.03 VALVES AND HOSE BIBBS
A. Valves shall be provided on all water supplies to fixtures as specified. B. Hose bibs shall be made of brass with 15mm make male inlet threads hexagon shoulders and 20mm connections. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
8.04 PIPE HANGERS INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Horizontal runs of pipe shall be hung with adjustable wrought iron or malleable iron pipe hangers spaced not over 3m apart, except huh and spigot soil pipes which shall have hangers spaced not over 12.52 m apart and located near the huh. B. Hangers shall have short turn buckles or other approved means of adjustment. C. Inserts shall be of cast steel and shall be of type to received a machine bolt or nut after installation. D. Vertical runs of pipe shall be supported by wrought iron clamps or collars spared not more than 9m apart. E. Water and Vent Pipes 65 mm and larger, band type 6.4 mm x 25 mm flat mild steel or black iron with 15mm round rod with plates and nuts; 50 mm and smaller split ring type with 10 mm iron rods with inserts plates; toggle bolts, clamps or expansion shield.
8.05 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at all joints where pipes pass through masonry or concrete. B. Pipe sleeves shall be sufficient diameter to provide approximately 6.4mm clearance around the pipe of insulation. C. Pipe sleeves in walls and partitions shall be of cast iron, wrought iron steel. Pipe sleeves in concrete beams or concrete slabs shall be wrought iron or steel pipe. D. Pipe sleeves on footings shall be cast iron or steel and shall be not less than 100 mm larger in diameter than the pipe to be installed.
E. Where pipe pass through waterproofing membrane, the sleeves shall be provided with an integral flange or clamping device to which a flashing shield can be soldered. F. The space between the pipes and sleeves shall be made water tight by inserting a picked oakum gasket and filling the remaining space with poured lead caulking thoroughly.
9.0 SITE PLUMBING UTILITIES
9.01 GENERAL
A. The entire site plumbing utilities system shall be laid out and installed consistent throughout with the given slopes in the plans. Pipe joints and connections to area drains, catch basing, and junction boxes shall possess such leak-proof and seepage-proof integrity achievable with the works called for under this particular section of the Specifications.
B. Junction Boxes for storm and sanitary (sewer) drainage lines outside the building shall be cast-in place reinforced concrete sections and pre-cast concrete over. C. Trench excavation and backfilling shall be as specified in excavation, trenching and backfilling for utility system. D. Concrete Drainage Pipe: 1. Material, Pipe shall be reinforced concrete pipe (300 mm dia. and larger) and non-reinforced concrete pipe 250 mm dia. and smaller conforming to ASTM C-14-75. 2. Installation: Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
a. Bedding surfaces shall provide a firm foundation, carefully shaped true to line and grade. b. Concrete pipe shall be laid carefully with hobs upgrade and ends fully and closely joints. Joints shall be cement mortar. Cement mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement and 1-1/2 parts clean sharp sand with only enough water for work-ability. A gasket of closely twisted hemp or oakum shall be placed around the pipe. A gasket shall be in one (1) piece of suitable diameter (not less than 19 mm) and shall be lapped at the top. The gasket shall be saturated. With that cement before being placed and rammed. The joint shall be completely filled with cement mortar and rammed thoroughly with a wooden caulking tool. The joint shall then be overfilled and finished to a smooth level outside.
9.02 EXCAVATION FOR STORM & SANITARY (SEWER DRAINAGE SYSTEM) A. General: The Contractor shall do all excavation of whatever substances encountered below depth shown on drawings. Excavated materials not required for fill or backfill shall be removed from site as directed by the Engineer and disposed of by the Contractor. Excavation for accessories to have 300 mm minimum clearance in all side. Excavation shall not carried below the required depth. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at the Contractors expense with earth sand, gravel or concrete, as directed by Engineer, and thoroughly tamped unstable soil and shall be removed and replaced with gravel or crushed stone, which shall be thoroughly tamped. The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal of unstable soil. Ground adjacent to all excavation shall be graded to prevent water running. The contractor shall removed by pumping or other means approved by the Engineer any water accumulated in excavation and keep trench unwatered until the bedding is complete. B. Trench Excavation. Banks of trenches shall be vertical. Soft materials shall be reported to the Engineer. In rock, excavation shall be carried 200mm below bottom of pipe. Loose earth or gravel shall be used for backfill, and tapped thoroughly and rounded to received pipe as above.
C. Bracing and Shoring. The Contractor shall do all bracing sheathing and shoring necessary to perform and protect all excavation as indicated on the plans, as required for safety, as directed by the Architect, or to conform to governing laws.
9.03 BACKFILLING
A. Backfilling: After pipes have been tested and approved, backfilling shall be done with approved material free for large clods or stones. 1. Trenches. Backfill material shall be placed evenly and carefully around and over pipe in 150mm maximum layers. Each layer shall be thoroughly and carefully rammed until 300 mm of cover exits over pipe. The remainder of backfill material shall be placed, moistened and compacted. Water settling will not be permitted in clay soils. It may be required at the option of the Engineer in sandy soils. 2. Trench under areas to be paved. Material shall be placed in 200mm maximum layers after filling 300 mm above pipe as previously described. Each player shall be compacted to density equal to that of adjacent original material so that pavement can be placed immediately. 3. Structures. All forms, trash, and debris shall be removed and cleared away. Approved backfill material may be form excavation or borrow, it shall be free from rock, lumber or debris. Backfill material shall be placed symmetrically on all sided in eight inch maximum layers. Each player shall be moistened and compacted with mechanicals or hand tampers. In area to be paved, each player shall be compacted to density equal to that of adjacent materials so that pavement can be placed immediately. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Maintenance. The Contractor shall refill for settlement all backfilled areas. C. Clean-up. The Contractor shall clean up and dispose of all excess materials, trash, wood forms and other debris.
10.00 TEST AND DISINFECTION
10.01 DRAINAGE SYSTEM TEST
A. The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings which can be plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest stack vent/or vent stack above the roof. B. The system shall hold this water for a full thirty 120 minutes during which time there shall be no drop more than 100mm. C. Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation shall be applied by means of satisfactory to the Architect. During the filling of the pipe in and before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. To accomplish this type shall be made if necessary, at point of highest elevation, and after completion of the test taps shall be tightly plugged unless otherwise specified. D. During the test, all expose pipes, fittings, valves joints and couplings will be carefully examined. If found to be cracked or detective, they shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound materials at his own expense. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results has been obtained.
10.02 PRESSURE TESTS FOR WATER LINES
A. After the pipe have been installed, the joints completed and with joints exposed for examination, all newly installed pipe or any valve section therefore, shall be subjected to hydrostatic pressure 1 the designed working pressure of the system or as specified by the Architect. B. The duration of each pressure test shall be at least 120 minutes unless otherwise specified the Architect. C. Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. During the filling of the pipe and before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. To accomplish this type shall be made, if necessary, at point of highest elevation, and after completion of the test the taps shall be tightly plugged unless otherwise specified. D. During the test, all exposed pipes, fittings, valves, joints and couplings will be carefully examined. If found to be cracked of defective, they shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound materials at his expenses. The test shall then be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
10.03 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. If the inspection or test shows any defect, such defective work or materials shall be replaced and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Architect. B. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials at the expense of the Contractor. C. No caulking of screwed joints of holes will be accepted. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
10.04 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND WATER TANKS (as per AWWA C-601)
A. The entire water system shall be thoroughly flushed and disinfected with chlorine before it is placed on operation. Water tanks shall be washed and swabbed. B. Chlorination materials shall be liquid chlorine or hyprochlorite, as specified and shall be introduced into the water lines in a manner approved by the Engineer. Tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned of all debris, dirt or dust before swabbing. C. The chlorine dosage shall be such as to provide not less than fifty parts per million (50ppm) or available chlorine. D. Following a contact period of not less than sixteen (16) hours, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than two length (0.20 ppm). All valves in water lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the 16 hour chlorinating period.
11.0 CLEANING
A. All exposed metal surfaces shall be free of grease, dirt or other foreign materials. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Chrome or nickel plated pipings, fittings and trimmings shall be polished upon completion. C. All plumbing fixtures shall be properly protected from use and damage during the construction stage. The fixtures shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect upon completion and prior to acceptance of work. D. All equipment, pips, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease and sludge which may have accumulated. Any clogging, discoloration or damage to other parts of the building due to the system shall be repaired by the Contractor.
12.0 PAINTING AND PROTECTION
A. All exterior of pipings to be installed in or through concrete floor fill of fill floors and underground shall be given one coat of acid resisting paint having a bituminous base. B. Pipe hanger supports and all other iron work in concealed spaces shall be painted with one of asphalt. C. Exposed galvanized iron pipes and fittings that are asphalt coated shall be given two coats of shellac prior to application of two coasts of oil paint directed by the Architect of his authorized representative.
13.0 COLOR CODE FOR EXPOSED PIPES
A. All exposed pipings shall be adequately and durably identified by distinctive colored paints as follows: ITEM Cold Water Pipe Storm Water Pipe Sewage Pipe Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor COLOR CODE Blue Aluminum Black
Vent Pipe Waste Pipe Fire Line
Green Gray Red
14.0 WARRANTY & AS-BUILT PLANS
A. All works, equipment and fixtures shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for satisfactory for a minimum period for one (1) year. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in reproducible form plus three (3) sets of white prints, the complete plans of the entire system as actually built. The cost of those shall be borne by the Contractor. Submi ttal of AS BUILT Plans shall be a condition to final payment. C. Equipment that should have the Owner(s) your minimum guaranteed against defective designs, materials and workmanship.
15.0 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The general Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination among the different trades on the job in order to finish the work in the least possible time, in strict accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 1. Throughout the construction period open ends of all installed pipe lines shall be kept closed by temporary plugs. 2. Drainage lines shall not be used to conduct dirty construction wash water especially those with cement mixes to avoid possible clogging. 3. A temporary fire protection system shall be provided by the Contractor during the construction period. This shall be of sufficient capacity to put our any fire that may brake out at any floors due to construction operations. This is in addition to temporary fire extinguisher required. 4. A temporary potable water supply shall be made available to construction workers at every floor as construction progresses. 5. A temporary human excreta disposal system shall be provided by the Contractor to serve the workers during the contraction period.
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
Obtain approval by the Architect/Engineer before procurement, fabrication or delivery of items to the job site. Submittals shall include the manufacturers name, trade name, place of manufacture, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, ratings and capacity.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS DATA
1. Conduit and Fittings 2. Outlet boxes 3. Wires and Cables 4. Electrical Insulating Tapes 5. Receptacles 6. Light Switches 7. Device plates 8. Circuit Breakers 9. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) 10. Safety and Disconnect Switch Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
11. Lighting Fixtures including components 12. Other components not indicated or specified in the plans
1.03 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor with the concurrence of the project engineer shall mark with colored pencils on electrical plans all the revisions, additions, and/or deletions to various electrical installation drawings as the construction progresses.
B. Before the final payment to the contractor is made by the owner, the contractor shall prepare and submit to the owner the originals and four (4) sets of prints of the complete as-built drawings incorporating all the changes made during the period of installation for use in the future references and maintenance purposes.
C. Review Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, and other phases of work to ensure that no conflict arises between electrical and any such phases of work.
D. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager in writing of any discrepancies in or among drawings and specifications.
E. Coordinate with electric utility company regarding policies and connection.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORKS
Furnish labor, tools, equipment, materials, engineering supervision and facilities necessary to perform and complete the electrical installation, including testing and commissioning of the entire electrical system installed in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications.
3.0 COMPONENTS
3.01 CONDUITS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) and Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) shall be standard weight, mild steel, hot dip galvanized or sherardized with zinc-coated interior, threaded type and not smaller than 13mm (1/2-inch) nominal diameter, ANSI C80.1 B. Rigid Plastic Conduit: UL 561 Schedule 40 PVC
3.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS
Fittings for RSC shall be threaded type. Ferrous fittings shall be caduim or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514
3.03 CONDUIT STRAP: Conduit strap shall be malleable iron types.
3.04 OUTLET BOXES Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Boxes shall be deep type, gauge 16
B. Outlet and junction boxes for indoor installation shall be pressed steel Ga. 16 galvanized 51mm minimum depth with size as indicated on drawings.
C. Outlet and junction boxes for outdoor exposed installation and wire locations shall be cast iron conduit type with gasket cover.
3.05 600 VOLT WIRES AND CABLES
A. The 600 volt wires and cables shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for the type of insulation, jacket and conductor specified or indicated.
B. Conductors 5.5 mm sq. and smaller shall be stranded and those 8 mm sq. larger shall be stranded.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, conductor sizes shown are based on copper.
D. Unless NFPA 70, all power and lighting wires shall be 600 volt, type THHN, remote control and signal circuit maybe Type TFN.
E. All cables and wire to be used shall be approved by the Electrical Engineer / Architect Owners Representative.
3.06 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
Manholes and hand holes are constructed as per their dimensions shown in the drawings. The conduits that terminate in the manholes and hand holes shall be provided with appropriate size end bells.
3.07 CABINETS AND PULL BOXES: UL50, hot dip zinc-coated if of sheet metal Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.08 PANEL BOARDS
A. All panel boards shall comply with NEMA standards.
B. Panel board Buses: Provide copper bus. Support bus bars on bases independent of the circuit breakers.
C. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may change without matching, drilling or tapping.
D. Provide an isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors.
E. Provide a separate ground bus marked with green stripe along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet for type of conductor provided.
F. ACU out for split type must be NEMA 3R.
3.09 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breakers shall be ambient compensated thermal magnetic type with interrupting capacity as indicated. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided (SQUARE D or ABB, or Equivalent).
3.10 MULTIPLE BREAKERS
A. Breaker design shall be such that an overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
B. Maintain phase sequence throughout each phase so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phase A, B Ground, respectively.
3.11 RECEPTACLES
Receptacles shall be parallel blade grounding type rated 240 volts, 10 amperes. (CLIPSAL), National or Equivalent.
3.12 LIGHT SWITCHES
A. Light switches shall be quietmatic type rated 240 volts, 10 amperes, (CLIPSAL or equivalent)
B. DIMMER switch shall be rated at 800 watts, (CLIPSAL or equivalent)\
3.13 DEVICE PLATES
Device plates shall be of the same manufacturer of above described receptacles and light switches to match the respective devices.
3.14 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
1. FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES: UL 1570, except lighting fixtures for damp and wet locations which shall conform to UL 57. 1. Fluorescent Lamps a. Provide the number, type, and wattage as indicated on the drawings. b. All fluorescent lamps shall be provided with retainer for safety or using the spring type fluorescent holder. 2. Fluorescent Ballast a. All fluorescent ballasts shall conform to UL ANSI C82.1 b. All fluorescent ballasts shall be labeled Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) certified by Electrical Testing (ETL). Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
c.
All fluorescent ballasts shall be Electronic Ballasts type unless indicated otherwise and shall be designed to operate on the frequency and voltage system to which they are connected.
3. Fixtures and ballasts shall be designed and contracted to limit the ballast case temperature to 90 degrees Celsius when installed in an ambient temperature of 40 degree Celsius. 2. OTHER LIGHT FIXTURES: UL 1570, except lighting fixtures for damp and wet locations which shall conform to UL 57. 1. Chalice Type 18 watt Compact Fluorescent Lamp, recessed down light of poppy carbonate construction compact fluorescent lamps worth gold or silver aluminum 180 mm reflector. 2. Compact Fluorescent Lamps shall be shallow fully recessed, modular type rated at 36W, rapid start, high power factor ballast, mild steel body, stove enameled high reflectivity white paint. a. Reflector shall be low iridescent specula aluminum. b. Diffusers shall be polystyrene and acrylic in white painted aluminum frames. 3. Garden Lighting System: a. SON lamp 150W, side entry lantern for tubular SON lamp b. Integral control gear mounted on cast LM6 alloy end support with white GRP canopy. 4. All Other Lighting fixtures shall be subject for approval of the ARCHITECT.
3.15 MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARD
A. The main distribution panel board shall be metal enclosed under NEMA CLASS, free standing, complete with standard metering devices, with copper bus bars rated equivalent to the circuit breaker capacity ratings.
B. All circuit breakers shall be rated to its ampere frame and ampere trip capacity with the corresponding interrupting rating at 240 volts.
3.16 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. The automatic transfer switch shall be Contractor type MECHANICALLY INTERLOCKED, and with interrupting rating sufficient for the voltage employed and the available short circuit at the point of application.
B. The automatic transfer switch may also be operated manually.
C. The automatic transfer switch shall be supplied by the genset supplier to maintain system compatibility and local service responsibility for the complete standby power.
4.0 EXECUTION
4.01 INTENT
A. It is not intended that the drawings shall show every conduit, fitting and pull box. All such items whether mentioned or not in the drawings shall be furnished and installed if necessary to complete the system and leave ready for use in accordance with the best practice of the trade and the applicable provisions of the Philippine Electrical Code.
B. All dimensions and locations of fixtures, equipment, floor, wall, and ceiling outlets and conduit route shall be verified on the Architectural drawings and other drawing of related trade.
4.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. Execute work in the best manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Owner and / or Project Manager who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the prior to reject any work and materials which is in their judgment are not in full accordance therewith.
4.03 WIRING METHODS
Wires shall be insulated conductors installed in conduit, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise, or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. An insulated Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
equipment-grounding conductor shall be provided in all feeder and branch circuits, including lighting circuits.
4.04 CONDUITS
A. Conduit Support:
1. Support by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. 2. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts in concrete; by machine crews, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C clamps may be used in rigid steel conduit only. 3. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures, the load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one fourth of the proof test load. 4. Fasteners attached to concrete shall be vibration and shock resistant. Holes cut to depth of more than 42 mm in reinforced beams or to a depth of more than 19mm in concrete joints shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are used. 5. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above the ceiling and fasten only lighting system branch circuit conduits to the ceiling supports. 6. Spring steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit support in suspended ceiling in dry locations.
B. Make changes in direction if runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
C. Make field-made bends and offsets with a conduit-bending machine. D. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. E. Avoid trapped conduits.
F. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging on conduit boxes, fittings and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of all obstructions. G. Conduit installed in Concrete Floor Slabs: 1. Locate so as not to adversely affect the structural strength of the slabs, install conduit within the middle one third of the concrete slab. 2. Do not stack conduits more than two diameters high with a minimum vertical separation of 75mm. 3. Space conduits horizontally not closer than three diameters except at cabinet locations. 4. Curved portions of bends shall not be visible above the finished slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide a minimum 25mm covers over conduit. 5. Where embedded conduits cross expansion joints, provide a suitable watertight expansion fittings and bonding jumpers. 6. Conduit larger than one inch trade size shall be parallel either or at right angles to the main reinforcement; when at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit shall close to one of the support of the slab.
H. Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least a single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall be the type with sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Install bushing on the ends of the conduits and provide insulation type where required by NFPA 70.
I.
Sub-Ups:
1. Provide conduits stubbed up through floor for connection to free standing equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with the finished floor. 2. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit maybe used 150mm above the floor. 3. Where no equipment connections are made, install screw-driver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit connections.
J.
Flexible connections of short length (maximum of 2000mm) shall be provided for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration; noise transmission for movement and for all motors. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet locations. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across flexible connections.
4.05 BRANCH CIRCUITS
A. Where branch circuit is embedded in slab or concrete wall, PVC conduits can be used.
B. Minimum size shall be 20 mm diameter: NELTEX BRAND.
C. RSC conduit pipe shall be used for exposed branch circuit installations.
D. Where circuit runs are not specified in this specification and the plans, the ELECTRICAL ENGINEER shall be informed so that rectification can be dime before the actual implementation.
5.0 POWER TRANSFORMER
A. Construction 1. Transformer shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI, NEMA and IEE standard and shall be UL listed and bear the UL label.
2. Accepted brands are ABB, Siemens, Alston and Square D.
B. Type of Transformer 1. The power transformer shall be liquid filled using silicon oil. It shall be hermetically sealed.
2. The winding temperature rise shall be 65 Deg. C. The transformer shall be capable of being operated at full name plate rating in 30 Deg C average (40 Deg C max) ambient temperature without exceeding the specified winding temperature rise. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3. Transformer winding shall be made of copper. It shall be designed for low loss, high efficiency designs.
4. The transformer tank shall be designed to withstand 8 Psig as per ANSI AND NEMA standards.
5. A manually operated de-energized tap charger shall be provided for changing the primary taps and shall be capable of carrying the full transformer short circuit current without damage or contact reparation. The tap charger shall be gang operated from a single operating point and shall have a position indicator. Its operating shall include provisions for pad locking in each tap position.
5.0 TESTING A. Installation Equipment, materials, installation workmanship, by inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with NFPA publications and as modified herein. B. Preliminary Test 1. Conduct the following test during installation of wiring and system components. 2. Correct any deficiency pertaining to these requirements prior to formal function and operational tests of the system. C. Ground Resistance Measure the resistance of each connection to ground D. Detector Test
Prior to formal inspection and test, clean and perform sensitivity test on each smoke and heat detector. Clean the smoke and heat detectors in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation procedures. E. Field inspection and test 1. Before final acceptance of the work, test each system to demonstrate compliance with the contract requirement. 2. Each system shall be subjected to complete function and operational test including test in place of each smoke and heat detector. 3. When tests have been completed and corrections have been made, submit a signed and dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and test. F. Formal Inspection and Test The owners project manager / safety engineer, will witness formal test after receiving written certification that formal tests have been completed and that the system is ready for final inspection. The system manufacturers technical representative shall be present for the final inspection and test. Preliminary test shall be repeated, and function and operational test conducted as requested by the project engineer / safety engineer. Correct defects and conduct additional test to demonstrate that the system conforms to the contract specifications.
SECTION 16100 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Use only materials that are new and that conform to the standards of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. where such standards have been established for the particular type of materials in question. B. Comply all materials on all systems with the following Specifications unless specifically accepted. For materials not specified, use the best of their respective kind. C. Submit samples of materials for approval of Architect.
2.0 PRODUCTS Refer to Section 01020 Summary of Materials and Finishes.
3.0 WORKMANSHIP A. Execute the work throughout, in the best and most thorough manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Architect and Engineers, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work and material which in their judgment are not in full compliance therewith. B. Have on file for ready access and reference, a set of drawings indicating all work actually installed and incorporating all changes and additions. Upon the termination of the Contract, prepare a set of tracings indicating the final Electrical Work to be turned over to the Engineers. 3.02 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS Locate, form and provide all necessary piping for sleeves at such time as not to delay general construction.
3.03 LOCATION OF OUTLETS AND SWITCHES Locate and submit at once to the Architect discrepancies between electrical and architectural plans before installation. Center all outlets in all panels and spaces provided, unless indicated otherwise.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Properly ground and bond all metallic conduit, supports, cabinets and equipment by means of copper straps. Ground conduits of each system by connecting to the water service pipes. B. Check ground connections if clean, tin, and sweat bolting. Install all ground cables in exposed conduits unless otherwise specified, readily accessible for inspection. Never place connections underground or concealed in floors or walls.
SECTION 16420 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
Furnish materials and equipment and perform labor required to complete the following: Power distribution system Lighting system
Refer to drawings for extent and magnitude of work.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
3.0 EXECUTION
A. Unless otherwise indicated in drawings, do all wiring for power, connections of motors and line switches, motor starters, speed regulators, circuit breakers, compensators or any other appliance or electrical component that may need motor and specific power requirement. Present a representative when the motors are first started by the supplier for testing.
B. Balance lighting conduits at the panels on the 1-phase, 3-wire systems.
3.03 FIRE ALARM AND SIGNALLING BELL SYSTEM
A. Install all wiring in rigid conduit and, in general, conceal them in the structure. B. Install components at terminals as the general location indicated in the plans, and in conformity with the respective specifications for the systems. Confirm the exact placement of components with the Architect prior to implementation and installation
3.04 LIGHTING ARRESTER
A. Use bare copper wire, 30mm (No. 2), and grounding rod 16 mm diameter x 3.00 meters solid copper embedded in the ground. B. Fix the cable securely to the base of the tower and to the solid rod at its base
SECTION 16700 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete fire alarm system including associated equipment and appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for operation. B. Equipment, materials installation, workmanship, inspection and testing shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provision of NFPA 72A, Fire Code of the Philippines and NFPA 72E, except as modified herein. C. Devices shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Please submit brochures.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLER
A. Prior to installation, submit data for approval by the owner, showing that the contractor has successfully installed interior fire alarm system of the same type design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with the subcontractor having such required experience. B. The data shall include the names and location of at least two installations where the contractor or the subcontractor referred to above has installed such system. C. The contractor shall indicate the type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months.
1.03 MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVE.
A. Furnish the services of the qualified fire alarm system manufacturers representative of technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of the fire alarm system, being provided, to supervise the testing, including formal testing, adjustment of the system, instruction to owner personnel.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The owners project engineer/safety engineer shall review and approve submittals. Shop drawing and descriptive data shall be approved prior to procurement, fabrication, and installation. A. Manufacturers Data: 1. Fire alarm control panel, including all attached modules. a. Manual station b. Cabinet Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
c.
Batteries
d. Battery Charger e. Smoke and Heat Detectors f. Control Module
g. Alarm bell h. Conductors
B. Shop Drawings Provide drawing that clearly and completely indicate the function of the control panel and devices connected thereto. Indicate termination points of devices and indicate the interconnection of the modules required for proper operation of the system. C. Calculation Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance 1. Provide six copies, bound securely in durable, hard cover, water-resistant binder. Include instruction of operation and maintaining system components, assemblies, and accessories, include a detailed description of the control panel and system operation under routing and emergency condition. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
2. Include as-built circuit diagram complete with conductor color codes, a parts list by name, model number and manufacturer, and a listing of smoke and heat detector location, with the serial number and firing voltage for each. 3. General system description included in manufacturers catalogs or advertising media will not be acceptable in meeting the operation and maintenance manual requirement. E. Spare parts 1. Spare parts shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. 2. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplates, stamping or tagging. 3. Key and locks for equipment shall be identical where possible. Furnish the following. a. Four key or tools for resetting manual station b. Four keys for lock of control panel or cabinets c. One of each type smoke detector
d. One heat detector e. Zone module f. One manual pull station
2.0 SYSTEM DESIGN
2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. General Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
The fire alarm system shall consist of microprocessor based Fire Alarm Control Panel, Remote command centers, detection devices, manual pull station, alarm devices and wiring system. The system shall be providing fire alarm system for whole areas and shall be capable of initiating and indicating all alarm condition. The system shall be capable of performing time based control function. B. The system shall function as follows when the area detector, manual pull station and water flow switches operates.
1. General alarm, activation of any general areas manual station and detector. 2. Display individual detector on alphanumeric display on the fire alarm panels within the network. 3. Light an indicating lamp on the device initiating the alarm.
2.02 COMPONENTS DESIGN
A. Fire Alarm Control Panel 1. Provide micro processor based control panel. 2. The control panel will provide power, annunciator, supervision and control of the fire alarm system. 3. The control panel shall be modular in construction, contains modules to operate according to the specification. 4. The system shall be capable of reading and display at the control panel, the sensitivity of the remote addressable photoelectric smoke detector as well as the fixed temperature type of heat detector. 5. The individual addressable detector device alarm threshold shall be adjustable from control panel. Addressable device shall be individually identified by the system, and quantity of addressable devices shall be in alarm at any time up to the number connected to the system. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
6. The panel annunciator shall have 80 character backlit alphanumeric display, which shall provide user defined message associated to each detection device. 7. The control panel shall operate from 230V AC, single phase, 60Hz, power supply and internal 24V DC back-up battery. All power connection whether AC or DC shall be separately fused within the control panel.
B. Manual Pull Station 1. Provide addressable manual pull station as indicated on the plan. Station shall be surface-mounted. 2. Surface-mounted boxes shall be painted the same color as the fire alarm station. Mount station with the base at 1.73 meters above the finished floor. 3. Provide each station with screw-type terminal of proper number and type to perform function required. 4. Housing shall be painted red and labeled FIRE ALARM using permanently fixed, engraved red white plastic identification signs. Identification signs shall be fixed to the face of the housing cover, letters shall be a minimum of 19 mm high. 5. Provide separate screw terminal for each conductor connected to the manual alarm station. 6. The manual station address shall be set by electronic means only. No mechanical means such as programming pins, dip switches or rotary dials shall be used.
C. Smoke Detectors 1. Provide addressable photoelectric smoke detectors as indicated on the plans. 2. The detector shall contain light emitting diodes as its source, and photo diodes as a light receiver. An automatic gain control circuit shall be provided. Correct sensitivity by the compensation for detector aging and dirt accumulation. It shall be possible to adjust the sensitivity of each detector from control panel. 3. The detector shall be plug-in twist/lock unit that allows for easy connection to its mounting base. 4. The detector address shall be set by electronic means only, no mechanical means such as programming by pins, dip switches or rotary shall be used. D. Heat Detectors 1. Provide addressable heat detectors as indicated on the plans. Detectors shall be fixed temperature type. 2. The detectors address shall be set by electronic means only, no mechanical means such as programming by pins, dip switches or rotary shall be used. E. Bells 1. Provide 200mm surface mounted type with matching back box and shall be UL approved. 2. Bell shall be underdone, vibrating type, suitable for use in electrically supervised circuit, with a sound output rating of at least 85 decibels at 3 meters. 3. Provide bells specifically listed for outdoor use in exposed locations. 4. Bells shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor connection. F. Grounding
1. Fire alarm panel shall be grounded, by connecting to the building grounding system.
SECTION 16800 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Interior Backbone Cabling Communication Pathways. B. Minimum composition requirements and installation methods for the following pathways: 1. Conduit 2. Sleeves 3. Ladder Cable Tray 4. Cable Hangers
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. All pathways and associated equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Design Consultant. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where approved equal is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. Philippine Electrical Code 2. The following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards: a. ANSI-C80.3 Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinccoated 3. The following Telecommunication Industry Association (TIA) standards: a. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard b. ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A Commercial Building Standard for \ Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces. c. EIA/TIA 606 A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. d. EIA/TIA 607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding requirements for Telecommunications 4. The following BICSI guidelines
a. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Design Manual (10 Edition) b. BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (2 c.
nd
th
Edition)
nd
BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (2 Edition)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data for the following: 1. Conduit 2. Sleeves 3. Ladder Cable Tray 4. Cable Hangers
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUITS
A. Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit 1. Schedule 40, constructed of polyvinyl chloride
B. Fittings Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 2. Connectors shall have insulated throat up to and includi ng 1 size. For sizes 1-1/4 and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. C. Waterproofing 1. Provide watertight expanding link-type seals for installation between the conduit and the sleeve or core drilled hole. D. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of rain-tight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. 2.02 LADDER CABLE TRAY
Ladder Cable Trays shall be steel construction including accessories. Maximum rung spacing 9 in. on center is welded to side rails. Minimum of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special radius elbows where required for field conditions.
2.03 CABLE HANGERS
A. Provide prefabricated, zinc coated, carbon steel hangers designed specifically for UTP and Optical Fiber cable installations. B. Hangers shall have open top, rolled edges and a 3 or 4 minimum diameter loop. C. Provide beam clamps, rod fasteners, flange clips and brackets as job.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Support raceways from building construction. Do not support raceways from ductwork, piping or equipment hangers. B. Support outlet, pull and junction boxes independently from building construction. Do not support from raceways. C. Coordinate all raceway runs with other trades. D. All open raceways shall be installed a minimum of 6 in. away from any light fixture or other source of EMI (Electro-magnetic interference). E. All horizontal pathways shall be bonded and grounded per the NEC Article 250. F. In all cases, horizontal pathways shall be sized for a minimum of 50% future growth.
3.02 CONDUITS
A. Electrical Metallic Tubing, Rigid Metal Conduit and Rigid PVC are allowed conduit types. Flexible metal conduit is not allowed. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. Install with a minimum of bends and offsets. Bends shall not kink or destroying the interior cross section of the raceway. Factory made bends shall be used for raceways 1 t rade size and larger. Bends radius shall be 6 times the internal diameter for conduit sizes up to 2 inches. A conduit greater than 2 inches shall have bend radius at least 10 times the diameter of the conduit. C. Runs exceeding 100 feet or 180 degrees total bends shall be broken with suitable sized pull or splice boxes. (LB or similar conduit fittings are not acceptable for runs of riser cables) D. Do not locate riser pull boxes at bends without prior review and approval of the Design Consultant. Where possible use instead sweeps for the bend and locate in a straight pull nearby. E. Conduits shall be sized to accept 40% future growth; sizing shall account for fire code capacity restrictions. F. Plug the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved ca or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. G. Secure within free feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. H. Provide a #14 AWG fish wire in all Spare or Empty conduit runs to facilitate future installation of cables. I. J. Where conduits puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Identification: Clearly label conduit at exposed ends indicating closet or outlet where conduit terminated and the length of the conduit. Label pull boxes indicating destination of conduits entering and exiting.
K. Backbone pathways shall be in the form of 4 conduits or sleeves between the main communication equipment rooms and spaces and closets shall be provided as shown on drawings.
L. Fire stop all pathways as called for in section 25010 of this document. This includes using 3M/EZ Path fire rate pathways by Specified Technologies, Inc. (ww.stifirestop.com). M. Stub out conduits into closets only enough to attach connector and bushings, except conduits shall rise a minimum of 6 inches above the finished floor. N. Bush all conduit ends O. Conduits shall be concealed except in the flowing areas: 1. Mechanical Rooms 2. Electric Rooms 3. Manufacturing Areas 4. Garage or maintenance areas 5. Unfinished basements or crawl spaces P. Do not install raceways adjacent to hot surfaces or in wet areas. Q. Install conduits to edges of excess boxes so as to maximize the total number of conduits that can be routed through the pull box. R. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints, S. Arrange neatly to permit access to the raceway, outlet, pull and junction boxes, and work installed by other trades. T. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Design Consultant and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. U. Core drill, sleeve, and fire stop all penetrations through existing floors.
V. Support raceways with malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved method. In exterior or wet locations, provide minimum air space between raceway and wall. Secure raceway within 3ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. W. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Equipment, piping, ducts and the like shall not block access to boxes. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as required by the Philippine Electrical Code.
3.03 SLEEVES
Install sleeves as shown on drawings
3.04 CABLE TRAYS
A. Hang Cable tray using threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through support steel and double nuttedA minimum of 12 headroom shall be provided above all cable trays. B. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves, crossovers and at other locations where tray continuity is interrupted. C. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers, connectors, clamps, rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job, coordinate with the Network & Telecommunications Department. D. Provide conduit to tray fitting at each conduit entrance to tray.
E. Install divider in trays where cables of different systems are carried in the same tray. F. Install fire stop wall frames around cable tray at penetrations through fire rated walls, and where called for. Seal all these openings with pliable fire resistant sealant.
3.05 CABLE HANGERS
A. Provide cable hangers a maximum of 3 on center wherever cable tray or conduit is not present, B. Ceiling ties and rods shall not be used to hand cable or cable supports Load hangers as recommended by the manufacture. Provide hangers side on a common bracket where cable quantities required. C. Do not install cables loose above lock-in type, drywall and plaster ceilings. D. Cables shall be installed at least 3 in. above the ceiling tiles and shall not touch the ceiling. E. Do not support cable from ceiling system tie wires or grid in fire rated systems. F. Provide a minimum of 2 spare bracket mounted hangers in new construction.
3.06 BOXES
Pull boxes used for angle or U pulls shall have a distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box of at least 6 times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway. The distance being increased by the sum of the trade size diameters of the other raceways on the same wall of the box and have a distance between the nearest edges of each raceway enclosing the same conductor of at least 6 times the trade size diameter of the raceway or 6 times the trade size diameter of the larger raceway if they are of different sizes. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
3.07 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hangers and Supports:
1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support of wall-mounted cabinets, racks, panels, etc. 2. Cabinets, large pull boxes, and cable support boxes shall be secured to ceiling and floor slab and not supported from conduits. Small equipment boxes, etc. as approved by Network & Telecommunication Department, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduit and heavy equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports.
Section 16850 STRUCTURED CABLING (VOICE, DATA, & CATV)
1.0 GENERAL
1.01 CONDITIONS
The work under this Section shall be subject to the requirements of the General Conditions, which shall be included as part of this Specifications and which shall apply to all work to be performed under the Electrical Division. The contract documents, instructions, drawings and specifications shall be considered as one. Whatever is called for by any of the documents shall be as binding as if called for by all.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
The work to be done under this Division of the Specifications consists of the fabrication, furnishing, delivery and installation, complete in all detail of the Telecommunication Work at the subject premises and all work materials incidental to the proper completion of the project, except those portion of the work which are expressly stated to be done by others. All work shall be in accordance with the governing Codes and Regulations and with the Specifications, except where some shall conflict with codes, etc., which the latter shall then govern. The requirements in regard to materials and workmanship specify the required standard for the furnishing of all labor, materials and appliances necessary for the complete installation of the work specified herein and indicated on the drawings. These specifications are intended to provide a broad outline of the required equipment, but are not intended to include all details of the design and construction.
1.00 CONDITIONS
The work under this Section shall be subject to the requirements of the General Conditions, which shall be included as part of this Specifications and which shall apply to all work to be performed under the Electrical Division. The contract documents, instructions, drawings and specifications shall be considered as one. Whatever is called for by any of the documents shall be as binding as if called for by all.
1.01 DESCRIPTION
The work to be done under this Division of the Specifications consists of the fabrication, furnishing, delivery and installation, complete in all detail of the Telecommunications Work at the subject premises and all work materials incidental to the proper completion of the project, except those portion of the work which are expressly stated to be done by others. All work shall be in accordance with the governing Codes and Regulations and with the Specifications, except where
some shall conflict with codes, etc., which the latter shall then govern. The requirements in regard to materials and workmanship specify the required standard for the furnishing of all labor, materials and appliances necessary for the complete installation of the work specified herein and indicated on the drawings. These specifications are intended to provide a broad outline of the required equipment, but are not intended to include all details of the design and construction.
1.02 REFERENCES
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568 B Commercial Building Telecom Standards
ANSI/EIA/TIA 569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecom Pathways and Spaces
ANSI/EIA/TIA 606 A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecom Infrastructures
ANSI/EIA/TIA 607 Commercial Building Grounding & Bonding Requirements
1.03 WORK INCLUDED
Under this Division and together with the Specifications provide all materials and equipment and perform all the work necessary for the complete execution of the telecommunications systems shown on the telecom drawings with reference to the general construction drawings are herein specified, or both except as otherwise excluded and which, without excluding the generality of the foregoing, shall include but not limited to the following principal items of work.
1. Supply and installation of a complete structured cabling and conduit system for voice and data communications. 2. Supply and installation of a complete community antennae television system (CATV). 3. Supply and installation of panel-boards, inside Telecommunication Rooms. 4. Supply and installation of a complete grounding system.
5. Furnish and installation of the complete power and control wirings to various communications equipment as shown on the telecommunication plans. 6. Painting of all exposed telecommunication conduits, enclosures and equipment. 7. Termination and system testing and commissioning of all telecommunication systems. 8. If anything has been omitted for any items of work or materials, usually furnished which are necessary for the completion of the entire work as outlined herein before, then such items must be and hereby included in this division of work.
1.04 COPIES, INSPECTIONS, PERMITS AND FEES
A. The work under this Contract is to install according to the requirements of the latest Philippine Electrical Code, the rules and regulations of the City of Cebu, the requirements of the Electronics Industry Association/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA) and the requirements of the local power and telephone companies. Nothing contained in these specifications or shown on the drawings shall be construed as to conflict with the national and local ordinances or laws governing the installation of the electrical work and all such laws and ordinances are hereby made part of these specifications. The Contractor is required to meet the requirements thereof.
B. All permits and electrical fees required for this work shall be obtained by and at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect, Engineers and the Owner the final certificate of Inspection and approval from the proper government authorities after the completion of work. The contractor shall prepare all As-Built electrical plans and all other paperwork required by the approving authorities.
1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, must keep a careful record of all changes where the actual installation differs from that shown on the construction drawings. The engineers will furnish at cost a complete set of sepia prints on which the Contractor shall, in a neat and accurate manner will make a complete record of all changes and revisions to the original design, as installed in the completed work. These drawings shall be submitted to the engineers for approval. B. After the approval they shall become the property of the Engineers and final payment will be withheld until receipt of the approved record drawings.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Prepare and submit for approval to the engineer shop drawings and cuts of all equipment, appliances and fixtures to be furnished. After final approval by the engineer, a sufficient number of copies as directed shall be furnished for distribution. Fixture and device cuts and/or catalogues shall be clearly marked to indicate the items furnished. Do not submit individual sheets, cuts, catalogues or drawings. B. Submit to the engineer for approval samples of conduits, wires, wiring devices, finished plates and or any other items as may be required by the consultant.
1.07 COORDINATION
The contractor shall cooperate in every way and work with all other contractors to whose apparatus he shall connect is part of his work and also provide in his work connections and facilities for the connection of their work. The contractor is hereby called upon to prepare such drawings of details of his equipment, locations of sleeves, inserts and supports as may be required for the assistance of the general contractor and the contractors for other mechanical trades. Upon demand, he shall furnish these drawings in adequate numbers for the information of all parties concerned and shall coordinate the preparation of these drawings by consultation with other trades involved before submitting them. The approval Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
of such drawings will not relieve the Contractor in any way from the responsibility of not properly locating his work with the work of others.
1.08 MINOR MODIFICATIONS
A. The plans as drawn are based upon the architectural plans and the details and shown coordination as accurately as it is possible to indicate them in scale. The plans are diagrammatical and do not necessarily shows all fittings necessary to fit to the building conditions. The locations of outlets, apparatus and appliances shown on the plans are approximate. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper location in order to make them fit with the architectural details and instructions from engineers representative at the site.
1.09 GUARANTEES
A. This Contractor shall guarantee that the entire telecommunications system is free from all defective workmanship and materials and will remain so for the period of two years from the date of acceptance of the work.
B. The contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, the Architect and the Engineers from and against all liability for damages arising from injuries or disabilities to persons or damages to property occasioned by any or omission of the contractor or any of his subcontractors including any and all legal expenses or Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
otherwise, which may be incurred by the Owner, the Architect or the Engineers in the defense of any claims, actions, or suit.
1.10 APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Whenever hereinafter the work for approval, or approved (make, type, size, arrangement, etc.) are used, especially in regard to manufactured specialties, or whatever it is desired to substitute a different make or type of apparatus, shall be submitted to the Engineer and their approval must be secured before the apparatus is ordered of installed.
1.11 SUBCONTRACTORS
The contractors shall be held fully responsible for the work of any subcontractors or manufacturer performing work or supplying materials, as it is intended that the entire electrical work, when finally delivered to the Owner, shall be ready in every respect for satisfactory and efficient operation.
1.12 WORKMANSHIP
A. The work throughout shall be executed in the best and through manner under the direction of and to the satisfaction of the Architects and the Engineers, who will jointly interpret the meaning of the drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work and materials in which, in their judgment are not in full accordance therewith.
B. The Contractor shall have in his file, for ready access and reference, a set of drawings indicating all work as normally instead, incorporating in same all changes and additions. Upon the termination of the Contract, he shall prepare a set of tracings indicating thereon the electrical work as actually and finally installed. These tracings shall be turned over to the Engineers.
1.13 STANDARD OF MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and shall conform to the standards set forth by standardmaking bodies, including but not limited to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., ASA, IEEE, NEMA, IPCEA, and ASTM, ANSI/EIA/TIA Telecommunications Infrastructure Standards, in every case where such a standard has been established for the particular type of materials in question.
B. All materials on all systems shall comply with the following specifications, unless noted specifically and all materials when not specified shall be the best in their respective kind.
C. Samples of any materials shall be submitted for approval to the designing electrical engineer.
1.14 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Approval of materials: All materials shall be new and must meet the requirements of the specifications and shall bear the inscription label wherever such standards have been established. As soon as practicable and within thirty days after the official award of Contract and before any materials or equipment is ordered, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineers for approval, one complete list of materials, apparatus and equipment, in triplicate, giving the manufacturers name, address, descriptive data, trade name of items, rated capacities, certified analysis catalogue number, etc., and when called upon to do so, the complete specifications and cut of drawings of such item, of whole or portion of list, as required by the Engineers, which he proposes to use or install.
B. Ground Test: The entire installation shall be free from improper ground and from short circuits. These shall be made and recorded in the presence of a representative of the Owner, project managers and the Engineers. Each panel will be tested with mains connected to the feeder, branches connected and switches closed, all fixtures in place and permanently connected, lamps removed or omitted from the sockets, ballast disconnected and all wall switches closed. Each individual power feeder shall be tested with the power equipment connected for proper and intended operation, In no case shall the insulation resistance be less than that allowed by the regulations for electrical equipment and buildings. Failures shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Engineers.
C. Permanence Test: It shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor to test all systems of the entire electrical installation for proper conditions. This condition shall apply to the power, lighting and auxiliary installations, Where sequence operation is required, the electrical contractor shall test for proper sequence and he shall leave the entire electrical installation in satisfactory working condition.
D. Cutting and Fitting: Contractor shall do all cutting and fitting required for the installation of the work to make and join the several parts and coordinate with the work of the other trades, in accordance with the drawings and in manner satisfactory to the Engineers.
E. Protection: Contractor shall effectually protect his own work from damage during and as may be necessary after installation and he shall protect adjoining work of other trades from damage resulting from the installation of electrical work.
1.15 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The location of various items indicated on the drawings are presumed to be approximately correct, but it is be understood however, that the small scale drawings are necessarily diagrammatic and that such locations as shown, are subject to slight revision as the work is installed, which may be necessary to accommodate local construction conditions. No major change shall be made, however, without approval in writing of the Engineers. The contractor shall examine and study the architectural scale drawings, large scale and full size details, the approved shop drawings of other trades and he shall frequently consult with the general contractor to ascertain any changes that may have been made and he shall be guided accordingly before establishing the precise locations of conduit runs, panels, pull and junction boxes and outlets for all lighting power and auxiliary system. 2.0 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The Voice, Data, and Video (CATV) system shall consist of an interior system of conduits, outlet boxes, junction boxes, terminal cabinets and main distribution frames to accommodate the installation of all Telephone/Data System Transmission Media Types (Twisted pair copper and Wireless), and all Electronic Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Equipment and Circuits needed for the Telephone/Data System, as shown on the plans.
B. The system shall include the following items: For Voice and Data: 1. Telephone/data distribution raceway system, including terminal cabinets, conduit, tray, outlets, manhole and pull boxes.\
2. Wireless Access Points (WAP), data outlets, firewall, data switch, access control, devices and server. 3. Closet electrical systems to include electrical service equipment, distribution outlets and lighting. 4. Grounding system for raceways and Telecom Rooms (TR) 5. Code compliant fire stopping for all penetrations, trays, and unused conduits. For CATV: 1. Building Amplifier which will be located at the Main CATV Cabinet within the Entrance Facility (EF) Room. 2. CATV Distribution system including CATV cabinets, conduits, boxes, taps, splitters and CATV outlets. 3. Trunk Cables and feeder cables. C. Cabling Components 1. Voice and Data 1.1 UTP Cat 6, 4 pairs, solid, 24 AWG 1.2 UTP Cat 6, 25 pairs, solid, 24 AWG 1.3 Patch Cords Cat 6, 3ft and 5ft 1.4 Open Bay Rack, 7ft 1.5 Patch Panel Cat 6, 24-ports 1.6 Cable Manager, 2U 1.7 Rack Shelf, 19 1.8 Cable Duck, 8 Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
1.9 110 Wiring Block with Legs, 100 pairs 1.10 110 Wiring Block with Legs, 50 pairs 1.11 8-Pin Modular Jacks, Cat 6 (RJ45 Information Outlets) 2. CATV 2.1 RG-11 Coaxial Cable 2.2 RG-6 Coaxial Cable D. Conduits 1. Conduit size for station drops (to outlets) shall no less than PVC. 2. Conduits that function as floor penetration (riser) sleeves shall no less that 4 PVC. 3. Underground inter-building conduit shall be no less than 4 PVC. E. Cable Trays 1. Tray size shall be 12 x 4. 2. All cable trays shall be grounded and bonded per Electrical Codes. 3. No other cables shall occupy the tray except those that are part of the telecommunication system.
F. Outlet 1. For voice and data, all RJ-45 jack modules should be wired in accordance with TIA/EIA 568-B. 2. For CATV, all connectors shall be RG6 F Connector Type. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.00 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS (TR) A. TR Provisioning: The TR shall include provisions to furnish and install all items required to complete the equipping of the Main Distribution Facility (MDF) and the Intermediate Distribution Facility (IDF). This shall include but not limited to laddertype cable tray, equipment racks, patch panels, electrical service and backboard layout for all low-voltage signaling systems. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
B. All MDF and IDF Rooms shall conform to the following: 1. All walls shall be lined with 4 x 8 x Fire-resistant plywood, A side out. 2. Plywood shall be mounted vertically with flush or countersunk fasteners. 3. The bottom edge of the plywood shall be mounted 9 AFF so that the top is 89 AFF. (This allows better support for cable runway brackets) 4. Plywood shall be mounted such that the joints are butted tight. 5. Plywood shall be painted with two coats of white, sating finish (washable) paint. 6. All telecom rooms shall be provided with three 20 amps circuit to serve three standard outlet boxes, each having two duplex receptacles. Locate outlet boxes directly above the top edge of the backboard. 7. Telecom rooms shall have grounding as specified in paragraph 1.28 Grounding System. C. CATV Distribution system shall be star topology with each outlet connected to a distribution closet with a feeder cable or drop cable and each distribution closet connected to the headend equipment System. 3.01 TELECOMMUNICATION CABLES A. Data and voice cables shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 6, consisting of a minimum 4 pairs of No. 24 AWG solid conductors and shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/EIA/TIA. B. CATV Coaxial Cables shall be RG11 for the trunk lines and RG6 for the feeder lines, and shall be plenum-rated.
3.02 CONDUITS A. Metallic conduits for interior and exterior systems shall be a standard weight, mild steel, hot-dip galvanized with an interior coating as manufactured by Matsushita, Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
Pusan, TSP, Nippon, Allied, or equal. Non-metallic conduits shall be Neltex or equal. B. No conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 20mm dia. electrical trade size, nor shall have more than four 90-degree bends in any one run and when necessary, pull boxes shall be provided as directed. Location and sizes of pull boxes shall be cleared to the engineer prior to fabrication and installation. C. No wires shall be pulled into any conduit unless system is complete in all details. In the case of concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been completed and in the case of exposed work, until the conduit has been completed in every detail. D. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude plaster, dust and moisture while the building is in the process of construction. E. All conduits and fittings on exposed work shall be secured by means of channels and clamps, Conduit layout, in all cases shall run perfectly straight and true, satisfactory to the architect and to the engineer.
3.03 OUTLETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS A. All outlets of whatever kind, for all systems, these shall be provided with suitable fittings, which shall be either a box or other devices especially designed to receive the type of fittings to be mounted thereon. B. The contractor shall consult with the architect and the engineers as to the nature of the various fittings to be used before installing the outlet fittings and shall conform strictly in the use of such fittings, to the nature of the appliance to be mounted on them, so that the work, when finished will be completed design.
C. In the case of fixtures, the outlet fittings shall be provided with suitable fixture supports of a size and kind required by the fixture to be hung. Fixture studs in general shall be 9.376mm. D. At all outlets on concealed conduit work, provide galvanized deep-type pressedsteel, outlet boxes of standard make. These boxes shall be especially designed for apparatus required and in all cases where such boxes are not available on the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
market; special boxes shall be made by the contractor at his own expense. Outlet boxes shall be deep type gage # 16, as manufactured by Matsushita or equal. E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be provided with compression-type fittings.
3.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES Junction and pull boxes per code gage steel, shall only be subject to the permission of the engineer and be provided as indicated or as required for facilitating the pulling of wires and cables. Pull boxes in finished places shall be located and installed only with the permission of and to the satisfaction of the architect and engineer. 3.05 INFORMATION OUTLETS (IO) A. The information Outlets shall be Category 6, RJ45 jack for the data system using the EIA/TIA 568-B wiring standard. B. Coaxial cable shall be terminated in a flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector in a standard electrical outlet box. Type and color of receptacle outlet plates be selected by the Architect and appropriate samples of outlets and plates shall be submitted prior to purchase of devices. Receptacles shall be as manufactured by National or equal. 3.06 PANELS AND CABINETS A. Standards panels and cabinets as far as possible shall be used and assembled at jobsite. Cabinets shall be of code gauge steel gutters at least 150mm and wider, if necessary. The trim for all panels shall be finished in gray enamel over a rust inhibitor. Front doors shall be provided with concealed hinges. B. Panels and cabinets shall be fabricated by a reputable fabricator. Fabricators shop drawings in triplicate shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Acceptable fabricators are Fuji-Haya Electric, Beta Electric, Nema Electric and Edison Electric. Only one brand of circuit breakers and fabricator shall be used for the entire requirement of the project.
3.07 INDIVIDUAL BREAKERS AND SWITCHES Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. Provide individual circuit breakers, and disconnect switches when indicated on the plans. Voltage rating shall be suitable in case of service application. B. Enclosure for indoor application shall be NEMA-1 and for outdoor application shall be NEMA-3R unless otherwise indicated in the plans. C. All protective devices shall meet NEMA, and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. specifications.
D. Circuit breakers shall consist of a quick-make, quick-break type entirely trip-free operating mechanism contacts with arc interrupter and thermal-magnetic trip used for each pole and enclosed in a molded phenolic case. The thermal-magnetic trip unit shall provide time delay overload protection and instantaneous short circuit protection and shall operate internal common-trip bar which will open all poles in case of overload or short circuit current in any one-pole, Circuit breaker shall be trip indicating with the tripped position of breaker midway between ON and OFF positions. E. Only one single brand of circuit breakers shall be used on the entire project requirement. Acceptable brands are General Electric, Fuji Electric, Square D and Mitsubishi Electric. Submit brochures for approval. F. Minimum interrupting capacities of each circuit breaker are indicated on the load schedule, application of circuit breakers shall be approved for the intended load per panelboard schedule. G. Safety and disconnect switches shall be non-fusible and of sizes indicated on plans and shall be normal duty type, except as noted otherwise. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. 3.08 LOCATION FOR WIRING AND OUTLETS
A. The contractor shall coordinate his work with all trades involved so that exact locations may be obtained for all telecommunication outlets, apparatus, appliances and equipment. B. The location of telecommunication outlets shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of outlet boxes, to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedules, scale drawings, large scale and full size details of finished rooms and the approved shop drawings of other trades or from the architect. In centering the outlets, due allowance shall be made for window and door trims, variations in thickness of pouring, plastering, etc., as erected, regardless of conditions which may be otherwise shown on small scale drawings. Outlets incorrectly located shall be properl y relocated at the contractors expense. 3.09 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. The Main Distribution Facility in each building shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Main Ground Bus Bar (TMGB). Each IDF shall be provided with a Telecommunications Ground Bus Bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility using #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor with compression connectors. The #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor shall be continuous from TMGB through all IDFs and attached to each respective TGB. A licensed Electrician shall install all grounding and bonding systems in compliance with the PEC. B. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic raceways, cable trays, etc., entering or residing in the MDF or IDF shall be grounded to the TGB or TMGB using #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor using compression connectors. C. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes, size #6 AWG or similar shall be insulated stranded, copper wire. Grounding cable size #5 AWG and larger may be non-insulated wire but shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green tape. D. Contractor to test the grounding system to assure continuity and resistance to ground is not excessive. Submit written results of each test to the Engineer for approval. Ground resistance shall be below 3 ohms.
3.10 CLEANING UP Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
A. The Contractor shall at all times keep the construction area, including storage areas use by him, free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish and prior to completion of work. Remove any rubbish from and about the premises and all tools, scaffolding, equipment and materials not the property of the owner.
B. Upon the completion of the construction, the contractor shall leave the work and premises in a condition satisfactory to the owner and the engineer.
3.11 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Upon completion of the project, the following procedure shall be implemented:
1. Walk-thru inspection by the owner, engineer and contractor. Any discrepancy noted shall be fixed before the project is closed.
2. Compile a complete requirement maintenance manual for all equipment.
3. Submit copy of As-Built drawings to the owner and engineer.
recordings Motion detection Camera based motion detection for low bandwidth utilization Visual indication, audible alert, email Alarm, event and audit logs Windows Vista, Windows XP Pro (server and/or client), Windows 2008 Server, 2003 Server (server only) CPU: Intel P4 or higher, 2GHz (Intel core 2quad recommended for larger systems), 1GB
Alarm Notifications Logs System Requirements
Computer Requirements Client/ Server
RAM (4GB recommended), 1024 x 768 screen Hard disk configuration At 30fps in VGA: up to 15 cameras per hard disk
K. Wires and Cables 1. Shall meet or exceed the manufacturers recommendation for power and signal. 2. Will be carried in an enclosed conduit system, utilizing electromagnetic tubing (EMT) to include the equivalent in flexible metal, rigid galvanized steel (RGS) to include the equivalent of liquid tight, polyvinylchloride (PVC) schedule 40 or 80. 3. All conduits will be sized and installed per the PEC. All security system signal and power cables that traverse of originate in a high security office space will contained in either EMT or RGS conduit. 4. All conduit, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be clearly marked with colored permanent tape or paint that will allow it to be distinguished from all other conduit and infrastructure. 5. Conduit fills shall not exceed 50 percent unless otherwise documented. 6. A pull string shall be pulled along and provided with signal and power cables to assist in future installation. 7. At all locations where there is a wall penetration or core drilling is conducted to allow for conduit to be installed, fire stopping materials shall be applied to that area. 8. High voltage and signal cables shall not share the same conduit and shall be kept separate up to the point of connection. High voltage for the security system shall be defined as any cable or sets of cables carrying VDC/VAC or higher. 9. For all equipment that is carrying digital data between the Access Control System and Database Management or at a remote monitoring station, shall not be less that 20 AWG and stranded copper wire for each conductor. The cable or each individual conductor within the cable shall have a shield that provides 100% coverage. Cables with a single overall shield shall have a thinned copper shield drain wire. 10. All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cables, that act as a control, communication, or signal lines shall include surge protection. Surge protection shall be furnished at the equipment end and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
on each wire line circuit shall be installed within three (3) ft. (one(1)m.) of the building cable entrance. 11. The surge suppression device shall not attenuate or reduce the video or sync signal under normal conditions. Fuses and relays shall not be used as a means of surge protection. 12. Signal cables: a. Use a UTP category 6 cable a with standard RJ-45 connector at each end. b. Provide a separate cable for power. 13. Power Cables: a. Will be sized accordingly and shall comply with the PEC. High voltage power cables will be a minimum of three conductors, 14 AWG, stranded, and coated with a non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket. Low voltage cables will be a minimum of 18 AWG, stranded and non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket. b. Will be utilized for all components of the CCTV System that require a 220 VAC 60 Hz input. Each feed will be connected to a dedicated circuit breaker at a power panel that is primarily for the security system. c. All equipment connected to AC power shall be protected from surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41. fuses shall not be used as a means of surge protection.
d. Shall be rated for either 220 VAC, 60 Hz. e. Low Voltage Power Cables 1. Shall be a minimum of 18 AWG, Stranded and have a polyvinylchloride outer jacket. 2. Cable size shall be determined using a basic voltage over distance calculation and shall comply with the NECs requirements for low voltage cables. 2.02 INSTALLATION KIT A. General 1. The kit shall be provided that, at a minimum, includes all connectors and terminals, labeling systems, audio spade lugs, barrier strips, punch blocks or wire Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
wrap terminals, heat shrink tubing, cable ties, solder, hangers, clamps, bolts, conduit, cable duct; and/or cable tray, etc., required to accomplish a neat and secured installation. All wires shall terminate in a spade lug and barrier strip, wire wrap terminal or punch block. Unfinished or unlabeled wire connections shall not be allowed. All unused and partially opened installation kit boxes, fiber-optic. And twisted pair cable reels, conduit, cable tray, and/or cable duct bundles, wire rolls, physical installation hardware shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer. The following sections outline the minimum required installation sub-kits to be used: 2. System Grounding: a. The grounding kit shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All head end equipment and power supplies shall be connected to earth ground via internal building wiring, according to the PEC. b. This includes, but is not limited to: 1.) Control Cable Shields 2.) Data C able Shield 3.) Equipment Racks and Cabinets 4.) Conduits 5.) Cable Trays 6.) Power Panels 7.) Grounding 3. Wire and Cable: The wire and cable kit shall include all connectors and terminals, audio spade lugs, barrier straps, punch blocks. Wire wrap strips, heat shrink tubing, tie wraps, solder, hangers, clamps, labels, etc., required to accomplish a neat and orderly installation. 4. Conduit, Cable Duct, and Cable Tray: The kit shall include all conduit , duct, trays, junction boxes, back boxes, cover plates, feed through nipples, hangers, clamps other hardware required to accomplish a neat and secure conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray installation in accordance with the NEC and this document. 5. Equipment Interface: The equipment kit shall include any item or quantity of equipment, cable, mounting hardware and materials needed to interface the Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
systems with the identified sub-system(s) according to the OEM requirements and this document. 6. Labels: The labeling kit shall include any item or quantity of labels, tools, stencils, and materials needed to correctly label its subsystem according to the OEM requirements, as-installed drawings, and this document. 7. Documentation: The documentation kit shall include any item or quantity of items, computer discs, as installed drawings, equipments, maintenance, and operation manuals, and OEM materials needed to correctly provide the system documentation as required by this document and explained herein.
3.0 EXECUTION 3.00 INSTALLATION A. System installation shall be in accordance with NECA 303, manufacturer and related documents and references, for each type of security subsystem designed, engineered and installed. B. Components shall be configured with appropriate service points to pinopoint system trouble in less than 30 minutes. C. The Contractor shall install all system components including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, documentation, listed in Section 1.4 and 1.5 of this document, and shall furnish all necessary connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system.
D. The CCTV system will be designed, engineered, installed, and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whter the system is a stand alone or a complete network. E. For integration purposes, the CCTV System shall be integrated where appropriate with the following associated security subsystem: 1. Security Access Detection:
a. Provide full coverage of all vehicle and lobby entrance screening areas utilizing a fixed color camera. b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis. c. The CCTV System should have facial recognition software to assist in identifying individuals for current and future purposes.
F. Integration with the security subsystem shall be achieved by computer programming or the direct hardwiring of the systems. G. For programming purposes refer to the manufacturers requirements for correct system operations. Ensure computers being outlined on the systems software packages. H. A complete CCTV System shall be comprised of, but not limited to, the following components: 1. Cameras 2. Lenses 3. Video Display Equipment 4. Camera Housings and Mounts 5. Controlling Equipment 6. Recording Devices 7. Wiring Cables I. The Contractor shall visit the site and verify that site conditions are in agreement/compliance with the design package. The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will affect performance of the system to the Controlling Officer in the form of a report. The Contractor shall not take any corrective action without permission received from the Contracting Officer. Existing Equipment: 1. The Contractor shall connect to and utilize existing video equipment, video and control signal transmission lines, and devices as outlined in the design package. Video equipment and signal lines that are usable in their original configuration without modification may be reused with Contracting Officer approval. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
J.
2. The Contractor shall perform a field survey, including testing and inspection of all existing video equipment and signal lines intended to be incorporated into the CCTV System, and furnish a report to the Contracting Officer as part of the site survey report. For those items considered nonfunctioning, provide (with the report), estimated cost to correct the deficiency. As part of the report, the Contractor shall include a schedule for connection to all existing equipment. 3. The Contractor shall make written and obtain approval prior to disconnecting any signal lines and equipment, and creating equipment downtime. Such work shall proceed only after receiving Contracting Officer approval of these requests. If any device fails after the Contractor has commenced work on that device, signal or control line, the Contractor shall diagnose the failure and perform any necessary corrections to the equipment. 4. The Contractor shall be held responsible for repair costs due to Contractor negligence, abuse, or incorrect installation of equipment. 5. The Contracting Officer shall be provided a full list of all equipment that is to be removed or replaced by the Contractor, to include description and serial/manufacturer numbers where possible. The Contractor shall dispose of all equipment that has been removed or replaced based upon approval of the Contracting Officer after reviewing the equipment removal list. In all areas where equipment is removed or replaced the Contractor shall repair those areas to match the current existing conditions. K. Enclosure Penetrations: All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom of the enclosure unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approval sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged. L. Cold Galvanizing: All filled welds and brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, and conduits shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight. M. Interconnection of Console Video Equipment: The Contractor shall connect signal paths between video equipment as specified by the OEM. Cables shall be as short as predictable for each signal path without causing strain at the connectors. Rack mounted shall have cables of sufficient length to allow full extension of the slide rails from the rack. Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor
N. Cameras: 1. Install the cameras with the focal length lens as indicated for each zone. 2. Connect power and signal lines to the camera. 3. Set cameras with fixed iris lenses to the f-stop to give full-video level. 4. Aim camera to give field of views as needed to cover the alarm zone. 5. Aim fixed mounted cameras installed outdoors facing the rising or setting sun sufficiently below the horizon to preclude the camera looking directly looking at the sun. 6. Focus the lens to give a sharp picture (to include the checking or day and night focus and image quality ) over the entire field of view; and synchronize all cameras so the pictures does not roll on the mirror when cameras are selected. Dome cameras shall have all preset position defined and installed. O. Monitors: 1. Install the monitors as shown and specified in design and construction documents. 2. The Contractor will be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial phases of quality control to provide technical assistance. 3. The Contractor shall also be available on as needed basis to provide assistance with follow-up phases of quality control. 4. The Contractor shall participate in the testing and validation of the system and shall provide certification that the system installed is fully operational as all construction document requirements have been fulfilled.
TESTING AND TRAINING All testing and training shall be compliant with the requirements in Section 01500, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.
END OF SPECIFICATIONS

Project Manual01 Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Manual01 Final

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Manual01 Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What are the main divisions covered in the table of contents?

What are the main divisions covered in the table of contents?

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 1 -

Heading BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

00020 00025 00100 00300 00430 00450 00500 00700

00020-1 to 2 00025-1 00100-1 to 6 00300-1 to 3 00430-1 00450-1 00500-1 to 7 0700-1 to 43

DIVISION 01 01000 01010

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Explanation to Specifications. Summary of Work 01000-1 to 2 01010-1 to 3

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 2 -

01020 01100 01200 01300 01400 01500 01750

01020-1 to 30 01100-1 to 4 01200-1 to 3 01300-1 01400-1 to 4 01500-1 to 5 01750-1 to 2

DIVISION 02 02050 02100 02160 02200 02280 02400 02500 02520

DIVISION 02 03100 03200 03300

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 3 -

MASONRY 04100 Mortar 04200 Unit Masonry 04100-1 to 2 04200-1 to 2

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 4 -

09200-1 09300-1 to 2 09510-1 to 4 09900-1 to 5

CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14310 Elevators. 14310-1 to 2

MECHANICAL 15100 Air-conditioning and Ventilating System 15100-1 to 5

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 5 -

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 6 -

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 7 -

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 8 -

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 9 -

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - - 10 -

You are invited to participate in bidding for the above project:

The details of the bid are as follows:

1.0 QUALIFIED BIDDERS

Those invited to bid.

2.00 SECUREMENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

For invited bidders, complete Bid Documents, may be secured from:

NATZ ARCHITECTURE SERVICES

3.00 PRE-BID DOCUMENTS

Read and accepted as part of the Contract: ________________________________ Bidder / Contractor

PROPOSED SIX STOREY BUILDING WITH BASEMENT Table of contents.doc 10/27/11

______________ DATE: _